E-Class Wagon Digital–inthe vehicleVehicle document walletDigital –onthe InternetDigital –asanApp Familiarize yourself withthe con‐ Hereyou can find comprehen‐ Youcan find theOperator's Man‐ The Mercedes-Benz Guides App tents of theOperator's Manual sive informationabout operating ual on theMercedes-Benz home‐ is available free-of-charge in directly via thevehicle's multi‐ your vehicle and about services page. familiar App stores. media system (menu item "Vehi‐ and warranties in printed form. cle"). Startwiththe quickguide, discoveryour vehicle's highlights or broaden your knowledgewith useful tips.

Apple® iOS AndroidTM E-Class Wagon É21358456092ËÍ Operator'sManual 2135845609 Order no. P213 0862 13 Part no. 213584 56 09 EditionA2-2018 Mercedes-Benz Mercedes-Benz Symbols * NOTE Damage to property due to failure Publication details In this Operator's Manual, youwill find thefol‐ to observe notesonmaterial damage Internet lowing symbols: Notesonmaterial damageinformyou of Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi‐ cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the & riskswhichmay lead to your vehicle being DANGER Dangerdue to notobserving damaged. following websites: thewarning notices # Observe notesonmaterial damage. http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly) Warning notices draw your attentiontohaz‐ http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only) ards that mayendanger your healthorlife, or % Useful instructions or further information thehealthorlifeofothers. that couldbehelpful to you. Editorial office ©Daimler AG:Not to be reprinted, translated or # Please observe thewarning notices in X Instruction this manual. otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with‐ (Q page) Further information on atopic out written permission from Daimler AG. + Display Information in themultifunction dis‐ Vehiclemanufacturer ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental play/multimedia display damage due to failuretoobserve envi‐ Daimler AG ronmental notes + Highestmenu level, whichistobe Mercedesstrasse 137 selected in themultimedia system Environmental notesinclude information on 70327Stuttgart * Corresponding submenus, whichare environmentally responsible behavior or envi‐ to be selected in themultimedia sys‐ Germany ronmentally responsible disposal. tem # Observe environmentalnotes. *Indicates acause

As at 28.09.16 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz The equipment in your vehicle may therefore dif‐ fer from that shown in the descriptions and illus‐ Before you first drive off, read this Operator's trations. Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer The following are integral parts of the vehicle: vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning R Digital Operator's Manual notices in this Operator's Manual. Disregarding R Printed Operator's Manual them may lead to damage to the vehicle or per‐ R sonal injury. Maintenance Booklet R Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of Equipment-dependent supplements the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Keep these documents in the vehicle at all Benz Limited Warranty. times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all of The equipment or model designation of your the documents on to the new owner. vehicle may vary according to: Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC R Model Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. R Order A Daimler Company R National version R Availability Mercedes-Benz reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: R Design R Equipment 2135845609 R Technical features 2135845609 2 Contents

QR codes for the rescue card ...... 26 Seats ...... 83 At a glance ...... 6 Vehicle data storage ...... 26 Steering wheel ...... 98 Cockpit ...... 6 Copyright ...... 29 Using the memory function ...... 100 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 8 Stowage areas ...... 101 Overhead control panel ...... 12 Cup holder ...... 115 Door control panel and seat adjustment ...... 14 Occupant safety ...... 31 Ashtray and cigarette lighter ...... 116 Emergencies and breakdowns ...... 16 Restraint system ...... 31 Sockets ...... 117 Seat belts ...... 33 Wireless charging of the mobile phone Airbags ...... 38 and connection with the exterior antenna .. 120 Digital Operator's Manual ...... 18 ® Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 18 PRE-SAFE system ...... 45 Installing/removing the floor mats ...... 122 Children in the vehicle ...... 46 Pets in the vehicle ...... 55 General notes ...... 19 Light and visibility ...... 123 Protecting the environment ...... 19 Exterior lighting ...... 123 Opening and closing ...... 56 Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts ...... 19 Interior lighting ...... 127 Operator's Manual ...... 20 SmartKey ...... 56 Windshield wiper and windshield washer Service and vehicle operation ...... 21 Doors ...... 61 system ...... 129 Operating safety ...... 22 Load compartment ...... 64 Mirrors ...... 132 Declaration of conformity for wireless Roller sun blinds ...... 70 Operating the sun visors ...... 135 vehicle components ...... 23 Side windows ...... 71 Infrared reflective windshield ...... 135 Diagnostics connection ...... 24 Sliding sunroof ...... 75 Anti-theft protection ...... 80 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 Climate control ...... 136 Correct use of the vehicle ...... 25 Overview of climate control systems ...... 136 Problems with your vehicle ...... 25 Seats and stowing ...... 82 Operating the climate control system ...... 137 Reporting safety defects ...... 25 Notes on the correct driver's seat position ... 82 Limited Warranty ...... 26 Contents 3

Driving and parking ...... 143 Multimedia system ...... 239 Wheels and tires ...... 360 Driving ...... 143 Overview and operation ...... 239 Noise or unusual handling characteris‐ DYNAMIC SELECT switch ...... 150 System settings ...... 247 tics ...... 360 Automatic transmission ...... 151 Navigation ...... 258 Checking wheels and tires regularly ...... 360 Refueling ...... 155 Telephone ...... 281 Notes on snow chains ...... 361 Parking ...... 157 Online and Internet functions ...... 297 Tire pressure ...... 361 Driving and driving safety systems ...... 166 Media ...... 304 Loading the vehicle ...... 367 Radio ...... 316 Tire labeling ...... 372 Sound ...... 323 Definition of terms for tires and loading ..... 377 Instrument Display and on-board Changing a wheel ...... 380 computer ...... 215 Instrument display overview ...... 215 Maintenance and care ...... 326 Overview of the buttons on the steering ASSYST PLUS service interval display ...... 326 Technical data ...... 390 wheel ...... 216 Engine compartment ...... 327 Notes on technical data ...... 390 Operating the on-board computer ...... 216 Cleaning and care ...... 333 Vehicle electronics ...... 390 Displays in the multifunction display ...... 218 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and Adjusting the instrument lighting ...... 218 engine number ...... 392 Menus and submenus ...... 219 Breakdown assistance ...... 340 Operating fluids ...... 394 Head-up Display ...... 225 Emergency ...... 340 Vehicle data ...... 400 Flat tire ...... 340 Battery (vehicle) ...... 346 Voice Control System ...... 227 Tow starting or towing away ...... 351 Display messages and warning/indi‐ Operating safety ...... 227 Electrical fuses ...... 356 cator lamps ...... 402 Operation ...... 227 Display messages ...... 402 Using Voice Control System effectively ...... 229 Warning and indicator lamps ...... 449 Essential voice commands ...... 229 4 Contents

Index ...... 468

6 At a glance – Cockpit At a glance – Cockpit 7

1 Steering wheel gearshift paddle → 153 G DYNAMIC SELECT switch → 151 2 Combination switch → 124 H PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp → , 42 3 DIRECT SELECT lever I Control panel for the multimedia system → 216 4 Display (multimedia system) → 239 J Adjusts the steering wheel → 98 5 Start/Stop button → 144 K Control panel for the on-board computer → 216 6 Control panel for the multimedia system → 239 L Cruise control lever → 175 7 Climate control systems → 137 M Unlocks the hood → 327 8 Glove box → 103 N Electric parking brake → 163 9 Hazard warning lamps → 125 O Light switch → 123 A Stowage compartment → 103 P Control panel for: B Control elements for the multimedia system → 239 Active Steering Assist → 184 C Lowers the rear seat head restraints → 89 Active Lane Keeping Assist → 212 D ECO start/stop function → 149 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC → 192 E Active Parking Assist → 201 Head-up Display F Sets the vehicle level → 189 8 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument Display (standard) At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 9

1 Speedometer → 215 D · Distance warning → 460 2 ÷ ESP® → 451 E ? Coolant too hot/cold → 462 3 #! Turn signal light → 124 F Coolant temperature display → 215 4 Ð Steering assistance malfunction → 461 G J Brakes (yellow) → 451 5 Multifunction display → 218 H ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 451 6 ! ABS malfunction → 451 I 6 Restraint system 7 ; Check Engine → 462 J ü Seat belt is not fastened → 459 8 Tachometer → 215 K T Parking lights → 123 9 % This indicator lamp has no function L Fuel level indicator A Electric parking brake applied (red) → 451 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location → 462 indicator F USA only M K High beam → 124 ! Canada only N L Low beam → 123 B Brakes (red) → 451 O R Rear fog light → 124 $ USA only P AIR BODY CONTROL malfunctioning J Canada only Q h Tire pressure monitoring system → 466 C # Electrical malfunction → 462 R å ESP® OFF → 451 10 At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps

Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit At a glance – Warning and indicator lamps 11

1 Speedometer → 215 $ USA only 2 AIR BODY CONTROL malfunctioning J Canada only 3 #! Turn signal light → 124 E ü Seat belt is not fastened → 459 4 Multifunction display → 218 F Fuel level indicator 5 Tachometer → 215 G 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap location → 462 indicator 6 å ESP® OFF → 451 H R Rear fog light → 124 ÷ ESP® → 451 I 6 Restraint system 7 K High beam → 124 J % This indicator lamp has no function L Low beam → 123 K ; Check Engine → 462 T Parking lights → 123 L J Brakes (yellow) → 451 8 ? Coolant too hot/cold → 462 M Electric parking brake applied (red) → 451 9 Coolant temperature display → 215 F USA only A · Distance warning → 460 ! Canada only B Ð Steering assistance malfunction → 461 N h Tire pressure monitoring system → 466 C # Electrical malfunction → 462 O ! ABS malfunction → 451 D Brakes (red) → 451 P ! Electric parking brake (yellow) → 451 12 At a glance – Overhead control panel At a glance – Overhead control panel 13

1 Sun visors → 135 8 p Switches the right-hand reading lamp → 127 on/off 2 Roadside Assistance call button (mbrace®) → 296 9 MB Info call button (mbrace®) → 296 3 p Switches the left-hand reading lamp → 127 on/off A Eyeglasses box → 103 4 | Switches the automatic lighting control → 127 B 3 Opens/closes the panoramic sliding sun‐ → 75 on/off roof 5 SOS button (mbrace®) → 295 Opens/closes the roller sun blinds → 75 6 c Switches the front interior lighting on/off → 127 C Inside mirror 7 u Switches the rear interior lighting on/off → 127 14 At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment At a glance – Door control panel and seat adjustment 15

1 Adjusts the seats electrically → 86 C W Opens/closes the left side window → 71 2 Switches the seat heater on/off → 92 D Opens the door → 61 3 Switches the seat ventilation on/off → 93 E Sets the memory function → 100 4 Adjusts the front passenger seat from the driv‐ → 86 F Sets the seat fore-and-aft adjustment → 85 er's seat G Adjusts the seat cushion length → 85 5 &% Locks/unlocks the vehicle → 61 H Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support → 87 6 Opens/closes the tailgate → 64 I Seat adjustment using the multimedia system → 90 → 7 Adjusts and folds the outside mirrors out/in 132 → electrically J Adjusts the head restraints 87 Adjusts the seat cushion inclination → 85 8 W Opens/closes the right side window → 71 K L Adjusts the seat height → 85 9 W Opens/closes the rear right side window → 71 M Adjusts the seat backrest inclination → 85 A Child safety lock for the rear side windows → 55 B W Opens/closes the rear left side window → 71 16 At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns At a glance – Emergencies and breakdowns 17

What to do in the event of an accident 7 Starting assistance → 348 1 QR code for accessing the rescue card → 26 8 Hazard warning lights → 125 2 Safety vests → 340 9 Fuel filler flap with instruction labels for tire → 155 pressure, fuel type and QR code for accessing Button for the SOS emergency call system and → 294 3 the rescue card Roadside Assistance A Tow-starting and towing away → 352 4 Checking and topping up operating fluids → 394 B Tire-change tool kit → 383 5 Tow-starting and towing away → 352 C TIREFIT kit → 342 6 Flat tire → 340 18 Digital Operator's Manual

Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual For safety reasons, the Digital Operator's Man‐ ual is deactivated while driving. Multimedia system: , . The Digital Operator's Manual contains the fol‐ Õ lowing menu items: R : allows you to search precisely for keywords. R : provides you with important information so that you can start using your vehicle immediately. R : provides tips on how to use your vehicle 1 Picture in certain situations. 2 Menu R : shows you vehicle highlights 3 Navigation window using pictures and animations. # Select a menu item. R : provides you with a list of all the Some sections of the Digital Operator's Manual, bookmarks you have stored yourself. such as warning notes, can be made visible by In addition, you can also call up the Operator's highlighting and pressing them. Manual within a main function (for example, via % The Operator's Manual can also be found in ). the Mercedes-Benz Guides App in all com‐ The Digital Operator's Manual describes the mon App Stores. function and operation of: R the vehicle R the multimedia system General notes 19

Protecting the environment # Always have service work carried out at The relevant environmental regulations and a qualified specialist workshop. guidelines serve to protect the environment and + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental must be strictly observed. damage due to operating conditions and Personal driving style: personal driving style # Do not depress the accelerator pedal Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts The pollutant emission of your vehicle is when starting the engine. directly related to the way you operate your # Do not warm up the engine while the + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental vehicle. vehicle is stationary. damage caused by not using recycled You can help to protect the environment by # Drive carefully and maintain a suitable reconditioned components operating your vehicle in an environmentally distance from the vehicle in front. Daimler AG offers recycled reconditioned responsible manner. Please observe the fol‐ # Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration components and parts with the same quality lowing recommendations on operating condi‐ and braking. as new parts. The same entitlement from the tions and personal driving style. # Change gear in good time and use each Limited Warranty is valid as for new parts. Operating conditions: gear only up to Ô of its maximum # Use recycled reconditioned compo‐ # Make sure that the tire pressure is cor‐ engine speed. nents and parts from Daimler AG. rect. # Switch off the engine in stationary traf‐ # Do not carry any unnecessary weight fic, e.g. by using the ECO start/stop (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no function. longer need them). # Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. # Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contrib‐ Environmental issues and recommendations: ute to environmental protection. It is recommended that you re-use or recycle materials first instead of just disposing of them. 20 General notes

* NOTE Impairment of the operating effi‐ You could jeopardize the operating safety of your Always specify the vehicle identification number ciency of the restraint systems from vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as well (VIN) (→ page 392) when ordering Mercedes- installing accessories or from repairs or as accessories relevant to safety which have not Benz GenuineParts. welding been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-rele‐ vant systems, e.g. the brake system, may mal‐ Airbags, Emergency Tensioning Devices, as function. Only use Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts Operator's Manual well as control units and sensors for the or parts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheels This Operator's Manual describes all models and restraint systems, may be installed in the fol‐ and accessory parts that have been specifically all standard and optional equipment available for lowing areas of your vehicle: approved for your vehicle model. your vehicle at the time of this Operator's Man‐ R Doors Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts are subject to ual going to press. Country-specific differences R Door pillars strict quality control. Each part has been spe‐ are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also R cially developed, manufactured or selected for Door sills Mercedes-Benz vehicles and fine-tuned for them. applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. R Seats Therefore, only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts Therefore, the equipment on your vehicle may R Cockpit should be used. differ from that in the descriptions and illustra‐ tions. R Instrument cluster More than 300,000 different Mercedes-Benz The original purchase contract documentation R Center console GenuineParts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. for your vehicle contains a list of all of the sys‐ # tems in your vehicle. Do not install accessories such as audio All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain systems in these areas. a supply of Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts for Should you have any questions concerning # Do not carry out repairs or welding. necessary service and repair work. In addition, equipment and operation, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # Have accessories retrofitted at a quali‐ strategically located parts-delivery centers pro‐ fied specialist workshop. vide for quick and reliable parts service. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should be kept in the vehicle. General notes 21

Service and vehicle operation In Canada: section in the maintenance and warranty infor‐ Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. mation booklet (Canada). You will find both in Vehicle operation outside the USA or Canada the vehicle document wallet. European Delivery Department When you are abroad with your vehicle, observe 98 Vanderhoof Avenue the following points: Change of address or change of ownership R Service points or replacement parts may not Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 be available immediately. In the event of a change of address, please send us the "Notification of address change" in the R Unleaded fuel may not be available for vehi‐ Maintenance Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the cles with a catalytic converter. Leaded fuel Your customer advisor confirms the service in Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center may cause damage to the catalytic converter. the service report. (USA) on the hotline number R The fuel may have an extremely low octane 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ number. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine tomer Service (Canada) on 1-800-387-0100. We damage. Roadside Assistance can then reach you in a timely fashion, if neces‐ sary. Some Mercedes-Benz models are available in The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro‐ Europe through our European Delivery Program. gram offers technical help in the case of a If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all litera‐ For more information, please consult an author‐ breakdown. Your calls to the toll-free Roadside ture in the vehicle so that it is available to the ized Mercedes‑Benz service center, or write to Assistance Hotline are answered by our agents next owner. If you have purchased a used vehi‐ one of the following address: 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. cle, please send us the "Notice of Purchase of 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) (USA) Used Car" in the Service and Guarantee booklet In the USA: or simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number European Delivery Department You can find further information in the 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or Cus‐ Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program tomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. One Mercedes Drive brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance" Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 22 General notes

Important notice for California retail buyers least four times AND Mercedes‑Benz has # Always have the prescribed service/ and lessees of Mercedes-Benz automobiles been informed in writing of the necessity of maintenance work as well any required a repair. Under California law you may be entitled to a repairs carried out at a qualified spe‐ replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the (3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than cialist workshop. purchase price or lease price, if after a reasona‐ 30 calendar days because of repair work ble number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz resulting from this or other serious defects & WARNING Risk of accident or injury due USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service or damage. to incorrect modifications on electronic facilities fail to fix one or more substantial Please send your written notice to: component parts defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. Mercedes‑Benz USA, LLC Modification to electronic components, their Customer Assista nce Center software or wiring could impair their function During a period of 18 months from original deliv‐ and/or the function of other networked com‐ ery of the vehicle or a kilometer/mileage read‐ 3 Mercedes Drive ponent parts. In particular, systems relevant ing of 18,000 miles (29,000 km), whichever Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 to safety could also be affected. occurs first, vehicle repair is presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more of the fol‐ As a result, these may no longer function lowing occurs: Operating safety properly and/or jeopardize the operating safety of the vehicle. (1) the serious defect or damage can result in & # deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occu‐ WARNING Risk of accident due to mal‐ Never tamper with the wiring and elec‐ pants while driving AND this defect has functions or system failures tronic component parts or their soft‐ ware. already been repaired at least twice AND If you do not have the prescribed service/ Mercedes‑Benz, LLC has been informed in maintenance work or any required repairs # You should have all work on electrical writing of the necessity of a repair. carried out, this could result in malfunctions and electronic components carried out (2) the defect or damage, though less serious or system failures. at a qualified specialist workshop. than (1) above, has already been repaired at General notes 23

& WARNING Risk of fire due to flammable R The vehicle is driven too fast over an # If driving safety is impaired while con‐ materials on hot parts of the exhaust obstacle, e.g. a curb, speed bump or pot‐ tinuing your journey, pull over and stop system hole. the vehicle immediately, paying atten‐ R A heavy object strikes the underbody or tion to road and traffic conditions, and Flammable material such as leaves, grass or contact a qualified specialist workshop. twigs may ignite if they come into contact parts of the chassis. with hot parts of the exhaust system. In situations such as this, the body, the # When driving on unpaved roads or off- underbody, chassis parts, wheels or tires Declaration of conformity for wireless vehi‐ road, regularly check the vehicle under‐ could be damaged without the damage being cle components side. visible. Components damaged in this way USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com‐ # can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an Remove trapped plants or other flam‐ ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is mable material, in particular. accident, no longer withstand the strain they are designed to. subject to the following two conditions: 1) These # If there is damage, consult a qualified devices may not cause harmful interference, and specialist workshop immediately. If the underbody paneling is damaged, flam‐ 2) These devices must accept any interference mable materials such as leaves, grass or received, including interference that may cause twigs can gather between the underbody and * NOTE Damage to the vehicle undesired operation. Changes or modifications the underbody paneling. If these materials not expressly approved by the party responsible Damage to the vehicle may occur in the fol‐ come into contact with hot parts on the for compliance could void the user's authority to lowing cases: exhaust system, they may catch fire. operate the equipment." R The vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a # Have the vehicle checked and repaired Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle high curb or an unpaved road. immediately at a qualified specialist comply with Industry Canada license-exempt workshop. RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol‐ or lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may not cause interference, and (2) These devices 24 General notes must accept any interference, including interfer‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to con‐ # Always install the floor mats securely ence that may cause undesired operation of the necting devices to the diagnostics con‐ and as prescribed in order to ensure device." nection that there is always sufficient room for USA: "Wireless charging system for mobile devi‐ the pedals. If you connect equipment to a diagnostics ces (Model: D-WMI2015A): this device complies # connection in the vehicle, it may affect the Do not use loose floor mats and do not with Part 18 of the FCC Rules." operation of vehicle systems. place floor mats on top of one another. The name and address of the responsible party As a result, the operating safety of the vehi‐ is: cle could be affected. * NOTE Battery discharging from using Continental Automotive Systems US Inc. devices connected to the diagnostics # Only connect equipment to a diagnos‐ connection 2400 Executive Hills Drive tics connection in the vehicle which is Auburn Hills, MI 48326-2980 approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- Using devices at the diagnostics connection United States of America Benz. drains the battery. # Check the charge level of the battery. & WARNING Risk of accident due to # If the charge level is low, charge the Diagnostics connection objects in the driver's footwell battery, e.g. by driving a considerable The diagnostics connection is only intended for Objects in the driver's footwell may impede distance. the connection of diagnostic devices at a quali‐ pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. fied specialist workshop. Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con‐ This jeopardizes the operating and road nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor‐ safety of the vehicle. mation being reset, for example. This may lead # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of so that they cannot get into the driver's the next emissions inspection during the main footwell. inspection. General notes 25

Qualified specialist workshop When using the vehicle, observe the following 3 Mercedes Drive information: An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali‐ Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary R The safety notes in this manual In Canada: specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to R The vehicle technical data Customer Relations Department correctly carry out the work required on your R Traffic rules and regulations Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. vehicle. This particularly applies to work relevant R to safety. Laws and safety standards pertaining to 98 Vanderhoof Avenue motor vehicles Always have the following work carried out on Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 your vehicle at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Problems with your vehicle Reporting safety defects R Work relevant to safety If you should experience a problem with your R Service and maintenance work vehicle, particularly one that you believe may USA only: affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact The following text is published as required of R Repair work an authorized Mercedes-Benz service center manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed‐ R Modifications, installations and conversions immediately to have the problem diagnosed and eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the R Work on electronic component parts rectified. If the problem is not resolved to your "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of satisfaction, please discuss the problem again 1966". Mercedes‑Benz recommends an authorized with the authorized Mercedes-Benz service cen‐ If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Mercedes‑Benz Center. ter or, if necessary, contact us at one of the fol‐ which could cause a crash or could cause injury lowing addresses. or death, you should immediately inform the Correct use of the vehicle In the USA: National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Customer Assistance Center (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz If you remove any warning stickers, you or others USA, LLC. could fail to recognize certain dangers. Leave Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC warning stickers in position. 26 General notes

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may This damage is not covered either by the Vehicle data storage open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the Information from electronic control units defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order New Vehicle or Used Vehicle Warranty. a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control # Follow the instructions in this manual cannot become involved in individual problems units. Some of these are necessary for the safe between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage. operation of your vehicle, while some assist you USA, LLC. when driving (driver assistance systems). In To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle addition, your vehicle provides convenience and entertainment functions, which are also made Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 QR codes for the rescue card (TTY: 1-800-424-9153) (inside the USA); go to possible by electronic control units. http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis‐ The QR code is secured in the fuel filler flap and Electronic control units contain data memories trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Wash‐ on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event which can temporarily or permanently store ington, DC 20590, USA. of an accident, rescue services can use the QR technical information about the vehicle's operat‐ code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card ing status, component loads, maintenance Further information on vehicle safety can be for your vehicle. The current rescue card con‐ found at: http://www.safercar.gov requirements and technical events or malfunc‐ tains the most important information about your tions. vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the routing of the electric lines. In general, this information documents the state Limited Warranty of a component part, a module, a system or the Further information can be obtained at http:// surroundings, for example: * NOTE Damage to the vehicle arising www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code. R from culpable violation of these operat‐ operating statuses of system components ing instructions. (e.g. fluid levels, battery status, tire pressure) R status messages concerning the vehicle and Damage to the vehicle can arise from culpa‐ its individual components (e.g. number of ble violation of these operating instructions. wheel revolutions/speed, deceleration, lat‐ General notes 27

eral acceleration, display of the fastened seat diagnostics") in the vehicle. The respective This data can be stored locally in the vehicle or belts) service network locations or third parties col‐ is located on a device which you have connected R malfunctions or defects in important system lect, process and use the data. They document to the vehicle. If this data is stored in the vehi‐ components (e.g. lights, brakes) technical statuses of the vehicle, assist in find‐ cle, you can delete it at any time. This data can R ing malfunctions and improving quality and are only be transmitted to third parties upon your information on vehicle damage events transmitted to the manufacturer, if necessary. request with particular regard to the scope of R system reactions in special driving situations Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to use of online services according to your selected (e.g. air bag deployment, intervention of sta‐ product liability. For this, the manufacturer settings. bility control systems) requires technical data from vehicles. You can store or change convenience settings/ R ambient conditions (e.g. temperature, rain Malfunction memories in the vehicle can be individualization in the vehicle at any time. sensor) reset by a service outlet as part of repair or Depending on the equipment, this includes, for maintenance work. In addition to providing the actual control unit example: function, this data assists the manufacturer in They can enter data into the vehicle's conveni‐ R seat and steering wheel position settings ence and infotainment functions themselves as detecting and rectifying malfunctions and opti‐ R suspension and climate control settings mizing vehicle functions. The majority of this part of the selected equipment. R data is temporary and is only processed in the This includes, for example: individualization such as interior lighting vehicle itself. Only a small portion of the data is R multimedia data such as music, films or pho‐ If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can stored in the event or malfunction memory. tos for playback in an integrated multimedia connect your smartphone or another mobile end When your vehicle is serviced, technical data system device to the vehicle. You can control them via from the vehicle can be read out by service net‐ R address book data for use in connection with the control elements integrated in your vehicle. work employees or third parties. Services an integrated hands-free system or an inte‐ Images and audio from the smartphone can be include repair services, maintenance processes, grated navigation system output via the multimedia system. Certain infor‐ warranty events and quality assurance meas‐ mation is simultaneously transmitted to your ures, for example. The read out is performed via R entered navigation destinations smartphone. the legally prescribed port for OBD ("on-board R data about the use of Internet services 28 General notes

Depending on the respective integration type, Online functions can be used via the wireless provider. The manufacturer has no influence on this includes, for example: network connection. This includes online serv‐ the content exchanged. R general vehicle information ices and applications/Apps provided by the Please inquire, therefore, about the type, scope manufacturer or other providers. R position data and purpose of the collection and use of per‐ Manufacturer's services sonal data as part of third party services from This enables the use of selected smartphone The manufacturer describes the respective func‐ their respective provider. Apps, e.g. navigation or music playback. There is tions and corresponding legal data protection no further interaction between the smartphone information when suitable for the manufacturer's COMAND/mbrace and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not online services. Personal data may be used for directly accessible. The type of further data pro‐ the provision of online services. Data is If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or cessing is determined by the provider of the App exchanged via a secure connection, e.g. to the mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's oper‐ used. The respective App and your smartphone's manufacturer's designated IT systems. Personal ation, the use of the vehicle in certain situations, operating system determine whether changes data is collected, processed and used via the and the location of the vehicle may be compiled can be made to the settings and which settings provision of services exclusively on the basis of through COMAND or the mbrace system. can be changed. legal permissions or with prior consent. Additional information can be found in the multi‐ The services and functions (sometimes subject media system section and/or the mbrace Terms Service providers to a fee) can usually be activated or deactivated. and Conditions. Wireless network connection In some cases, this also applies to the entire If your vehicle has a wireless network connec‐ vehicle's data connection. This excludes, in par‐ Event Data Recorders ticular, legally prescribed functions and services. tion, it enables data to be exchanged between This vehicle is equipped with an event data your vehicle and additional systems. The wire‐ Third party services recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is less network connection is enabled via the vehi‐ If it is possible to use online services from other to record, in certain crash or near crash-like sit‐ cle's transmission and reception unit or via con‐ providers, these services are subject to the data uations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting nected mobile end devices (e.g. smartphones). protection and terms of use of the responsible a road obstacle, data that will assist in under‐ General notes 29 standing how a vehicle's systems performed. Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed Warning: the EDR is a component of the The EDR is designed to record data related to to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter‐ vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short special equipment is required. In addition to the ing, modifying or removing the EDR component period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have the may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys‐ The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record special equipment can also read the information. tem Module and other systems. such data as: such as law enforcement, can read the informa‐ State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that tion by accessing the vehicle or the EDR. R How various systems in your vehicle were conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted. operating EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat‐ This means that in the event of such conflict, the R ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci‐ federal regulation governs. As of February 2013, Whether or not the driver and front dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash 13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs. passenger seat belts were buckled/fastened Data Retrieval (CDR) tool that is used to extract R How far (if at all) the driver was depressing data from the EDR is commercially available, the accelerator and/or brake pedal and, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly Copyright R How fast the vehicle was traveling disclaims any and all liability arising from the Free and open source software extraction of this information by unauthorized This data can help provide a better understand‐ Mercedes-Benz personnel. Information on free and open source software ing of the circumstances in which accidents and licenses for your vehicle's software can be found MBUSA will not share EDR data with others with‐ injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded by on the data storage medium in your vehicle out the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation document wallet and on the Internet together vehicle is leased, without the consent of the les‐ occurs; no data is recorded by the EDR under with updates: see. Exceptions to this representation include normal driving conditions and no personal data responses to subpoenas by law enforcement; by http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource (e.g. name, gender, age and accident location) is federal, state or local government; in connection recorded. However, other parties, such as law with or arising out of litigation involving MBUSA enforcement, could combine EDR data with the or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or, as required type of personally identifying data routinely by law. acquired during a crash investigation. 30 General notes

Registered trademarks R Gracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. R Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue‐ tooth SIG Inc. R ZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis‐ R DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. R Dolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarks of DOLBY Laboratories. R BabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg‐ istered trademarks of Daimler AG. R HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls. R iPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. R Burmester® is a registered trademark of Burmester Audiosysteme GmbH. R Microsoft® and Windows Media® are regis‐ tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. R SIRIUS® is a registered trademark of Sirius XM Radio Inc. R HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq‐ uity Digital Corporation. Occupant safety 31

Restraint system So that the restraint system can provide protec‐ Reduced restraint system protection tion, each vehicle occupant must: Protection by the restraint system & R Fasten their seat belt correctly. WARNING Risk of injury or death from modifications to the restraint system The restraint system includes the following: R Sit in an almost upright position with their R Seat belt system back against the seat backrest. The restraint system can no longer function R Air bags R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ correctly after alterations have been made. R Child restraint system sible. The restraint system may then not protect the vehicle occupants as intended by failing R Child seat securing system R Always be secured in an additional restraint system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles in an accident or triggering unexpectedly, for In the event of an accident, the restraint system if they are under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall. example can: # Never alter the parts of the restraint R Reduce the risk of vehicle occupants coming However, no system available today can com‐ system. pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. # accident situation. In particular, the seat belt Never tamper with the wiring or any R Reduce the forces to which the vehicle occu‐ and air bag generally do nort p otect against electronic component parts or their pants are subjected. objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. software. A seat belt can only provide the best level of pro‐ It is also not possible to completely rule out the R risk of injury caused by the air bag deploying. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to tection if it is worn correctly. Depending on the accommodate a person with disabilities, con‐ detected accident situation, Emergency Tension‐ tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for ing Devices and/or air bags supplement the pro‐ details. tection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. R Emergency Tensioning Devices and/or air bags USA only: for details, contact our Customer are not deployed in every accident. Assistance Center on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372). 32 Occupant safety

Restraint system functionality may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device take place in good time at the start of the colli‐ sion. When the ignition is switched on, a system self- or airbag, for example. test is performed, during which the 6 # Have the restraint system checked and Factors which can only be seen and measured restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes repaired immediately at a qualified spe‐ after a collision has occurred cannot play a deci‐ out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle cialist workshop. sive role in air bag deployment, nor do they pro‐ is started. The components of the restraint sys‐ vide an indication of air bag deployment. tem are then functional. The vehicle may be deformed significantly with‐ Function of the restraint system in an acci‐ out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if dent Restraint system malfunction only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration R How the restraint system works is determined by The 6 restraint system warning lamp the severity of the impact detected and the type is not high. Conversely, an air bag may be does not light up when the ignition is of accident anticipated: deployed even though the vehicle suffers only switched on. minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts R Frontal impact R The 6 restraint system warning lamp such as longitudinal members are hit, for exam‐ lights up continuously or repeatedly during a R Rear impact ple, the vehicle deceleration may be high enough journey. R Side impact for this to happen. R Rollover & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint sys‐ The activation thresholds for the components of tem the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at If the restraint system is malfunctioning, various points in the vehicle. This process is pre- restraint system components may be trig‐ emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of gered unintentionally or might not be trig‐ the components of the restraint system should gered at all in the event of an accident. This Occupant safety 33

The components of the restraint system can before and during the journey, that the status of R In general, the powder released is not haz‐ be activated or deployed independently of the front passenger air bag is correct ardous to health but may cause short-term each other: (→ page 42). breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Component Detected deploy‐ & ment situation WARNING Risk of burns from hot air bag Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle components immediately or open the window in order to Emergency Tension‐ Frontal impact, rear The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has prevent breathing difficulties. ing Devices impact, side impact, been deployed. rollover Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning # Do not touch the air bag parts. Devices contain perchlorate material, which may Driver's air bag, front Frontal impact # Have a deployed air bag replaced at a require special handling or environmental pro‐ passenger air bag qualified specialist workshop as soon tection measures. National guidelines regarding as possible. waste disposal must be observed. In California, Knee air bag Frontal impact see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ Side air bag Side impact Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the Perchlorate/index.cfm. vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop Window air bagSide impact, rollover, after an accident. Take this into account, partic‐ frontal impact ularly if an Emergency Tensioning Device is trig‐ Seat belts gered or an air bag deployed. Protection provided by the seat belt PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side impact Side If the Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig‐ Always fasten your seat belt correctly before gered or an air bag is deployed, you will hear a starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide The front passenger air bag can only be bang, and a small amount of powder may also be the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. deployed in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR released: BAG OFF indicator lamp is off. If the front R The bang will not generally affect your hear‐ passenger seat is occupied, make sure, both ing. 34 Occupant safety

R & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to Push the lap belt down as far as possible Activate or deactivate the child seat safety fea‐ incorrectly fastened seat belt across your hips and pull tight with the shoul‐ ture of the seat belt (→ page 48). der section of the belt. Never route the lap If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ belt across your abdomen. observe the instructions and safety notes on not perform its intended protective function. R Never route the seat belt across sharp, poin‐ "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 46). In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt ted, abrasive or fragile objects. can also cause injuries, for example, in the R Only one person should use each seat belt at Reduced protection event of an accident or when braking or any one time. Never allow babies and chil‐ changing direction suddenly. dren to travel sitting on the lap of another & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # Always ensure that all vehicle occu‐ vehicle occupant. incorrect seat position pants have their seat belts fastened R Never secure objects with a seat belt if the correctly and are sitting properly. The seat belt does not offer the intended seat belt is also being used by one of the level of protection if you have not moved the R vehicle's occupants. Always observe the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. The seat belt must: instructions for loading the vehicle when - Not be twisted and must fit tightly and securing objects, luggage or loads When braking or in the event of an accident, snugly across your body. (→ page 101). you could slide underneath the seat belt and - Be routed across the center of the sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ The seat belts on the following seats are equip‐ ple. shoulders and as low down towards the ped with a child seat safety feature: hips as possible. # Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ R Front passenger seat R The shoulder section of the seat belt should ning your journey. not touch your neck nor be routed under R Rear seats # Always ensure that the seat backrest is your arm or behind your back. The seat belts for the folding bench seat in the in an almost vertical position and that R Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter cargo compartment are not equipped with a the shoulder section of your seat belt is coat. child seat safety feature. Occupant safety 35

routed across the center of your shoul‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to R If the seat belt buckle is damaged or der. blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt extremely dirty anchorage R If the Emergency Tensioning Devices, & WARNING Risk of injury or death when Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt anchorages or seat belt retrac‐ additional restraint systems are not used seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt tors have been modified for persons with a smaller build anchorage on the front seat impair the func‐ Seat belts may be damaged in an accident, Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannot wear tion of the Emergency Tensioning Devices. although the damage may not be visible, e.g. the seat belt correctly without a suitable The Emergency Tensioning Devices can, due to splinters of glass. additional restraint system. then, not function as intended and the seat Modified or damaged seat belts may tear or If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it can‐ belt can no longer provide the intended pro‐ fail, e.g. in an accident. tection. not perform its intended protective function. Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices can # In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt Before starting the journey, make sure accidentally trigger or fail to function as can also cause injuries, for example, in the that there are no objects around the intended. event of an accident or when braking or seat belt buckle or between the front # changing direction suddenly. seat and door. Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat belt ancho‐ # Always secure persons under 5 ft rages or seat belt retractors. (1.50 m) tall in a suitable restraint sys‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # tem. damaged or modified seat belts Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. Seat belts cannot provide protection in the # Always have the seat belts checked following situations: immediately after an accident at a R If the seat belts are damaged, modified, qualified specialist workshop. extremely dirty, bleached or dyed 36 Occupant safety

Only use seat belts that have been approved for # Always ensure that an unused seat belt # Always engage seat belt tongue 2 of the your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. is fully retracted. seat belt into seat belt buckle 1 of the cor‐ responding seat. & WARNING Risk of injury or death from # Press and hold the seat belt outlet release deployed pyrotechnic Emergency Ten‐ Fastening and adjusting seat belts and slide the seat belt outlet into the desired sioning Devices If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the position. Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap can‐ # Let go of the belt outlet release and ensure that have been deployed are no longer opera‐ not be pulled out any further. that the seat belt outlet locks in position. tional and are unable to perform their inten‐ ded protective function. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: If the front seat belt # Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic is not pulled tight across your body, the seat belt Emergency Tensioning Devices immedi‐ adjustment may automatically apply a certain ately replaced at a qualified specialist tightening force. Do not hold the seat belt tightly workshop. while it is adjusting. You can activate and deacti‐ vate the seat belt adjustment function using the Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the multimedia system. vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop Vehicles with automatic front passenger after an accident. front air bag shutoff:

* NOTE Damage caused by trapping the * NOTE Deployment of the Emergency seat belt Tensioning Device and side air bag when the front passenger seat is unoccupied If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat seat mechanism. belt buckle of the front passenger seat and Occupant safety 37

the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the Releasing seat belts When the driver's and front passenger's doors are closed and the driver and front passenger Emergency Tensioning Device and the side # Press the release button in the seat belt have fastened their seat belts, the seat belt air bag may deploy in the event of an acci‐ buckle and guide the seat belt back with the warning goes out. dent. seat belt tongue. # Only one person should use each seat During a journey, the seat belt warning lights up belt at any one time. if: Activating or deactivating seat belt adjust‐ R ment via the multimedia system The vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph Vehicles without automatic front passenger (25 km/h) and the driver's or front front air bag shutoff: Multimedia system: passenger seat belt is not fastened. , . î . R * The driver or front passenger unfastens their NOTE Deployment of the Emergency seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Tensioning Device when the front passenger seat is unoccupied # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. If the seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and Seat belt warning for the driver and front the front passenger seat is unoccupied, the passenger Emergency Tensioning Device may deploy in The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Instru‐ the event of an accident. ment Display is a reminder that all vehicle occu‐ # Only one person should use each seat pants must wear their seat belts correctly. belt at any one time. The ü seat belt warning lamp lights up for six seconds after every engine start. In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. 38 Occupant safety

Airbags When activated, an airbag can provide addi‐ * NOTE Important points to remember if tional protection for the respective vehicle the front passenger seat is unoccupied Overview of airbags occupant. In an accident, the components of the Airbag Potential protection for restraint system may deploy unnecessarily … on the front passenger side if: Knee airbag Thigh, knee and lower leg R There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. Driver's airbag, Head and ribcage front passenger R The seat belt tongue is engaged in the airbag seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is Window airbagHead unoccupied. Side airbag Ribcage, also pelvis for # Stow objects in a suitable place. 1 Knee airbag front seat occupants # Only one person should use each seat 2 Driver's airbag belt at any one time. 3 Front-passenger airbag The front passenger airbag can only be deployed 4 Window airbag in an accident if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 5 Side airbag indicator lamp is off. If the front passenger seat Protection potential of air bags is occupied, make sure, both before and during The installation location of an airbag is identified the journey, that the status of the front Depending on the accident situation, an air bag by the AIRBAG symbol. passenger airbag is correct (→ page 42). may supplement the protection offered by a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. Occupant safety 39

& WARNING Risk of injury or death due to When doing so, always observe the informa‐ Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent an air incorrect seat position tion on the correct driver's seat position bag from functioning correctly. Therefore always (→ page 82). ensure that: If you deviate from the correct seat position, R Only hold the steering wheel by the steering R There are no people, animals or objects the air bag cannot perform its intended pro‐ wheel rim. This allows the air bag to be fully between the vehicle occupants and an air tective function and deployment may even deployed. bag. cause further injuries. R Always lean against the seat backrest when R There are no objects between the seat, door To avoid hazardous situations, always make the vehicle is in motion. Do not lean forwards and door pillar (B-pillar). sure that all vehicle occupants: or against the door or side window. You may R R There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, Have their seat belt fastened correctly, otherwise be in the deployment area of the hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. including pregnant women. air bags. R R There are no accessory parts, such as cup Are seated properly and that distance to R Always keep your feet on the floor. Do not holders, attached to the vehicle within the the air bags is as large as possible. put your feet on the dashboard, for example. deployment area of an air bag, e.g. on doors, R Observe the following information. Your feet may otherwise be in the deploy‐ side windows or side paneling. ment area of the air bag. # R There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile Always make sure that there are no R objects between the air bag and the If children are traveling in the vehicle, objects in the pockets of your clothing. Store vehicle occupant. observe the additional notes (→ page 46). such objects in a suitable place. R Always stow and secure objects correctly. To avoid risks resulting from the deployment of the air bag: R Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly; the driver's seat and front passenger seat should be moved as far back as possible. 40 Occupant safety

Reduced air bag protection # You should only use seat covers that & WARNING Risk of injury due to deployed have been approved for the correspond‐ & airbag WARNING Risk of injury from modifica‐ ing seats by Mercedes-Benz. tions to the airbag cover A deployed airbag no longer has a protective function and cannot protect as intended in If you modify an airbag cover or affix objects & WARNING Risk of injury due to malfunc‐ the event of an accident. such as stickers to it, the airbag can no lon‐ tions of the sensors in the door paneling # ger function correctly. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified Sensors to control the airbags are located in specialist workshop in order to have the # Never modify an airbag cover and do the doors. Modifications or work not per‐ deployed airbag replaced. not affix objects to it. formed correctly to the doors or door panel‐ ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to Have deployed air bags replaced immediately. The installation location of an air bag is identi‐ the function of the sensors being impaired. fied by the AIRBAG symbol . The airbags might therefore not function Status of the front passenger airbag & properly any more. WARNING Risk of injury or death due to Points to remember when the front the use of unsuitable seat covers Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to passenger seat is occupied Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre‐ do. The automatic front passenger air bag shutoff is vent the deployment of air bags integrated # able to detect whether the front passenger seat Never modify the doors or parts of the is occupied by a person or a child restraint sys‐ into the seats. doors. Consequently, the air bags cannot protect tem. The front passenger air bag is enabled or # Always have work on the doors or door vehicle occupants as they are designed to disabled accordingly. paneling carried out at a qualified spe‐ When installing a child restraint system on the do. In addition, operation of the automatic cialist workshop. front passenger air bag shutoff may be front passenger seat: restricted. R Ensure that the child restraint system is posi‐ tioned correctly (→ page 46). Occupant safety 41

R Always observe the child restraint system & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to A person in the front passenger seat must: manufacturer's installation instructions. objects between the sitting surface and R Fasten their seat belt correctly. R Never place objects under or behind the the child restraint system R Sit in an almost upright position with their child restraint system, e.g. cushions. Objects between the sitting surface and the back against the seat backrest. R Fully retract the seat cushion length adjust‐ child restraint system could affect the func‐ R Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if pos‐ ment. tion of the automatic front passenger airbag sible. R The entire base of the child restraint system shutoff. Otherwise, the front passenger air bag may be must always rest on the seat cushion of the This could result in the front passenger air‐ front-passenger seat. deactivated by mistake, for example because the bag not functioning as intended during an front passenger: R The backrest of the forward-facing child accident. R Transfers their weight by supporting them‐ restraint system must, as far as possible, be # Do not place any objects between the selves on a vehicle armrest. resting on the seat backrest of the front sitting surface and the child restraint R passenger seat. system. Sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the sitting surface. R The child restraint system must not touch the # The entire base of the child restraint roof or be put under strain by the head system must always rest on the sitting & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to restraints. Adjust the seat backrest inclina‐ surface of the front passenger seat. tion and the head restraint setting accord‐ deactivated front passenger airbag # The backrest of the forward-facing child ingly. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator restraint system must lie as flat as pos‐ lamp is lit, the front passenger airbag is disa‐ sible against the backrest of the front bled. It will not be deployed in the event of passenger seat. an accident and cannot perform its intended # Always comply with the child restraint protective function. system manufacturer's installation instructions. 42 Occupant safety

A person in the front passenger seat could PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp The status of the front passenger airbag is then displayed: then, for example, come into contact with System self-test the vehicle interior, especially if the person is R PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for sitting too close to the cockpit. 60 seconds, subsequently both indicator If the front passenger seat is occupied, lamps are off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and always ensure that: OFF): the front passenger airbag is able to deploy in the event of an accident. R The classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the R PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continu‐ front passenger airbag is enabled or disa‐ ously: the front passenger airbag is disabled. bled in accordance with the person in the It will then not be deployed in the event of an front passenger seat. accident. R The front passenger seat has been moved If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is as far back as possible. off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator R The person is seated correctly. lamp shows the status of the front passenger airbag. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator # Ensure, both before and during the jour‐ lamp may be lit continuously or be off. ney, that the status of the front If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp passenger airbag is correct. and the 6 restraint system warning lamp When the ignition is switched on, a system self- light up simultaneously, the front passenger seat test is performed during which the two may not be used. Also in this case, do not install PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator a child restraint system on the front passenger lamps light up simultaneously. seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Occupant safety 43

Status display NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, on a seat protected by an ACTIVE FRONT AIR incorrect positioning of the forward- both before and during the journey, that the sta‐ BAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY facing child restraint system tus of the front passenger air bag is correct for to the child can occur. the prevailing situation. If you secure a child in a forward-facing child After installing a rearward-facing child When installing a child restraint system on the restraint system on the front passenger seat restraint system on the front passenger front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ and you position the front passenger seat too seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit con‐ cific information . close to the cockpit, in the event of an acci‐ tinuously. dent, the child could: Depending on the child restraint system and the R stature of the child, the PASSENGER AIR BAG Come into contact with the vehicle inte‐ & WARNING Risk of injury or death from OFF indicator lamp may be off. In this case, do rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ using a rearward-facing child restraint not install the rearward-facing child restraint cator lamp is lit, for example. system when the front passenger air bag system on the front passenger seat. R Be struck by the air bag if the is enabled Instead, install the rearward-facing child PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp If you secure a child in a rearward-facing restraint system on a suitable rear seat. is off. child restraint system on the front passenger After installing a forward-facing child # Always move the front passenger seat seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi‐ restraint system on the front passenger as far back as possible and fully retract cator lamp is off, the front passenger air bag seat: depending on the child restraint system the seat cushion length adjustment. can deploy in the event of an accident. and the stature of the child, PASSENGER AIR Always make sure that the shoulder belt The child could be struck by the air bag. BAG OFF may be lit continuously or be off. strap is correctly routed from the seat Always ensure that the front passenger air Always observe the following information. belt outlet on the vehicle to the shoul‐ bag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG der belt guide on the child restraint sys‐ OFF indicator lamp must be lit. tem. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from 44 Occupant safety

the vehicle belt outlet. If necessary, should not use the front passenger seat. cannot perform its intended protective func‐ adjust the seat belt outlet and the front Instead, they should use a rear seat. tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front passenger seat accordingly. R A person with a smaller build (e.g. a teenager passenger seat. # Always observe the child restraint sys‐ or small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF That person could, for example, come into tem manufacturer's installation instruc‐ indicator lamp either lights up continuously contact with the vehicle interior, especially if tions. depending on the result of the classification the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. or, alternatively, goes out. If the front passenger seat is occupied, When installing a child restraint system on the - PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF is off: move the always ensure that: front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-spe‐ front passenger seat as far back as possi‐ R cific information . ble or a person with a smaller build The classification of the person in the should use a rear seat. front passenger seat is correct and the If a person is sitting in the front passenger front passenger air bag is enabled or seat: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF may be lit con‐ - If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator deactivated in accordance with the per‐ tinuously or be off, depending on the person's lamp is lit continuously: a person with a son in the front passenger seat. stature. Always observe the following informa‐ smaller build should not use the front R tion. passenger seat. The person is seated properly with a cor‐ rectly fastened seat belt. If the front passenger seat is occupied by: & WARNING Risk of injury or death when R The front passenger seat has been moved R An adult or a person with a build correspond‐ the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator as far back as possible. ing to that of an adult, the PASSENGER AIR lamp is lit BAG OFF indicator lamp must be off. This If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator Further related subjects: indicates that the front passenger air bag is R enabled. lamp remains lit after the system self-test, Child restraint system on the front passenger seat (→ page 52). If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator the front passenger air bag is deactivated. It lamp is lit continuously, an adult or person will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ with a build corresponding to that of an adult dent. In this case, the front passenger air bag Occupant safety 45

® PRE-SAFE® system brief noise signal to stimulate the innate pro‐ Information on PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipa‐ tective mechanism of a person's hearing. tory occupant protection plus) Information on PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant protection) * NOTE Damage caused by objects in the PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, ® footwell or behind the seat particularly an imminent rear impact, and take PRE-SAFE is able to detect certain critical driv‐ pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle ing situations and implement pre-emptive meas‐ The automatic adjustment of the seat posi‐ occupants. These measures cannot necessarily ures to protect the vehicle occupants. tion may result in damage to the seat and/or prevent an imminent impact. ® the object. PRE-SAFE can implement the following meas‐ PRE-SAFE® PLUS can implement the following ures independently of each other: # Stow objects in a suitable place. measures independently of each other: R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat R Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. Reversing the PRE-SAFE® system measures and front passenger seat. R Closing the side windows. R Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle R Vehicles with sliding sunroof: Closing the If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive is stationary. This brake application is can‐ sliding sunroof. measures that were taken are reversed. You celed automatically when the vehicle pulls will need to perform certain settings your‐ R away. Vehicles with memory function: Moving self. the front passenger seat to a more favorable If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive seat position. # If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. measures that were taken are reversed. R Vehicles with multicontour seat: Increas‐ The locking mechanism releases. System limitations ing the air pressure in the seat side bolsters R No measures are implemented: of the seat backrest. - when backing up R PRE-SAFE® Sound: Provided that the multi‐ media system is switched on, generates a R The brakes are not applied: - whilst driving 46 Occupant safety

or Children in the vehicle & WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to - when entering or exiting a parking space Notes on the safe transportation of children exposure to extreme heat or cold in the while using Active Parking Assist. vehicle & WARNING Risk of accident and injury If people – particularly children – are Information on PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side due to children left unattended in the exposed to extreme heat or cold over an vehicle extended period of time, there is a risk of If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE- injury or even fatal injury. SAFE® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the If you leave children unaccompanied in the # front-seat vehicle occupant's upper body vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ towards the center of the vehicle. It does this by motion, for example by: dren – unattended in the vehicle. rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat R Releasing the parking brake. side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on R Shifting the transmission out of park & WARNING Risk of burns when the child which the impact is anticipated. This increases position j. seat is exposed to direct sunlight the distance between the door and the vehicle R Starting the engine. If the child restraint system is exposed to occupant. direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. If PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side has been deployed or In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ ment. Children could suffer burns from these parts, is defective, the display message particularly on metallic parts of the child # Never leave children and animals unat‐ restraint system. is displayed (→ page 403). tended in the vehicle. # Always make sure that the child # When leaving the vehicle, always take restraint system is not exposed to the SmartKey with you and lock the direct sunlight. vehicle. # Protect it with a blanket, for example. Occupant safety 47

# If the child restraint system has been To improve protection for children younger than & WARNING Risk of injury or death caused exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to 12 years old and under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height, by incorrect installation of the child cool before securing a child into it. Mercedes-Benz recommends you observe the restraint system following notes: # Never leave children unattended in the If the child restraint system is incorrectly vehicle. R Only secure children using a child restraint system which is suitable and recommended installed on a suitable seating position, it for Mercedes-Benz vehicles, as well as appro‐ cannot perform its intended protective func‐ The use of seat belts and child restraint systems tion. is required by law in: priate to the height, age and weight of the The child cannot be restrained in the event of R child. Be sure to observe the instructions for All 50 states correct use of the child restraint system. an accident, heavy braking or a sudden R The U.S. territories R Always install a child restraint system on a change of direction. R The District of Columbia rear seat if possible. # Always comply with the manufacturer's R All Canadian provinces R Only use the following securing systems for installation instructions for the child child restraint systems: restraint system and its correct use. All child restraint systems must meet the follow‐ # Make sure that the entire base of the - the seat belt system ing standards: child restraint system always rests on R U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards - the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting the sitting surface of the seat. bracket 213 and 225 # Never place objects under or behind R Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards - the Top Tether anchorages the child restraint system, e.g. cush‐ 213 and 210.2 R The manufacturer's installation instructions ions. You can obtain further information about the for the child re straint system. # Always use child restraint systems with correct child restraint system from any author‐ R The warning labels in the vehicle interior and the original cover designed for them. ized Mercedes-Benz Center. on the child restraint system. # Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. 48 Occupant safety

R & WARNING Risk of accident caused by an accident may then not be able to perform Instructions and safety notes on the auto‐ incorrectly installed child restraint sys‐ their intended protective function. matic front passenger airbag shutoff . tems The child cannot be restrained in the event of R Safety notes on the seat belt (→ page 33). If the child restraint system is not correctly an accident, heavy braking or a sudden R Information on the correct use of the seat installed or secured, it could release in the change of direction. belt (→ page 37). event of an accident, sudden braking or a # Always replace child restraint systems sudden change in direction. immediately that have been damaged or Activating/deactivating the child seat safety The child restraint system could be flung involved in an accident. feature of the seat belt around and hit vehicle occupants. This poses # Have the securing systems for the child an increased risk of injury or even fatal restraint systems checked at a qualified & WARNING Risk of injury or death if a injury. specialist workshop before installing a seat belt is unfastened while the vehicle # Always install child restraint systems child restraint system again. is in motion correctly, even when not in use. If the seat belt is released while the vehicle is A booster seat may be necessary to achieve # Always comply with the child restraint in motion, the child restraint system is no proper seat belt positioning for children over longer correctly secured. The child seat system manufacturer's installation 40 lbs (18 kg) in weight until they reach a height instructions. safety feature is deactivated and the seat where a three-point seat belt can be fitted prop‐ belt is drawn in a bit by the inertia reel. erly without a booster seat. & It is therefore not possible to engage the seat WARNING Risk of injury or death caused The following notes must be observed: by the use of damaged child restraint belt again. R systems When installing a child restraint system on # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as the front passenger seat, the information on Child restraint systems or their retaining sys‐ soon as possible, paying attention to installing a child restraint system on the front road and traffic conditions. tems that have been subjected to a load in passenger seat (→ page 52). Occupant safety 49

# Activate the child seat safety feature Deactivating the child seat safety feature: # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ again and correctly secure the child # Press the release button of the seat belt tem together weigh more than 65 lbs restraint system. buckle. (29 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) # Hold the seat belt tongue and guide it back child restraint systems with which the When enabled, the child seat safety feature to the seat belt outlet. child is secured with the vehicle seat ensures that the seat belts of the front belt. passenger seat and rear seats do not slacken # LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat attachment Also secure the child restraint system once the child restraint system is secured. with the Top Tether belt, if available. Installing a child restraint system: Notes on LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat # securing systems When installing a child restraint system, be sure Always comply with the manufacturer's to observe the manufacturer's installation installation instructions when installing and & WARNING Risk of injury or death when instructions and the instructions for correct use removing the child restraint system. using the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child of the child restraint system. # Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat belt restraint systems and exceeding the per‐ LATCH-type (ISOFIX) is a standardized securing outlet. missible weight limit system for specially designed restraint systems. # Engage the seat belt tongue in the seat belt LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems are buckle. do not offer sufficient protection for children approved in accordance with ECE R44. Activating the child seat safety feature: weighing more than 65 lbs (29 kg) together Only child restraint systems that have been with the child restraint system, who are approved in accordance with ECE R44 may be # Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia secured using the seat belt integrated in the attached to LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting reel retract it again. child restraint system. For example, the child brackets. When the child seat safety feature is activa‐ may not be restrained correctly in the event ted,you should hear a ratcheting sound. of an accident. # Push the child restraint system down until the seat belt sits tightly. 50 Occupant safety

Installing LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat When installing a child restraint system, be sure securing systems to observe the manufacturer's installation instructions and the instructions for correct use & WARNING Risk of injury or death when of the child restraint system. using the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type restraint systems and exceeding the per‐ (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged cor‐ missible weight limit rectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems brackets. do not offer sufficient protection for children weighing more than 65 lbs (29 kg) together with the child restraint system, who are secured using the seat belt integrated in the child restraint system. For example, the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident. # If the child and the child restraint sys‐ Symbol for installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) tem together weigh more than 65 lbs child restraint system (29 kg), only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems with which the child is secured with the vehicle seat belt. # Also secure the child restraint system with the Top Tether belt, if available. Occupant safety 51

# Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ Rear seat backrests that are not locked can ped. also cause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of an accident. # Remove each cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) # Always lock rear seat backrests after mounting brackets 1. installing Top Tether belts. # Attach the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child # Observe the lock verification indicator. restraint system to both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets 1. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, # After removing the child seat, replace each this will be shown in the multifunction display in cover for LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting the instrument cluster. brackets 1. The risk of injury can be reduced by Top Tether as Top Tether provides an additional connection Securing Top Tether between the child restraint system secured with LATCH-type (ISOFIX) and the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of injury or death if the The child restraint system must be equipped 1 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) mounting brackets rear seat backrests are not locked after with a Top Tether belt. installing Top Tether belts * NOTE Damage to the seat belt for the center seat If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they could fold forwards in the event of an acci‐ When installing a child restraint system, the dent or during braking or sudden changes of seat belt for the center seat could be dam‐ direction. aged. As a result, child restraint systems cannot perform their intended protective function. 52 Occupant safety

# If necessary, move head restraint 1 Child restraint systems on the front upwards Adjusting the rear seat head passenger seat restraints(→ page 89). Notes on child restraint systems on the front # Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint passenger seat system with Top Tether. Always comply with Accident statistics show that children secured in the child restraint system manufacturer's the rear seats are safer than children secured in installation instructions when doing so. the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz # Route Top Tether belt 5 under head strongly advises that you install a child restraint restraint 1 between the two head restraint system on a rear seat. bars. If it is absolutely necessary to install a child # Guide Top Tether belt 5 downwards restraint system on the front passenger seat, between combined cargo cover and net 3 always observe the information on the automatic and backrest 2. front passenger air bag shutoff . # Hook Top Tether hook 6 of Top Tether belt By doing this, you can avoid risks caused by: 5 without twisting into Top Tether anchor‐ R A child restraint system that is not detected age 4. by the automatic front passenger air bag # Tension Top Tether belt 5. Always comply shutoff. with the child restraint system manufactur‐ R The unintentionally disabled front passenger er's installation instructions when doing so. air bag. # If necessary, move head restraint 1 down‐ R Incorrect positioning of the child restraint wards Adjusting the rear seat head system. restraints(→ page 89). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt 5. Occupant safety 53

Forward-facing and rearward-facing child must not touch the roof or be put under Child safety locks restraint systems on the front passenger strain by the head restraints. Activating/deactivating the child safety lock seat R If necessary, adjust the angle of the seat for the rear doors When using a rearward-facing child restraint sys‐ backrest and the head restraint position tem on the front passenger seat, the front accordingly. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury passenger air bag must always be disabled. This R is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that due to children left unattended in the vehicle indicator lamp is lit continuously (→ page 42). the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the When using the child restraint system on the If you leave children unaccompanied in the seat cushion is in the lowest position. vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in front passenger seat, it is essential to observe R the following: Always make sure that the shoulder belt motion, for example by: strap is correctly routed from the seat belt R Releasing the parking brake. R Move the front passenger seat as far back as outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt possible. guide on the child restraint system. The R Shifting the transmission out of park R Set the seat backrest to an almost vertical shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards position j. position. and downwards from the seat belt outlet. R Starting the engine. R Retract the seat cushion length as far as pos‐ R If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ sible. the front passenger seat accordingly. ment. R The entire base of the child restraint system R Never place objects, e.g. a cushion, under or # Never leave children and animals unat‐ must always rest on the seat cushion of the behind the child restraint system. tended in the vehicle. front-passenger seat. Always comply with the manufacturer's installa‐ # When leaving the vehicle, always take R The backrest of the forward-facing child tion and operating instructions for the child the SmartKey with you and lock the restraint system must, as far as possible, be restraint system used. vehicle. resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. The child restraint system 54 Occupant safety

& WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to # Always activate the child safety locks exposure to extreme heat or cold in the available if children are traveling in the vehicle vehicle. If people – particularly children – are # Never leave children unattended in the exposed to extreme heat or cold over an vehicle. extended period of time, there is a risk of # When leaving the vehicle, always take injury or even fatal injury. the SmartKey with you and lock the # Never leave anyone – particularly chil‐ vehicle. dren – unattended in the vehicle. Child safety locks are available for the rear doors & and for the rear side windows. WARNING There is a risk of accident The child safety lock on the rear doors secures and injury if you leave children unatten‐ each door separately. The doors can no longer ded in the vehicle be opened from the inside. If children are traveling in the vehicle, they could: # Press the lever in direction 1 (activate) or R Open doors, thereby endangering other 2 (deactivate). persons or road users. # Make sure that the child safety locks are R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by working properly. oncoming traffic. R Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example. Occupant safety 55

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock R With indicator lamp 1 off: via the switch Unsecured animals may be thrown around in for the rear side windows on the corresponding rear door or driv‐ the vehicle in the event of an accident or er's door. sudden steering and braking maneuver and % Vehicles with folding bench seat: The injure vehicle occupants in the process. switch for opening the tailgate which is loca‐ # Never leave animals in the vehicle unat‐ ted on the right-hand wheel arch when tended. viewed in the direction of travel is also # secured. Always correctly secure animals while driving, for example using a suitable animal carrier. Pets in the vehicle

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unat‐ tended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unatten‐ ded or unsecured, they could possibly press down buttons or switches. # To activate/deactivate: press button 2. Thereby an animal may: Opening/closing the side window in the rear R activate vehicle equipment and become passenger compartment is possible: trapped, for example R With indicator lamp 1 lit: via the switch R switch systems on or off and endanger on the driver's door. other road users 56 Opening and closing

SmartKey # Never leave children and animals unat‐ Overview of SmartKey functions tended in the vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take & WARNING ‑ Danger of accident or injury the key with you and lock the vehicle. if children are left unattended in the vehi‐ # Keep the vehicle key out of the reach of cle children. If children are left unattended in the vehicle, they could: * NOTE Damage to the key caused by R open doors, thereby endangering other magnetic fields persons or road users. # Keep the key away from strong mag‐ 1 Locks R get out of the vehicle and be hit by netic fields. 2 Battery check lamp oncoming traffic. 3 Unlocks R operate vehicle equipment. 4 Opens/closes the tailgate Moreover, children could also set the vehicle 5 Panic alarm in motion by, for example: The SmartKey locks and unlocks the following R releasing the parking brake. components: R shifting the automatic transmission out of R The doors park position P j or shifting manual R The tailgate transmission into idle position. R The fuel filler flap R starting the engine. Opening and closing 57

If you do not open the vehicle within approx‐ Activating/deactivating the panic alarm Changing the unlocking settings imately 40 seconds after unlocking: Requirement: Possible unlocking functions of the SmartKey: R The vehicle is locked again. R Ignition is switched off. R Central unlocking R Anti-theft protection is reactivated. R Unlocking the driver's door and fuel filler flap

Do not keep the SmartKey together with elec‐ # tronic devices or metal objects. This can affect To switch between settings: press the the SmartKey's functionality. % and & buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery % If battery check lamp 2 does not light up check lamp flashes twice. after pressing the % or & button, the battery is discharged. If the unlocking function for the driver's door and fuel filler flap has been selected: Replacing the SmartKey battery (→ page 58). R Pressing the % button a second time cen‐ trally unlocks the vehicle. Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking # To activate: press button 1 for approx‐ R Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: If you touch verification signal imately one second. the inner surface of the door handle on the Multimedia system: A visual and audible alarm is triggered. driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel # , . î To deactivate: briefly press button 1 again. filler flap are unlocked. . or # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Press the start/stop button on the cockpit Reducing the energy consumption of the (the SmartKey is inside the vehicle). SmartKey If you do not use the vehicle or a SmartKey for an extended period of time, you can reduce the energy consumption of the respective SmartKey. 58 Opening and closing

Deactivate the KEYLESS-GO function of the # To remove: press release knob 1. # Keep batteries out of the reach of chil‐ SmartKey. Mechanical key 2 is pushed out slightly. dren. # To deactivate: press the & button on the # Pull out mechanical key 2 until it engages in # If batteries are swallowed, seek medical SmartKey twice in rapid succession. the intermediate position. attention immediately. The battery check lamp of the SmartKey % flashes twice briefly and lights up once. You can use the intermediate position of mechanical key 2 to attach the SmartKey + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental # To activate: press any button on the Smart‐ to a key ring. damage caused by improper disposal of Key. # Press release knob 1 again and fully batteries % When the vehicle is started with the Smart‐ remove mechanical key 2. Key in the stowage compartment of the cen‐ # ter console (→ page 145), the SmartKey To insert: press release knob 1. # Insert mechanical key to the intermediate functions are automatically activated. 2 Batteries contain pollutants. It is position or fully until it engages. illegal to dispose of them with the household Inserting/removing the mechanical key rubbish. Replacing the SmartKey battery #

& DANGER Serious damage to health caused by swallowing batteries Dispose of batteries in an Batteries contain toxic and corrosive sub‐ environmentally responsible manner. stances. Swallowing batteries may cause Take discharged batteries to a qualified serious damage to health. specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries. There is a risk of fatal injury. Opening and closing 59

Requirement: # Press release button 2 down fully and R You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. remove cover 1. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the # Remove battery compartment 3 and take battery replaced at a qualified specialist work‐ out the discharged battery. shop. # Insert the new battery into battery compart‐ # Remove the mechanical key (→ page 58). ment 3. Observe the positive pole marking in the battery compartment and on the bat‐ tery. # Push in battery compartment 3. # Replace cover 1 so that it engages.

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes: vehicle. R The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. 60 Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The SmartKey is defective. # Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary . # Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the vehicle . # Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop. You have lost a SmartKey. # Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. # If necessary, have the locks changed as well. Opening and closing 61

Doors # To unlock a rear door: pull the rear door # To unlock: press button 1. handle. # To lock: press button 2. Unlocking and opening doors from the inside The locking pin pops up when the rear door is unlocked. This does not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. # To open a rear door: pull the rear door han‐ The vehicle is not unlocked: dle again. R If you have locked the vehicle using the SmartKey. Locking/unlocking the vehicle centrally from R If you have locked the vehicle using KEY‐ the inside LESS-GO.

Locking and unlocking the vehicle with KEY‐ LESS-GO Requirements: R The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. R The distance between the SmartKey and the vehicle must not exceed 3 ft (1 m). R The driver's door and the door at which the # To unlock and open a front door: pull door door handle is used must both be closed. handle 2. Locking pin 1 pops up when the door is unlocked. 62 Opening and closing

# To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur‐ face of the door handle. # To lock the vehicle: touch sensor surface 1 or 2. # Convenience closing: touch recessed sen‐ sor surface 2 for an extended period. % For further information on convenience clos‐ ing (→ page 73). If you open the tailgate from outside it is auto‐ matically unlocked.

Problems with KEYLESS-GO

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You can no longer lock or unlock the Possible causes are: vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. R KEYLESS-GO has been deactivated . R The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. R There is interference from a powerful radio signal source. Opening and closing 63

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions R The SmartKey is malfunctioning. # Activate KEYLESS-GO . # Check the battery using the battery check lamp and replace if necessary . # Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the vehicle . # Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching the automatic locking feature # To deactivate: press and hold button 1 for on/off approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn‐ # To activate: press and hold button 2 for ing faster than walking pace. approximately five seconds until an acoustic signal sounds. Danger of being locked out when the function is activated: R If the vehicle is being tow started/pushed. R On a roller dynamometer. 64 Opening and closing

Unlocking/locking the driver's door using # Insert the mechanical key as far as it will go # To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter- the mechanical key into opening 1 in the cover. clockwise to position 1. % If you wish to lock the vehicle entirely using # Pull and hold the door handle. # To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise the mechanical key, first press the button for # Pull the cover on the mechanical key as to position 1. locking from the inside while the driver's straight as possible away from the vehicle # Carefully press the cover onto the lock cylin‐ door is open. Then proceed to lock the driv‐ until it releases. der until it engages and is seated firmly. er's door using the mechanical key. # Release the door handle. Load compartment Opening the tailgate

& WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ gate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open. Opening and closing 65

* NOTE Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. # Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate.

To open the tailgate, the following options are available: # Press and hold the p button on the SmartKey. # If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the tailgate handle and release it again immediately. # With the tailgate stopped in an intermediate position, pull the tailgate upwards. Release it # Pull remote opening switch 1 for the tail‐ # Vehicles with folding bench seat: Pull but‐ as soon as it begins to open. gate. ton 1 for the tailgate twice. # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Move The tailgate is unlocked. your foot below the bumper (→ page 68). If the tailgate has been locked from the outside, or the child safety lock has been activated, the tailgate cannot be unlocked with button 1. The tailgate is equipped with an automatic obstacle detection function. If a solid object blocks or restricts the tailgate when automati‐ 66 Opening and closing cally opening, this process is stopped. The auto‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped To close the tailgate, the following options are matic obstacle detection function is only an aid. during automatic closing of the tailgate available: It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when # Pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release opening the tailgate. Parts of the body could become trapped dur‐ it as soon as it begins to close. ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More‐ over, people, e.g. children, may be standing # Press and hold the p button on the Closing the tailgate in the closing area or may enter the closing SmartKey (with the SmartKey in the vicinity area during the closing process. of the vehicle). & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured # items in the vehicle Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing If objects, luggage or loads are not secured process. or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, Use one of the following options to stop the tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit closing process: vehicle occupants. R Press the p button on the SmartKey. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change R Press or pull the remote operating switch in direction. on the driver's door. # Always stow objects in such a way that R Press the closing or locking button on the they cannot be thrown around. tailgate. # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ R Pull the tailgate handle. gage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: It is also possible to stop the closing process by moving your foot in a kicking motion under the rear # bumper. Press closing button 1 on the tailgate. Opening and closing 67

# Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press locking # Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: Use In these situations in particular, the reversing button 2 in the tailgate. your foot to kick below the bumper function cannot prevent someone being trap‐ If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the (→ page 68). ped. tailgate closes and the vehicle is locked. Automatic reversing function for the tailgate # When closing, make sure that no body The tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle parts are in the closing area. detection with reversing function. If a solid If someone is trapped: object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto‐ R matically closing, the tailgate automatically Press the p button on the SmartKey, opens again slightly. The automatic obstacle or detection with reversing function is only an aid. R Press or pull the remote operating switch It is not a substitute for your attentiveness when on the driver's door, or closing the tailgate. R Press the closing or locking button on the # When closing, make sure that no body parts tailgate, or are in the closing area. R Pull the tailgate handle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped despite the reversing function The reversing function does not react: R To soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fin‐ # Press remote operating switch 1 for the gers. tailgate. R Over the last Ó in (8 mm) of the closing path. 68 Opening and closing

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function Observe the notes when opening (→ page 64) (3 m) away from the vehicle in such sit‐ and closing (→ page 66) the tailgate. uations. % Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground you & WARNING Risk of burns caused by a hot could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice. exhaust system Requirements: The vehicle exhaust system can become very R The SmartKey is behind the vehicle. hot. If you use HANDS-FREE ACCESS, you R Stand at least 12 in (30 cm) away from the could burn yourself by touching the exhaust vehicle while performing the kicking move‐ system. ment. # Always ensure that you only make a R Do not come into contact with the bumper kicking movement within the detection while making the kicking movement. range of the sensors. R Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. * NOTE Vehicle damage due to uninten‐ R tional opening of the tailgate The kicking movement must be towards the With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close vehicle and back. or stop the closing process of the tailgate by R when using an automatic car wash performing a kicking movement under the rear R when using a high pressure cleaner bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or # Deactivate KEYLESS-GO or make sure closing process alternately. that the key located is at least 10 ft Opening and closing 69

The tailgate can open or close unintentionally in # Press and hold the closing button in the tail‐ the following situations: gate until you hear a short acoustic signal. R If persons' arms or legs move in the sensor The opening angle limiter is activated. The detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehi‐ tailgate then stops in the stored position cle, sitting on the edge of the cargo compart‐ when opened. ment, or picking up objects. To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the R If objects are guided behind or placed behind outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped the vehicle, e.g. charging cables, tensioning automatically. straps or luggage. Deactivating the opening angle limiter R When working on the trailer coupling, trailers # 1 Sensor detection range or rear bicycle racks. Press and hold the closing button on the tail‐ gate until two short tones sound. If several consecutive kicking movements are Deactivate KEYLESS-GO (→ page 57) or do not not successful, wait ten seconds. carry the SmartKey about your person in such Unlocking the tailgate with the mechanical System limitations situations. key The system may be impaired or may not function # Fold the rear seat backrest forward. if: Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate # Remove the combined cargo cover and net R The area around the sensor is dirty, e.g. due Activating the opening angle limiter (→ page 108). to road salt or snow. You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in R The kicking movement is made using a pros‐ the top half of its opening range, to approx‐ thetic leg. imately 8 in (20 cm) before the end position. # Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. 70 Opening and closing

Emergency release of the tailgate from the Roller sun blinds inside (vehicles with a folding bench seat) Extending the rear side window roller sun‐ blinds

* NOTE Damage to the inertia reel due to it snapping back If suddenly snapped back, the inertia reel may be damaged. # Always move the roller sun blind by hand. # Do not drive with the roller sun blind hooked in and side windows opened at the same time.

# Insert mechanical key 2 into opening 1 in the trim and push it in. The tailgate is unlocked. # Press the cover down in the direction of arrow 1 and pull in the direction of arrow 2 and remove it. # Pull the emergency release lever in the direc‐ tion of arrow 3. The tailgate is unlocked. Opening and closing 71

Side windows # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ Opening/closing the side windows ton immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window. & WARNING Risk of entrapment when opening a side window & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped When opening a side window, parts of the when children operate the side windows body could be drawn in or become trapped Children could become trapped if they oper‐ between the side window and window frame. ate the side windows, particularly when unat‐ # When opening, make sure that nobody tended. is touching the side window. # Activate the child safety lock for the # If someone is trapped, release the but‐ rear side windows. ton immediately or pull it in order to # When leaving the vehicle, always take close the side window again. the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. # Pull the roller sunblind out by tab 1 and & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped # Never leave children unattended in the hook it onto brackets 2 at the top of the when closing a side window vehicle. window. When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. # When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 72 Opening and closing

Automatic reversing function for the side This means that the reversing function can‐ windows not prevent someone from becoming trapped If an object blocks a side window during the in these situations. closing process, the side window opens again # automatically. The automatic reversing function When closing, make sure that no body is only an aid and is not a substitute for your parts are in the closing area. attentiveness. # If someone becomes trapped, press the # When closing, make sure that no body parts W button to open the side window are in the closing area. again.

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped Ventilating the vehicle before starting a jour‐ despite reversing protection on the side ney (convenience opening) window The reversing function does not react: & WARNING Risk of entrapment when R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small opening a side window 1 Closes fingers. When opening a side window, parts of the 2 Opens R over the last ã in (4 mm) of the closing body could be drawn in or become trapped path. between the side window and window frame. The buttons in the driver's door take prece‐ R # dence. during resetting. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. # R when closing the side window again man‐ To start automatic operation: press/pull # the W button beyond the pressure point. ually immediately after automatic revers‐ Release the button immediately if ing. somebody becomes trapped. # To interrupt automatic operation: press/ pull the W button again. Opening and closing 73

# Press and hold the % button on the # To interrupt convenience opening: release # When closing, make sure that no body SmartKey the % button. parts are in the closing area. The following functions are performed: # R The vehicle is unlocked. Closing side windows from the outside (con‐ Press and hold the & button on the SmartKey. R The side windows are opened. venience closing) The following functions are performed: R The sliding sunroof is opened. & WARNING Risk of entrapment caused by R The vehicle is locked. R The panoramic sliding sunroof is opened. inadvertent convenience closing R The side windows are closed. R The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is When the convenience closing feature is R The sliding sunroof is closed. switched on. operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side win‐ R The panoramic sliding sunroof is closed. If the roller sunblinds of the panoramic sliding dow and the sliding sunroof. # To close the roller sunblinds: press the sunroof are closed, the roller sunblinds are # & button again. opened first. Observe the complete closing proce‐ dure when using convenience closing. # To interrupt convenience closing: release # To continue the opening procedure: press the & button. the % button again. % Convenience closing can also be operated with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 61). Problems with the side windows

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions A side window cannot be closed and # Check to see if any objects are in the window guide. you cannot see the cause. 74 Opening and closing

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side win‐ dow.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: # Immediately after the window is obstructed, pull the corresponding button again until the side window has closed, and hold the button for an additional second. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The side window is closed without the automatic reversing function. Opening and closing 75

Sliding sunroof & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if # Release the button immediately if Opening/closing the sliding sunroof the sliding sunroof is operated by chil‐ somebody becomes trapped. dren or % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the panoramic sliding sunroof. Children operating the sliding sunroof could # Press the button in any direction during get caught in the moving parts, particularly if the automatic opening/closing process. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped unattended. The opening/closing process is stop‐ while opening and closing the sliding # Never leave children unattended in the ped. sunroof vehicle. * During opening and closing, parts of the # When leaving the vehicle, always take NOTE Malfunction caused by snow and body could get caught in the sweep of the the key with you and lock the vehicle. ice sliding sunroof. Snow and ice may lead to a malfunction of # When opening or closing, make sure & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped the sliding sunroof. that no body parts are in the sweep. while opening and closing the roller sun # Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free # Release the button immediately if blind of snow and ice. somebody becomes trapped. When opening or closing, make sure that no or body parts become trapped between the * NOTE Damage caused by protruding # Press the button in any direction during roller sun blind and frame or the sliding sun‐ objects the automatic opening/closing process. roof. Objects that protrude from the sliding sun‐ The opening/closing process is stop‐ # When opening or closing, make sure roof may damage the sealing strips. ped. that no body parts are in the sweep of the roller sun blind. # Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. 76 Opening and closing

R The roller sunblind can only be operated Automatic reversing function of the sliding when the panoramic sliding sunroof is sunroof closed. If there is an object obstructing the sliding sun‐

# roof during the closing process, the sliding sun‐ To start automatic operation: press/pull roof opens again automatically. The automatic the 3 button beyond the pressure point. reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐ # To interrupt automatic operation: press/ stitute for your attentiveness. pull the 3 button again. # When closing, make sure that no body parts Restrictions: are in the closing area. R Vehicles without a panoramic sliding sun‐ & roof: The automatic opening and raising fea‐ WARNING Risk of becoming trapped ture is available only when the sliding sun‐ despite the reversing function being roof is closed. active R Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sun‐ The reversing function does not react: roof: The automatic raising feature is only R to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small 1 To raise available when the sliding sunroof is closed fingers 2 To open or raised. R during the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the clos‐ 3 To close/lower R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be ing path opened if a roof rack is installed. The panor‐ R during resetting Use the 3 button to operate the panoramic amic sliding sunroof closes again automati‐ sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. cally when it encounters resistance. R when closing the sliding sunroof again R manually immediately after automatic The panoramic sliding sunroof can only be reversing opened when the roller sunblind is open. Opening and closing 77

This means that the reversing function can‐ & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped By pushing or pulling the 3 button, you can not prevent someone being trapped in these despite the reversing function being interrupt the automatic functions: "Rain closing situations. active function when driving" and "Automatic lowering feature". # When closing, make sure that no body In particular, the reversing function does not parts are in the closing area. react to soft, light and thin objects, for exam‐ Rain closing function when driving # Release the button immediately if ple small fingers. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If somebody becomes trapped. it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof is This means that the reversing function can‐ automatically lowered while the vehicle is in or not prevent entrapment in these situations. motion. # Press the button in any direction during # When opening or closing the roller sun the automatic closing process. blind, make sure that no body parts are Automatic lowering feature The closing process is stopped. in the sweep. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof: If # Release the button immediately if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, the slid‐ Automatic reversing function of the roller somebody becomes trapped. ing sunroof is automatically lowered slightly at sunblind higher speeds. At low speeds, it is raised again or If there is an object obstructing the roller sun‐ automatically. blind during the closing process, the roller sun‐ # Press the button in any direction during blind opens again automatically. The automatic the automatic closing process. & WARNING Risk of entrapment by auto‐ reversing function is only an aid and is not a sub‐ The closing process is stopped. matic lowering of the sliding sunroof stitute for your attentiveness. At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof # When opening or closing the roller sunblind, Automatic features of the sliding sunroof automatically lowers slightly at the rear. make sure that no body parts are in the sweep. % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the This could trap you or other persons. panoramic sliding sunroof. 78 Opening and closing

# Make sure that nobody reaches into the Problems with the sliding sunroof sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the % The term "sliding sunroof" also refers to the vehicle is in motion. panoramic sliding sunroof. # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐ ately pull back the sliding sunroof but‐ ton. The sliding sunroof lifts during opening.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The sliding sunroof cannot be closed & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injury by closing the sliding sunroof again and you cannot see the cause. If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area in the process. # Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. # Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped. or # Press the button in any direction during the automatic closing process. The closing process is stopped.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: Opening and closing 79

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Immediately after automatic reversing, pull and hold the 3 button down again to the point of resist‐ ance until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and reopens again slightly: # Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof is closed again with increased force. Vehicles without a panoramic slid‐ # Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear. ing sunroof: The sliding sunroof does # Press the 3 button for another second. not operate smoothly. # Use automatic operation to fully raise and then close the sliding sunroof. Vehicles with a panoramic sliding # Pull the 3 button down repeatedly to the point of resistance until the sliding sunroof is fully closed. sunroof: The sliding sunroof or the # Pull the 3 button for another second. roller sunblind does not operate # smoothly. Pull and hold the 3 button down until the roller sunblind is completely closed. # Pull the 3 button for another second. # Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof. 80 Opening and closing

Anti-theft protection ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Function of the immobilizer Function of the ATA system (anti-theft alarm system) The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct SmartKey. If the ATA system is armed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered in the following situations: The immobilizer is automatically activated when the ignition is switched off and deactivated when R A door is opened. the ignition is switched on. R The tailgate is opened. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Smart‐ R The hood is opened. Key with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been left The ATA system is armed automatically after inside the vehicle. approximately 10 seconds: R % If the event that the engine cannot be star‐ After locking the vehicle with the SmartKey. ted (yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the R After locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. system is not operational. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call When the ATA system is armed, indicator lamp 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or 1 flashes. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). The ATA system is automatically deactivated: R After unlocking the vehicle with the Smart‐ Key. R After pressing the start/stop button with the SmartKey inside the vehicle. Opening and closing 81

R After unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO. % When the mbrace service (→ page 295) is active and the alarm stays on for more than 30 seconds, a message is automatically sent to the Customer Assistance Center. Deactivating the ATA (anti-theft alarm sys‐ tem) alarm # Press the %, & or p button on the SmartKey. or # Press the start/stop button (the SmartKey is inside the vehicle). Stopping the alarm using KEYLESS-GO # Grasp the outside door handle (with the SmartKey outside the vehicle). 82 Seats and stowing

Notes on the correct driver's seat position R Your legs are not entirely stretched and you can depress the pedals properly. & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting R The back of your head is supported at eye the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in level by the center of the head restraint. motion R You can hold the steering wheel with your You could lose control of the vehicle in the arms slightly bent. following situations: R You can move your legs freely. R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head R You can see all the displays in the instrument restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror cluster clearly. while the vehicle is in motion R You should have a good overview of traffic R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ conditions. cle is in motion R The seat belt is pulled snugly against the # Before starting the engine: adjust the body and must be routed across the center driver's seat, the head restraint, the of your shoulder and across your hips in the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten Observe the following when adjusting steering pelvic area. your seat belt. wheel 1, seat belt 2 and driver's seat 3: R You are as far away from the driver's airbag as possible. R You are sitting in a normal upright position. R Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion. Seats and stowing 83

Seats # Make sure when adjusting a seat that & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ no one has any body parts in the sweep the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in trically (without Seat Comfort Package) of the seat. motion Observe the safety notes on "Air bags" and "Chil‐ You could lose control of the vehicle in the & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if following situations: the seats are adjusted by children dren in the vehicle". R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head Children could become trapped if they adjust & WARNING Risk of accident due to the restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror the seats, particularly when unattended. driver's seat not being engaged while the vehicle is in motion # When leaving the vehicle, always take If the driver's seat is not engaged, it could R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ the SmartKey with you and lock the move unexpectedly while the vehicle is in cle is in motion vehicle. motion. # Before starting the engine: adjust the # Never leave children unattended in the This could cause you to lose control of the driver's seat, the head restraint, the vehicle. vehicle. steering wheel or the mirror and fasten # your seat belt. The seats can be adjusted when the ignition is Always make sure that the driver's seat switched off. is engaged before starting the vehicle. & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if & WARNING Risk of becoming trapped the seat height is adjusted carelessly when adjusting the seats If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle or other vehicle occupants could be trapped occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the and thereby injured. seat guide rail. 84 Seats and stowing

Children in particular could accidentally Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and * NOTE Damage to the seats when moving press the electrical seat adjustment buttons rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the the seats back and become trapped. height and angle of the head restraints correctly. The seats may be damaged by objects when # Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so While moving the seats, make sure that moving the seats back. hands or other body parts do not get that the head restraint is as close as possible to # under the lever assembly of the seat the back of your head. When moving the seats back, make adjustment system. sure that there are no objects in the & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to footwell or under or behind the seats. incorrect seat position & WARNING Risk of injury due to head restraints which are not installed or are The seat belt does not offer the intended adjusted incorrectly level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐ When braking or in the event of an accident, not provide protection as intended. you could slide underneath the seat belt and sustain abdominal or neck injuries, for exam‐ There is an increased risk of injury in the ple. head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an # accident or when braking. Adjust the seat properly before begin‐ ning your journey. # Always drive with the head restraints # installed. Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that # Before driving off, make sure for every the shoulder section of your seat belt is vehicle occupant that the center of the routed across the center of your shoul‐ head restraint supports the back of the der. head at about eye level. Seats and stowing 85

Adjusting the front seat manually and elec‐ # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: trically (with Seat Comfort Package) lift lever 4 and slide the seat into the desired position. # Make sure that the seat is engaged. # To adjust the seat cushion length: lift lever 5 and slide the front section of the seat cushion forwards or backwards.

1 Seat backrest inclination 2 Seat height 3 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment 1 Seat backrest inclination # To adjust the seat fore-and-aft position: 2 Seat height lift lever 3 and slide the seat into the 3 Seat cushion inclination desired position. 4 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment # Make sure that the seat is engaged. 5 Seat cushion length 86 Seats and stowing

Adjusting the front seat electrically # Save the settings with the memory function (→ page 100).

Adjusting the front passenger seat from the driver's seat electrically Requirement: R The power supply is switched on This function is only available on vehicles with an electrically adjustable front passenger seat.

You can call up the following functions for the front passenger seat: 1 Head restraint height R Seat adjustment 2 Seat backrest inclination R Seat heater 3 Seat height R 4 Seat cushion length Seat ventilation 5 Seat cushion inclination R Memory function 6 Seat fore-and-aft adjustment Seats and stowing 87

# To select the front passenger seat: press Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support Head restraints button 1. Adjusting the front seat head restraints man‐ When the indicator lamp lights up, the front ually passenger seat is selected. # Adjust the front passenger seat using the & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting buttons in the door control panel on the driv‐ the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in er's side. motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the 1 To raise steering wheel or the mirror and fasten 2 To soften your seat belt. 3 To lower 4 To harden # Using buttons 1 to 4, adjust the contour of the backrest individually to suit your back. 88 Seats and stowing

& WARNING Risk of injury due to head Adjusting the front seat luxury head restraints which are not installed or are restraints manually adjusted incorrectly If head restraints are not installed or are adjusted incorrectly, the head restraints can‐ not provide protection as intended. There is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. # Always drive with the head restraints installed. # Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. # To raise: pull the head restraint up. Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐ rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the tion of the arrow and push the head restraint # To adjust the side bolsters of the head height and angle of the head restraints correctly. down. restraint: pull or push right or left-hand side # To move forwards: pull the head restraint bolster 2. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so forwards. that the head restraint is as close as possible to # To move forwards: pull the head restraint the back of your head. # To move backwards: press release knob 2 forwards. and push the head restraint backwards. Seats and stowing 89

# To move backwards: press release knob 1 Adjusting the head restraints of the rear Installing/removing the rear seat head and push the head restraint towards the rear. seats mechanically restraints Lowering the rear seat head restraints from the front

# To raise: pull the head restraint up. # Release the rear seat backrest and fold it # To lower: press release knob 1 in the direc‐ slightly forwards (→ page 104). # # Press button 1. tion of the arrow and push the head restraint To remove: pull the head restraint up to the down. stop. # Push release knob 1 in the direction of the arrow and pull out the head restraint. 90 Seats and stowing

# To install: insert the head restraint so that Adjusting the backrest side bolsters Setting automatic adjustment of the lateral the notches on the bar appear on the left # Select . support (active multicontour seat) when viewed in the direction of travel. # Select the setting. Multimedia system: # Push the head restraint down until you hear , . a it engage in position. Adjusting the seat contour in the lumbar With this function, the lateral support of the # Fold the rear seat backrest back until it region of the seat backrest active multicontour seat is automatically adjus‐ engages. # Select . ted to the driving and cornering dynamics of the # Adjust the air cushion. vehicle. Configuring seat settings Memory function # Select or . Multimedia system: # Save the seat settings with the memory func‐ # Select . , . a tion (→ page 100). # Select setting: , or . # Select or . Overview of massage and workout programs The following massage program can be selected:

Massage program for the front seats Function Hot Relaxing Massage for backRelaxing massage program starting in the pelvic area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full back massage, stretching the pelvic area. Ending with gentle stroking motions. Hot Relaxing Massage for shouldersRelaxing massage program starting in the shoulder area. Warm pressure points can be felt, full twin-wave back massage, stretching the shoulder area. Ending with gentle stroking motions. Seats and stowing 91

Massage program for the front seats Function Activating Massage Activating back massage with increasing twin-waves and then soothing movements. Classic Massage Massage with increasing twin-waves and soothing movements. Wave MassageRelaxing and activating massage program, starting on your back and continuing in the cushion. Subse‐ quent stroking motions across the entire spinal column. Mobilizing MassageMobilization of the spinal column and upper body using pressure points in the lumbar and back. You can increase the mobilization effect by relaxing into the pressure points. This process helps to improve your posture.

Active Workout programs ing your abdomen and back muscles during a ing also helps to improve blood flow to your The Active Workout programs require your active traffic jam, for example, by tensing and releasing muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon cooperation and are a convenient way of exercis‐ the specific muscle groups. Tensing and releas‐ as you feel it. 92 Seats and stowing

The following Active Workout programs can be selected:

Workout programFunction Active Workout backrestTo stimulate the muscles in your abdomen and back: press against the pressure points in the backrest. Keep the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath. When the pressure in the seat backrest recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly. Active Workout cushion To stimulate the muscles in your lower back: press against the pressure points in the seat cushion. Keep the pressure under your feet even. Continue to breathe normally; do not hold your breath. When the pressure in the seat cushion recedes, stop pressing against it and relax briefly.

Selecting the massage program for the front Resetting seat and massage settings Switching the seat heater on/off seats Multimedia system: & WARNING Risk of burns due to repeat‐ Multimedia system: , . a . , . edly switching on the seat heater a # Select or . Repeatedly switching on the seat heater can # Select or . Depending on whether the settings for the driver cause the seat cushion and seat backrest # Select . or front passenger seat are selected, only the padding to become very hot. # Select a massage program. selected seat can be reset. The health of persons with limited tempera‐ The massage program runs for approximately ture sensitivity or a limited ability to react to 9 to 15 minutes, depending on the setting. excessively high temperatures may be affec‐ # To set the massage intensity: switch ted or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. on O or off ª. Seats and stowing 93

# Do not repeatedly switch on the seat # To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ heater. ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Requirement: If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heater R The power supply is switched on is switched off. % The seat heater automatically switches down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heater is switched off.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Requirement: R the power supply is switched on

# To switch on/increase the level: press but‐ ton 1 repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps light up. 94 Seats and stowing

# To switch off/reduce the level: press but‐ Observe the notes on "Seat belts" (→ page 37), ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐ "Head restraints" (→ page 87) and "Children in tion level is set. the vehicle" (→ page 46). If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventila‐ The folding bench seat is only approved for use tion is switched off. with child seats designed for children up to six years old . Information on suitable child restraint Folding bench seat in the cargo compart‐ systems on the folding bench seat can be ment obtained at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter. Notes on the folding bench seat The folding bench seat may only be used when & WARNING Risk of injury when the seat the combined cargo cover and net is installed. backrest is not upright and locked in The tailgate can be opened from the folding position bench seat. The switch is located on the wheel arch on the right-hand side when viewed in the If the seat backrests of the rear bench seat direction of travel. # are not locked in the upright position, the To switch on/increase the level: press but‐ seat backrest of the folding bench seat may Folding out the folding bench seat ton 1 repeatedly until the desired ventila‐ fold down while driving. tion level is set. Requirements Depending on the ventilation level, up to In this case, the seat belts may not perform R The seat backrests of the rear bench seat are three indicator lamps light up. their intended protective function. locked in the upright position. # Make sure that the seat backrests of R The handle for the combined cargo cover and the rear bench seat are locked in the net has been moved up. The upper part of upright position. the plate has been folded down to improve the view to the rear. Seats and stowing 95

# Push down the seat cushion until the seat backrest engages fully. # Fold the head restraints upwards. Installing and removing the seat cushion You must remove the seat cushion on the folding bench seat beforehand if you wish to lift the cargo compartment floor in the event of a flat tire, for example.

# Pull release handle 1 and fold the seat backrest of the folding bench seat upwards. # Hook the seat belts into retainers 3. # Secure the seat belt buckles in the back of the seat backrest. # Pull release 2 and fold the seat cushion of the folding bench seat into the seat position. 96 Seats and stowing

Folding back the folding bench seat

# To remove: fold seat cushion 2 vertically

upwards and remove it from seat cushion # guide 1. Pull the seat cushion upwards by tab 1 and fold it back into its starting position until it # To install: push seat cushion 2 into seat engages. cushion guide 1 at a slight angle from the rear 3. # Fold seat cushion 2 back into its starting position 4 until it engages. Seats and stowing 97

# # * NOTE Damage to the folding bench seat Press release knob 3 and fold the head To open: press the release knob in the cen‐ when folding back restraints down. ter of the cargo compartment floor and turn # Press release knob 4 and push the head to the OPEN position. The folding bench seat may be damaged restraints all the way in. # Pull the loop on the cargo compartment floor when it is folded back. # Fold back seat backrest 2 of the folding and fold the cargo compartment floor up. # Fully insert the head restraints into the bench seat into its starting position. % guides. If the seat cushions are not installed → # Opening and closing the cargo compartment ( page 95), the cargo compartment floor Make sure that the seat belt buckles can be completely removed. engages in their guides. floor # To close: re-install the cargo compartment & WARNING Risk of injury due to an open floor if necessary, and fold down. cargo compartment floor # Press the release knob and turn to the If you drive when the cargo compartment CLOSE position. floor is open, objects could be thrown around and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐ tion. # Always close the cargo compartment floor before a journey.

If you need the TIREFIT kit for a flat tire, for example, you must first open the cargo compart‐ ment floor, which can also be used as a footrest. 98 Seats and stowing

Steering wheel # Never leave children unattended in the # Adjust height 2 and distance to steering wheel 3. Adjusting the steering wheel manually vehicle. # When leaving the vehicle, always take # To lock the steering column: push release & WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the SmartKey with you and lock the lever 1 up as far as it will go. the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in vehicle. # Check and make sure that the steering col‐ motion umn is locked by moving the steering wheel. You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: Adjusting the steering wheel electrically R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head The steering wheel can be adjusted when the restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror ignition is switched off. while the vehicle is in motion R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion # Before starting the engine: adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror and fasten your seat belt.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment for chil‐ dren when adjusting the steering wheel # To unlock the steering column: push Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. release lever 1 down completely. Seats and stowing 99

Switching the steering wheel heater on/off Easy entry and exit feature How the easy entry and exit feature operates

& WARNING Risk of accident when driving off while adjusting the easy exit feature ‑ If you drive off while the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, you could lose control of the vehicle. # Always wait until the adjustment proc‐ ess is complete before driving off.

& WARNING Risk of entrapment when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature ‑ 1 Adjusts the distance to the steering wheel ‑ When the easy entry and exit feature 2 Adjusts the height adjusts the steering wheel, you and other 1 Switches on vehicle occupants – particularly children – # Save the settings with the memory function 2 Switches off could become trapped. (→ page 100). 3 Indicator lamp # ‑ While the easy entry and exit feature is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. 100 Seats and stowing

# Move the adjustment lever of the steer‐ The last drive position of the steering wheel is # Only use the memory function on the ing wheel if there is a risk of becoming stored in the following situations: driver's side when the vehicle is station‐ trapped by the steering wheel. R You switch the ignition off ary. The adjustment process is stopped. R You save the seat setting using the memory # Never leave children unattended in the function & WARNING Risk of entrapment when set‐ vehicle. ting the seat with the memory function If you press one of the memory function position # When leaving the vehicle, always take buttons, the adjustment process is stopped. When the memory function adjusts the seat the key with you and lock the vehicle. or steering wheel, you and other vehicle Setting the easy entry and exit feature occupants – particularly children – could The easy entry and exit feature makes getting in Multimedia system: become trapped. and out of your vehicle easier. , . î # During the setting procedure of the . If the easy entry and exit feature is active, the memory function, ensure that no body steering wheel will move upwards in the follow‐ # Select , parts are in the sweep of the seat or ing situations: or . the steering wheel. R You switch the ignition off # If somebody becomes trapped, immedi‐ R You open the driver's door when the ignition ately release the memory function posi‐ is switched on Using the memory function tion button. The adjustment process is stopped. The steering wheel moves back to the last drive & WARNING Risk of an accident if memory position in the following cases: function is used while driving R You switch the ignition on when the driver's If you use the memory function on the driv‐ door is closed er's side while driving, you could lose control R You close the driver's door when the ignition of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments is switched on being made. Seats and stowing 101

# & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the To call up: press and hold the relevant pre‐ memory function is activated by children set position button 1, 2 or 3 until the front seat is in the stored position. Children could become trapped if they acti‐ vate the memory function, particularly when unattended. Stowage areas # Never leave children unattended in the Notes on loading the vehicle vehicle. & # When leaving the vehicle, always take WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning the key with you and lock the vehicle. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust The memory function can be used when the igni‐ gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tail‐ tion is switched off. gate is open when the engine is running, Seat adjustments for up to three people can be especially if the vehicle is in motion. stored and called up using the memory function. # Always switch off the engine before The following systems can be selected: # To save: set the seat, the steering wheel, the opening the tailgate. R Seat, backrest and head restraint Head-up Display and the outside mirror to # Never drive with the tailgate open. R Steering wheel the desired position. R Outside mirrors # Press the memory button M together with & WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3. R Head-up Display items in the vehicle An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored. If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, 102 Seats and stowing

tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit # Always stow objects so that they can‐ The handling characteristics of your vehicle are vehicle occupants. not be thrown around in such situa‐ dependent on the distribution of the load within tions. the vehicle. You should bear the following in There is a risk of injury, particularly in the mind when loading the vehicle: event of sudden braking or a sudden change # Always make sure that objects do not in direction. protrude from stowage spaces, luggage R never exceed the permissible gross mass or the permissible axle loads for the vehicle # Always stow objects in such a way that nets or stowage nets. # (including occupants). The values are speci‐ they cannot be thrown around. Close the lockable stowage spaces fied on the vehicle identification plate on the # Before the journey, secure objects, lug‐ before starting a journey. vehicle's B-pillar. # gage or loads against slipping or tipping Stow and secure objects that are heavy, R the load must not protrude above the upper over. hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or edge of the seat backrests. too large in the cargo compartment. R when transporting objects in the cargo com‐ & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects & partment, the combined cargo cover and net being stowed incorrectly WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes must always be installed (cargo compart‐ If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed and tailpipe trim ment cover and safety net). incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become R always place the load behind unoccupied around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ very hot. If you come into contact with these seats if possible. tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself. R secure the load using the tie-down eyes and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain # Always be particularly careful around distribute the load evenly. all objects they contain. the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the # Allow the vehicle parts to cool down event of sudden braking or a sudden change before you touch them. in direction. Seats and stowing 103

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior Locking/unlocking the glove box Opening the glasses compartment Overview of the front stowage compart‐ ments

# To open: press button 1. Opening the stowage compartment in the 1 Stowage compartment in the doors rear armrest 2 Stowage/telephone compartment in the Observe the notes on loading the vehicle armrest with multimedia connections and (→ page 101). stowage compartment, e.g. for an MP3 # Turn the mechanical key a quarter turn clock‐ player wise 2 (to lock) or counter-clockwise 1 (to 3 Stowage compartment in the front center unlock). console with a USB port (depending on the vehicle's equipment) 4 Glove box 104 Seats and stowing

Through-loading feature in the rear bench If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, seat this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. Folding the rear seat backrests forward The center and outer seat backrests can be fol‐ & WARNING Risk of injury if the rear ded forward separately. bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest The right outer seat backrest can only be folded are not engaged forward together with the center seat backrest. If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat The outer seat backrests are electrically backrest are not engaged they could fold for‐ unlocked with the release handles in either the wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the cargo compartment or beside the seat backr‐ event of an accident. ests. R If this is the case, the vehicle occupant # Fully insert the rear seat backrest head would be forced into the seat belt by the restraints. rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The seat belt cannot protect as # To open: press release catch 1 and swing intended and could result in additional the cover of the armrest upwards. injury. R Objects or loads in the trunk/cargo com‐ partment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. # Make sure that the seat backrest and the rear bench seat/rear seat are engaged before every trip. Seats and stowing 105

# Left and right and seat backrests: press # Center seat backrest: pull seat backrest 2 right or left button 1. release 3 forward. The corresponding seat backrest folds # Fold seat backrest 2 forward. forward. 106 Seats and stowing

Folding the rear seat backrest back Locking the center rear seat backrest Lock the center seat backrest if you want to * NOTE Damage to the seat belt secure the cargo compartment from unauthor‐ ized access. The center seat backrest can then The seat belt could become trapped and thus only be folded forward together with the left seat damaged when folding back the seat back‐ backrest. rest. # Both seat backrests must be engaged and joined Make sure that the seat belt is not trap‐ together. ped when folding back the seat back‐ rest.

If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. # Move the driver's or front passenger seat for‐ wards, if necessary. # Fold corresponding seat backrest 1 back until it engages. Left and right seat backrests: if the seat backrest is not correctly engaged, this will be shown in the multifunction display in the instrument cluster. Center seat backrest: if the seat backrest is not correctly engaged, red lock verification indicator 2 will be visible. Seats and stowing 107

# Fold the center and left seat backrest Load compartment cover with safety net forward. (combined cargo cover and net) # To lock: slide catch 1 up. Notes on the cargo compartment cover The release mechanism of the center seat backrest is locked. & WARNING Risk of injury or death due to # To unlock: slide catch 1 down. objects being poorly secured Adjusting the angle of the rear seat backr‐ On its own, the cargo compartment cover ests (cargo position) cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, To enlarge the cargo compartment, you can items of luggage and heavy loads. adjust the seat backrests so that they are 10 You could be hit by an unsecured load during degrees steeper (cargo position). sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Fold the seat backrest forward (→ page 104). # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by # Move bar in the direction of the arrow. 1 using tie-downs, even if you are using # Push seat backrest 2 back to bar 1 until the cargo compartment cover. the backrest engages. 108 Seats and stowing

* NOTE Damage to the cargo compart‐ Extending/retracting the cargo compart‐ The contour plate of the retracted cargo com‐ ment cover when loading the vehicle ment cover partment cover can be used in three positions: R folded up by 45° (loading position) The cargo compartment cover may be dam‐ R aged when loading the vehicle. horizontal position (driving position) R # Do not place any objects above the folded down and locked in place (rattle-free lower edge of the side windows or on position when driving) the cargo compartment cover. Installing/removing the combined luggage cover and net The cargo compartment cover and the safety net form the combined cargo cover and net. Requirements R When the cargo compartment cover is clipped Remove from the cargo compartment or in, there should be no objects in the cargo com‐ from the left-hand rear door if the seat backr‐ # To extend: pull cargo compartment cover 1 partment obstructing the downwards movement ests are folded forwards. of the cover when the tailgate is being closed. back by grab handle 2 and clip it into the R The cargo compartment cover and safety net The cargo compartment cover will otherwise be brackets on the left and right. are retracted. raised again automatically. The cargo compartment cover raises automati‐ cally when the tailgate is opened and lowers again when the tailgate is closed. # To retract: unhook cargo compartment cover 1 from the brackets on the left and right and guide it forwards by grab handle 2 until it is fully retracted. Seats and stowing 109

# To install: slide the combined luggage cover and net into right-hand bracket 4 up to the stop. # Place the combined luggage cover and net into the left-hand bracket and slide it into catch 1 until the combined luggage cover and net engages audibly. Red lock verification indicator 3 must no longer be visible. Attaching the combined luggage cover and net to the rear seat backrest

* NOTE Damage to the combined luggage cover and net when attaching it to the seat backrest # # To remove: press button 2. When the combined luggage cover and net is Insert combined luggage cover and net 2 # Fold the combined luggage cover and net attached to the seat backrest, it may be into both guides 1 and push it up to the backwards with the seat backrest folded up. damaged when the seat backrest is folded stop in the direction of the arrow. # First, detach the combined luggage cover back. To disassemble the combined luggage cover and and net from left-hand catch 1 and then # Do not fold the seat backrests back. net, follow the instructions in reverse order. remove it from right-hand bracket 4. Requirement: R The seat backrests are folded forwards. 110 Seats and stowing

Attaching the safety net

& WARNING Risk of injury due to poorly secured objects On its own, the safety net cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. # Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. # Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are # Safety net without cargo compartment # Safety net with cargo compartment using the safety net. enlargement: pull the safety net back from enlargement: guide the safety net up by tab the rear bench seat by tab 1. 1 and hook it into eyelets 2. For safety reasons, always use a safety net when # Hook the safety net first on the left, then on transporting a load. the right into eyelets 2. Damaged safety nets can no longer fulfill their protective functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Seats and stowing 111

Overview of the tie-down eyes Overview of bag hooks

& WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage could be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly changing direc‐ tions. # Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. # Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks.

The bag hook can bear a maximum load of 1 Bag hook 6.6 lbs (3 kg). Do not use it to secure a load. 1 Tie-down eyes % Observe the notes on loading the vehicle (→ page 101). Related topic: Loading guidelines (→ page 101). EASY-PACK load-securing kit Notes on the EASY-PACK load-securing kit The EASY-PACK load-securing kit allows you to use your cargo compartment for a variety of pur‐ 112 Seats and stowing poses. The components are located under the Inserting the brackets into the load rail # If necessary, fold tie-down eye 2 upwards. cargo compartment floor. Tensioning the luggage holder Requirements: R The luggage holder is used to secure loads against the side wall of the cargo compart‐ ment to prevent them from moving around. R Only secure loads with a maximum weight of 15.4 lbs (7 kg) and which are small enough for the luggage holder to tightly and properly secure them.

# Insert bracket 1 into the center of load rail 1 Bag containing the brackets and luggage 5. holder # Press release knob 3 and slide bracket 1 2 Telescopic rod into the desired position in load rail 5. # Let go of release knob 3. # Press locking button 4. Bracket 1 is locked in load rail 5. Seats and stowing 113

# Press release knob 1 of the luggage holder and pull the strap out in the direction of the arrow. # Place the load between the strap and the cargo compartment side wall. # Using one hand, press release knob 1 of the luggage holder. # With your other hand, let the strap go slowly until the load is secured. # Make sure that locking button 4 on brack‐ ets 5 is pressed. Brackets 5 are secured in place on the load rail. # To remove: press release knob 3 on respective bracket 5 and remove luggage # To install: insert two brackets 5 into the # To install: insert one bracket 2 into both holder 2 by pulling upwards and out. left or right load rail. the left and right load rails and slide it to the # Press release knob 1 of luggage holder 2 Tensioning the telescopic rod desired position. and pull the strap out slightly. Requirement: # Insert telescopic rod 1 into brackets 2. # Insert luggage holder 2 into brackets 5 The telescopic rod is used to secure loads # When doing so, press release knob 3 and and, while doing so, press release knob 3 against the rear seats to prevent them from slide telescopic rod 1 down until it and slide the luggage holder downwards until moving around. engages. it engages. 114 Seats and stowing

# Make sure that locking button 4 on brack‐ # To close: unhook the hook from the rain ets 2 is pressed. trough and fasten it to the bracket on the Brackets 2 are secured in place on the load underside of the cargo compartment floor. rail. # Fold the cargo compartment floor down and # To remove: press release knob 3 on then press handle 1 down until it engages. respective bracket 2 and remove telescopic rod 1 by pulling it up and out. Attaching the roof rack

Opening the stowage space under the cargo & WARNING Risk of injury by exceeding compartment floor the maximum roof load & When you load the roof, the vehicle center of WARNING Risk of injury due to an open gravity rises and the driving characteristics cargo compartment floor change. If you drive when the cargo compartment If you exceed the maximum roof load, the floor is open, objects could be thrown around # To open: holding the ribbing, press handle driving characteristics, as well as the steer‐ and thereby strike vehicle occupants. There ing and braking, will be greatly impaired. is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of 1 down. # Never exceed the maximum roof load sudden braking or a sudden change in direc‐ # Lift the cargo compartment floor up by han‐ and adjust your driving style. tion. dle 1. # Always close the cargo compartment # Fold out the hook on the strap on the under‐ You will find information on the maximum roof floor before a journey. side of the cargo compartment floor and load in the "Technical data" section. hook it into the rain trough. Seats and stowing 115

Requirements Cup holder R Only use roof racks tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Installing or removing the cup holder in the center console R Make sure that you can raise the sliding sun‐ roof fully and open the tailgate fully once the & WARNING ‑ Risk of accident or injury roof rack is installed. when using the cup holder while the R The panoramic sliding sunroof cannot be vehicle is moving opened if a roof rack is installed. The panor‐ amic sliding sunroof closes again automati‐ The cup holder cannot secure containers cally when it encounters resistance. while the vehicle is moving. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is # Secure the roof rack to the roof railing. moving, the container may be flung around # Observe the manufacturer's installation and liquids may be spilled. The vehicle occu‐ instructions. pants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions # and you may lose control of the vehicle. To remove: slide catch 2 forwards and pull out cup holder 1. # Only use the cup holder when the vehi‐ cle is stationary. # To install: insert cup holder 1 and slide back catch 2. # Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. % The rubber mat of the cup holder can be # removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, luke‐ Close the container, particularly if the warm water. liquid is hot. 116 Seats and stowing

Opening the cup holder in the rear armrest # To open: press on cup holder 1 or 2. # To fold in or out: place or remove a con‐ * NOTE Damage to the cup holder tainer from cup holder 1 or 2. When the rear armrest is folded back the cup holder could become damaged. Ashtray and cigarette lighter # Only fold the rear armrest back when Using the ashtray in the front center console the cup holder is closed. * NOTE Damage to the stowage compart‐ ment under the ashtray # To open: push the cover of the ashtray The stowage compartment under the ashtray upwards on its right 2 or left side. is not heat resistant and could be damaged if you rest a lit cigarette on it. # To remove the insert: press insert 1 upwards slightly and pull it out upwards. # Make sure that the ashtray is fully engaged. # To install the insert: press insert 1 into the holder until the insert engages. Seats and stowing 117

Using the rear passenger compartment ash‐ Using the cigarette lighter tray & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from hot cigarette lighter You can burn yourself if you touch the hot heating element or the socket of the ciga‐ rette lighter. In addition, flammable materials may ignite if: R you drop the hot cigarette lighter # Press in cigarette lighter 1. R a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to The cigarette lighter will pop out automati‐ objects, for example cally when the heating element is red-hot. # To open: pull cover 2 out by its top handle edge. # Always hold the cigarette lighter by the # To remove the insert: push ribbing 3 from knob. Sockets the left side and pull insert 1 upwards and # Always make sure that the cigarette 12 V socket in the front center console out. lighter is out of reach of children. # # Requirement: To install the insert: install insert 1 from Never leave children unattended in the R vehicle. Only connect devices up to a maximum of above and press down into the holder until it 180 watts (15 A). engages. Requirement: R The ignition is switched on. 118 Seats and stowing

# Lift up socket cap 1. # Briefly press the trim of cover 2. # Insert the plug of the device. # Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the plug of the device. If you have connected a device to the 12 V socket, leave the cover of the stowage compart‐ ment open. Using the 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell # Lift up socket cap 1. Using the 12 V socket in the rear passenger Requirement: compartment R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A). Requirement: R Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 watts (15 A). Seats and stowing 119

Using the 115 V socket in the rear passenger & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to incor‐ compartment rect handling of the socket & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to dam‐ You could receive an electric shock: aged connecting cables or sockets R if you reach into the socket. If a suitable device is connected, the 115 V R if you insert unsuitable devices or objects socket will be carrying a high voltage. If the into the socket. connecting cable or the 115 V socket is # Only connect suitable devices to the pulled out of the trim or is damaged or wet, socket. you could receive an electric shock. # Only use dry and damage-free connect‐ Requirements: ing cables. R Only connect devices with a suitable plug # When the ignition is switched off, which conforms to the standards specific to ensure that the 115 V socket is dry. the country you are in. # If the 115 V socket is damaged or gets R Only connect devices up to a maximum of # pulled out of the paneling, immediately 150 watts. Open flap 3. have the socket checked or replaced at R Do not use multiple socket outlets. # Insert the plug of the device into 115 V a qualified specialized workshop. socket 1. # Never plug the connecting cable into a When the on-board electrical system voltage 115 V socket that is damaged or has is sufficient, indicator lamp 2 lights up. been pulled out of the trim. 120 Seats and stowing

Using the 12 V socket in the cargo compart‐ USB port in the rear passenger compartment Wireless charging of the mobile phone and ment connection with the exterior antenna Requirement: Notes on wireless charging of the mobile R Only connect devices up to a maximum of phone 180 watts (15 A). & WARNING Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addi‐ tion, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. You can charge a USB device, e.g. a mobile # Always stow objects so that they can‐ phone, at USB ports 1 using a suitable charg‐ not be thrown around in such situa‐ ing cable. The devices can be charged with 5 V tions. (2.1 A) and when the ignition is switched on. # Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage # Lift up cap 1 of the socket and insert the nets or stowage nets. plug of the device. Seats and stowing 121

R # Close the lockable stowage spaces * NOTE Damage to objects caused by The charging function and wireless connec‐ before starting a journey. placing them in the mobile phone stow‐ tion of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior antenna are only available if the igni‐ # age compartment Always stow and secure heavy, hard, tion is switched on. pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky If you place objects in the mobile phone objects in the trunk/load compartment. R Small mobile phones may not be able to be stowage compartment, these may be dam‐ charged in every position of the mobile aged by electromagnetic fields. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. phone stowage compartment. # Do not place credit cards, storage R Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in & WARNING Risk of fire from placing media or other objects sensitive to the mobile phone stowage compartment may objects in the mobile phone stowage electromagnetic fields in the mobile not be able to be charged or connected with compartment phone stowage compartment. the vehicle's exterior antenna. R The mobile phone may heat up during the If you place objects in the mobile phone * stowage compartment, they may heat up NOTE Damage to the mobile phone charging process. The mobile phone can be excessively and even catch fire. stowage compartment caused by liquids cooled in the mobile phone stowage com‐ # Do not place additional objects, espe‐ If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage partment when the air conditioning system is cially those mode of metal, in the compartment, the compartment may be switched on. The cooling output in the mobile phone stowage compartment. damaged. mobile phone stowage compartment is high‐ # est when the controller in the glove box is Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile closed. phone stowage compartment. R To ensure more efficient charging and con‐ R Depending on the vehicle equipment, the nection with the vehicle's exterior antenna, mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's remove the protective cover from the mobile exterior antenna via the charging module. phone. 122 Seats and stowing

R When charging, the mat should be used if # Place the mobile phone as close to the cen‐ that there is always sufficient room for possible. ter of mat 1 as possible with the display the pedals. facing upwards. # Do not use loose floor mats and do not Wireless charging of the mobile phone When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is place floor mats on top of one another. Requirement: being charged. R The mobile phone must be suitable for wire‐ Malfunctions during the charging process are less charging (Qi-compatible mobile phone). shown in the multimedia system display. You can find a list of Qi-compatible mobile % To clean, the mat can be removed. phones at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect Installing/removing the floor mats

& WARNING Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardizes the operating and road safety of the vehicle. # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's # To install: press studs 1 onto holders 2. footwell. # To remove: pull the floor mat off holders 2. # Always install the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure Light and visibility 123

Exterior lighting Light switch # 4 Ã Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) Lighting systems and your responsibility Operating the light switch # 5 L Low beam/high beam The various lighting systems of the vehicle are # R Switches the rear fog light on or off only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible 6 for correct vehicle illumination in accordance When low beam is activated, the indicator lamp with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, for the parking lights is deactivated and replaced legal requirements and traffic situation. by the low beam indicator lamp. Always park your vehicle safely and in a well-lit area, in accordance with the relevant legal stipu‐ lations.

* NOTE Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Operating the standing lights over a period of hours puts a strain on the battery. # Where possible, switch on the right X or left W parking light. # 1 W Left-hand standing lights # 2 X Right-hand standing lights In the case of severe battery discharging, the parking lights or standing lights are automati‐ # T 3 Parking lights and license plate cally switched off to facilitate a future engine lighting start. 124 Light and visibility

The exterior lighting (except parking and stand‐ Activating/deactivating the rear fog light Operating the light combination switch ing lights) switches off automatically when the driver's door is opened. Requirement: R The light switch is in the L or à posi‐ Automatic driving lights tion. The parking lights, low beam and daytime run‐ # ning lights are switched on automatically Press the R button. depending on the ignition status, whether the Please observe the country-specific laws on the engine is running and on the ambient light. use of rear fog lamps. & WARNING Risk of accident when the low beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to Ã, the low beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. # In such cases, turn the light switch to L. 1 High beam The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You 2 Turn signal light, right are responsible for vehicle lighting. 3 High-beam flasher 4 Turn signal light, left # Pull or push the combination switch in the relevant direction following the arrow. Light and visibility 125

Switching on the high beam manually Activating/deactivating the hazard warning Cornering light light # Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: Cornering light function Turn the light switch to the L position. R Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 1. When the high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam is deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for the high beam. # To switch off the high beam: move the combination switch back to its starting posi‐ tion. # To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly up to the pressure point in the Cornering light improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the turning direction, direction of arrow 2 or 4. The corresponding turn signal light flashes enabling better visibility in tight bends, for exam‐ three times. ple. It can only be activated when low beam is switched on. # To indicate for a duration: press the combi‐ # Press button 1. The function is active: nation switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow 2 or 4. R At speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h) when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned. 126 Light and visibility

R At speeds between 25 mph (40 km/h) and On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam 45 mph (70 km/h) when the steering wheel Assist may fail to recognize other road users is turned. with their own lighting, or may recognize Traffic circle and intersection function: the them too late. cornering light is activated on both sides through In these or similar situations, the automatic an evaluation of the current GPS position of the high beam is not deactivated or is activated vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle despite the presence of other road users. has left the traffic circle or the intersection. # Always observe the traffic carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist System limitations Function of Adaptive Highbeam Assist Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Detection may be restricted if: Adaptive Highbeam Assist R Visibility is impaired, for example in fog, Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recog‐ heavy rain or snow. Adaptive Highbeam Assist switches automati‐ nize the following road users: cally between: R There is dirt on the sensors or the sensors R R Road users without lights, e.g. pedes‐ are obscured. Low beam trians R High beam R Road users with poor lighting, e.g. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are cyclists responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to At speeds above 19 mph (30 km/h): the prevailing light, visibility and traffic condi‐ R R If no other road users are detected, high Road users whose lighting is obstructed, tions. e.g. by a barrier beam is automatically switched on. Light and visibility 127

High beam switches off automatically: Switching the daytime running lights on/off Interior lighting R At speeds below 16 mph (25 km/h). Multimedia system: Adjusting the interior lighting R If other road users are detected. , . . ÷ Front overhead control panel R If street lighting is sufficient. At speeds above approx. 31 mph (50 km/h): # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. R The headlamp range of low beam is regulated automatically based on the distance to other Setting the surround lighting road users. Requirement: The system's optical sensor is located behind R The light switch is in the à position. the windshield near the overhead control panel. Multimedia system: Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off , . ÷ . # To switch on: turn the light switch to the à position. # 1 p Switches the front left-hand reading # Exterior switch-off delay time: the exterior Switch on the high beam using the combina‐ lighting is switched on for a short time after the lamp on/off tion switch. vehicle is switched off. # 2 | Switches the automatic interior When the high beam is switched on automat‐ lighting control on/off ically in the dark, the _ indicator lamp in # Set the switch-off delay time. the multifunction display comes on. # 3 c Switches the front interior lighting Locator lighting: if a switch-off delay time is on/off # To switch off: switch off the high beam set, the exterior lighting remains lit up for 40 # using the combination switch. seconds after the vehicle is unlocked. When you 4 u Switches the rear interior lighting start the vehicle, the locator lighting is switched on/off off and automatic driving lights are activated. 128 Light and visibility

# 5 p Switches the front right-hand read‐ Adjusting the ambient lighting # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. ing lamp on/off There are ten preset color combinations Multimedia system: available. Control panel in the grab handle (rear , . ÷ . passenger compartment) Activating multi-color animation # Select . Setting the color # # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Select . The chosen color combination varies in a pre‐ # Set the color. defined rhythm. Adjusting the brightness. Activating climate-dependent lighting # Select . # Select . # Set the brightness value. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Activating the brightness for zones The color of the ambient lighting adapts to suit the climate control setting. # # Select . 1 p Switches the reading lamp on/off Activating welcome lighting # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. The , and zones can be set # Select . separately. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. % Setting brightness zones is not available for When the vehicle is unlocked, a special inte‐ the Rear Seat Entertainment System. rior lighting sequence runs. Activating multi-color lighting # Select . Light and visibility 129

Setting the interior lighting switch-off delay Windshield wiper and windshield washer # 3 Å Intermittent wiping, frequent time system # 4 ° Continuous wiping, slow Multimedia system: Switching the windshield wiper on/off # 5 ¯ Continuous wiping, fast , . ÷ . Switching the rear window windshield wiper # Set the switch-off delay time. on/off

# 1 í Single wipe/î wipes with washer fluid # 1gWindshield wiper off # 2 Ä Intermittent wiping, normal # 1 è Switch 130 Light and visibility

# 1 b Wipes with washer fluid # As soon as the wiper arms are vertical rela‐ # Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 # 2 I Switches on intermittent wiping tive to the hood, switch off the ignition. until it engages in the removal position. # # 3 0 Switches off intermittent wiping Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. # 4 b Wipes with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades

Changing the windshield wiper blades

& WARNING Risk of becoming trapped if the windshield wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windshield wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and the ignition before changing the wiper blades.

Moving the wiper arms to a vertical position # Remove the wiper blade in the direction of arrow 4 away from the wiper arm. # Set the windshield wiper to the ° slow continuous wiping position on the combina‐ # Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the tion switch. other hand, turn the wiper blade in the direc‐ tion of arrow 1 away from the wiper arm to the stop. Light and visibility 131

Installing the wiper blades Maintenance display

# Slide catch 2 in the direction of arrow 3 until it engages in the locking position. # Insert the new wiper blade into the wiper # Remove protective film 1 of the mainte‐ arm in the direction of arrow 1. # Make sure that the wiper blade sits correctly. nance display on the tip of the newly instal‐ # Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield. led wiper blade. If the color of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced. 132 Light and visibility

% The duration of the color change varies # Fold wiper arm 4 away from the rear win‐ # Position new wiper blade 1 with recess 6 depending on the usage conditions. dow. on lug 5. # Press both release clips 2. # Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow Replacing the rear window wiper blades # Fold wiper blade 1 in the direction of arrow 3 onto the wiper arm until retaining clips 3 away from wiper arm 4. 2 engage in bracket 4. Removing the wiper blade # Remove wiper blade 1 in the direction of # Make sure that wiper blade 1 sits correctly. arrow 5. # Fold the wiper arm back onto the rear win‐ dow. Installing the wiper blades

Mirrors Operating the outside mirrors

& WARNING Risk of injury from adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion You could lose control of the vehicle in the following situations: R if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion # Switch the ignition off. R if you fasten your seat belt while the vehi‐ cle is in motion Light and visibility 133

# Before starting the engine: adjust the # Use button 2 to set the position of the mir‐ driver's seat, the head restraint, the ror you have selected. steering wheel or the mirror and fasten An outside mirror which has been pushed out of your seat belt. position can be engaged in position again in the following manner: # & WARNING Risk of accident due to mis‐ Press and hold button 1. judgment of distances when using the You will hear a click and the mirror audibly passenger mirror engage in position. The mirror is set in the correct position. The outside mirror on the front passenger side reflects objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they Automatic anti-glare mirrors appear. & WARNING Risk of burns and poisoning As a result, you may misjudge the distance due to the anti-glare mirror electrolyte between you and the road user driving behind you, for example, when changing Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an # lanes. To fold in or out: briefly press button 1. automatic anti-glare mirror breaks. # Therefore, always look over your shoul‐ % If the battery has been disconnected or com‐ The electrolyte is harmful and causes irrita‐ der in order to ensure that you are pletely discharged, the outside mirrors must tion. It must not come into contact with your aware of the actual distance between be reset. Only then will the automatic mirror skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or you and the road users driving behind folding function work properly. be swallowed. you. # To adjust: select the required mirror using # If you come into contact with electro‐ button 3 or 4. lyte, observe the following: 134 Light and visibility

R Rinse the electrolyte from your skin R The engine is switched off. Storing the parking position of the and seek medical attention immedi‐ R Reverse gear is engaged. passenger outside mirror using reverse gear ately. R Interior lighting is switched on. R If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, rinse them thor‐ Parking position of the passenger outside oughly with clean water and seek mirror medical attention immediately. R If the electrolyte is swallowed, The parking position makes parking easier. immediately rinse your mouth out The passenger outside mirror tilts downwards thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. and shows the rear wheel on the front passenger Seek medical attention immediately. side if: R Immediately change out of clothing R The parking position is stored. which has come into contact with R The passenger mirror is selected. electrolyte. R Reverse gear is engaged. R If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The passenger outside mirror moves back to its original position in the following situations: The inside rearview mirror and the outside mir‐ R If you shift the transmission to another trans‐ # To store: select the passenger outside mirror rors and on the driver's side automatically go mission position. using button 2. into anti-glare mode if light from a headlamp hits R # the inside rearview mirror. When driving faster than 9 mph (15 km/h). Engage reverse gear. R If you press the button for the outside mirror # Move the passenger outside mirror into the System limitations on the driver's side. desired parking position using button 1. The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode in the following situations: Light and visibility 135

# To call up: select the passenger outside mir‐ Operating the sun visors Infrared reflective windshield ror using button 2. # Engage reverse gear. The passenger outside mirror moves to the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function Multimedia system: , . î . # Glare from the front: fold sun visor 1 The infrared reflective windshield is coated and # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. down. prevents an excessive build-up of heat in the # Glare from the side: swing sun visor 1 to vehicle interior. the side. The coating shields the vehicle interior against # Slide sun visor 1 horizontally as required. radio waves up into the gigahertz range. # Fold down additional sun visor 2. Radio-controlled equipment, such as toll sys‐ tems, can only be mounted on areas of the wind‐ shield which are permeable to radio waves 1. Areas permeable to radio waves 1 are best visi‐ ble from outside the vehicle when the windshield is illuminated using an external light source. 136 Climate control

Overview of climate control systems 7 ¤ To switch the rear window heater Dual-zone climate control panel overview on/off 8 0 To activate or deactivate synchroniza‐ The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that tion (→ page 138) the current function is activated. 9 g To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (→ page 139) A ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off (→ page 137) B w To set the front passenger side tem‐ perature 1 w To set the driver's side temperature 2 _ To set the driver's side air distribution 3-zone automatic climate control panel over‐ view 3 H To set the airflow or switch off climate control The indicator lamps in the buttons indicate that 4 Ã To set climate control to automatic 1 w To set the driver's side temperature the current function is activated. mode (→ page 137) 2 _ To set the air distribution 5 ¬ To defrost the windshield 3 H To set the airflow or switch off climate 6 ! To call up the air conditioning menu control To switch the residual heat on or off 4 Ã To set climate control to automatic (→ page 139) mode (→ page 137) 7 ¤ To switch the rear window heater 5 ¬ To defrost the windshield on/off 6 t To call up the air conditioning menu 8 ¿ To switch the A/C function on/off (→ page 137) Climate control 137

9 g To switch air-recirculation mode on/off Operating the climate control system Activating/deactivating the A/C function using the multimedia system (→ page 139) Activating/deactivating climate control A _ To set the front passenger side air dis‐ Multimedia system: # To activate: set the airflow to level 1 or tribution , . b . B w To set the front passenger side tem‐ higher using the H button. perature # To deactivate: set the airflow to level 0 The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. using the H button. Rear operating unit # % If climate control is deactivated, the win‐ Activate O or deactivate ª the function. dows can fog up more quickly. Deactivate climate control only briefly. Setting climate control to automatic mode In automatic mode, the set temperature is con‐ Activating/deactivating the A/C function via trolled and maintained at a constant level by the the control panel air supply. The A/C function cools, heats and dehumidifies # Press the à button. the interior air in the vehicle. # To switch to manual mode: press the H # Press the ¿ button. or _ button. Deactivate the A/C function only briefly other‐ 1 To set the temperature wise the windows can fog up more quickly. 2 Display Condensation may drip from the underside of 3 To set the airflow the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not a sign that there is a malfunction. 138 Climate control

Climate style Air distribution settings Setting the temperature Climate style function The symbols in the display indicate which vents # Select . In automatic mode you can select the following the airflow is being directed through: # Set the temperature. climate style settings for the driver's and front R ¯ Defroster vents passenger areas: R P Center and side air vents Activating/deactivating the climate control R FOCUS: high airflow, slightly cooler setting R O footwell vents synchronization function via the control panel R MEDIUM: medium airflow, standard setting R S Center, side and footwell vents R DIFFUSE: low airflow, slightly warmer and R a Defroster and footwell vents Climate control can be set centrally using the draft-free setting synchronization function. The temperature and R _ All vents air distribution setting for the driver's side is Adjusting the climate mode settings R b Defroster, middle and side air vents adopted automatically for the front passenger Multimedia system: R side. , . . W Automatic air distribution b # Press the 0 button. Setting the rear climate control using the # The synchronization function is deactivated if the Select , or . multimedia system settings for one of the other climate zones are % In order to feel the effect of the climate changed. style, the à function must be active Multimedia system: (→ page 137). , . b . Setting the airflow # Select . # Set the airflow. Climate control 139

Activating/deactivating the climate control Switching air-recirculation mode on/off Activating and deactivating ionization synchronization function using the multime‐ # dia system Press the g button. Multimedia system: The interior air will be recirculated. , . b . Multimedia system: , . Air-recirculation mode is switched off automati‐ b cally. Ionization cleans and refreshes the interior air of . % If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the the vehicle. The ionization of the interior air is Climate control can be set centrally using the windows may fog up more quickly. Switch on odorless. synchronization function. The temperature set‐ air-recirculation mode only briefly. # Switch the function on O or off ª. ting is automatically adopted for all climate zones. Switching the residual heat on or off Perfume atomizer # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Requirement: Setting the fragrance system R The vehicle is parked. Defrosting the windows Requirements: It is possible to make use of the residual heat R Automatic climate control is activated. Windows fogged up on the inside from the engine to continue heating or ventilat‐ R The glove box is closed. # Press the à button. ing the front compartment of the vehicle for # If the windows continue to fog up: press the approximately 30 minutes. Multimedia system: , . . ¬ button. # To switch on: press the ! button. b Windows fogged up on the outside Residual heat is switched off automatically. The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fra‐ # Switch on the windshield wiper. grance throughout the vehicle interior from a fla‐ # Press the à button. con located in the glove box. 140 Climate control

# To set the intensity: select , , + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental or . damage due to improper disposal of full Inserting or removing the flacon of the fra‐ flacons grance system

& WARNING Risk of injury from liquid per‐ fume Full flacons must not be disposed If children open the flacon, they could drink of with household waste. the liquid perfume or it could come into con‐ # tact with their eyes. # Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point. # If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. 1 Cap # If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. 2 Flacon # To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. # To remove: pull out the flacon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Climate control 141

Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior Air vents perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill Adjusting the front air vents it. Refillable flacon & WARNING ‑ Danger of burns or frostbite # Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. due to being too close to the air vents # Fill the flacon with a maximum of 0.5 fl. oz. Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air (15 ml). vents. # Screw the cap back on to the flacon. This could result in burns or frostbite in the immediate vicinity of the air vents. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the # Make sure that all vehicle occupants # To open or close: turn controller 2 to the same perfume. Observe the separate informa‐ always maintain a sufficient distance to left or right as far as it will go. tion sheet attached to the flacon. the air vents. # To adjust the air direction: hold air vent 1 # If necessary, direct the airflow to in the center and move it up or down or to Information on the windshield heater another area of the vehicle interior. the left or right. The windshield heater is switched on automati‐ cally: R If the ¬ button is activated. After the vehicle is started the windshield heater is switched on automatically as needed. 142 Climate control

Adjusting the rear air vents # Close the air vent when you heat the vehicle. # At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and switch on the A/C func‐ tion.

Requirement: R Automatic climate control is activated.

# To open or close: turn controller 2 to the left or right as far as it will go. # To adjust the air direction: hold rear air vent 1 in the center and move it up or down or to the left or right. 1 Air vent controller 2 Air vent Opening/closing the air vent in the glove box # To open or close: turn controller 1 to the * NOTE Damage to temperature-sensitive left or right. objects in the glove box Temperature-sensitive objects stored in the glove box may be damaged by the air vent located inside it. Driving and parking 143

Driving R Operate vehicle equipment # Never leave the engine running in an Notes on Mercedes-AMG vehicles enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ In addition, the children could also set the lation. Be sure to observe the notes on the following vehicle in motion, for example, by: topics in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may R Releasing the parking brake & WARNING Risk of fire caused by flam‐ not recognize dangers. R Shifting the transmission out of park mable material on the exhaust system R RACE START position j R Flammable materials brought in by either ani‐ DRIFT MODE R Starting the engine. mals or environmental influences may ignite R AMG adaptive sport suspension system # Never leave children and animals unat‐ if they come into contact with hot parts of tended in the vehicle. the engine or exhaust system. Switching on the power supply or ignition # When leaving the vehicle, always take # Therefore, check regularly that there using the start/stop button the SmartKey with you and lock the are no flammable materials in the vehicle. engine compartment or on the exhaust & system. WARNING Risk of accident and injury # Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of due to children left unattended in the children. vehicle Requirements R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and If children are left unattended in the vehicle, & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning the SmartKey battery is not discharged. they could: Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust R Open doors, thereby endangering other gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling persons or road users these exhaust gases causes poisoning. R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic 144 Driving and parking

R You press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) # Depress the brake pedal and push button 1 twice. (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. # To switch on the ignition: press button 1 # If the vehicle does not start: switch off non- (USA) or 2 (Canada) twice. essential consumers and press button 1 The indicator lamps in the instrument cluster (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. light up. # If the vehicle still does not start and the The ignition is switched off again if one of the following conditions is met: display message also R appears in the multifunction display: start You do not start the vehicle within the vehicle in emergency operation mode. 15 minutes. R You press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) You can switch off the engine while driving by once. pressing button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) for about three seconds. Be sure to observe the safety notes under "Driving instructions". Starting the vehicle # To switch on the power supply: press but‐ Starting the vehicle via Remote Online serv‐ Starting the vehicle with the start/stop but‐ ices ton 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. ton You can activate the windshield wiper, for Cooling or heating the vehicle interior before example. Requirements starting the journey R The SmartKey is located in the vehicle and The power supply is switched off again if the fol‐ the SmartKey battery is not discharged. If you start the vehicle via your smartphone, the lowing conditions are met: previously selected air conditioning adjustment R The driver's door is open. # Shift the transmission to position j or i. is active. Driving and parking 145

Before starting, make sure: R The panic alarm is not armed. Starting the vehicle in emergency operation R The legal stipulations in the area where your R The hazard warning lights are switched off. mode If the vehicle cannot be started, the vehicle is parked permit engine starting via R The engine hood is closed. smartphone. R The doors are closed and locked. display message appears in the multifunction R It is safe to start and run the engine where R display. your vehicle is parked. The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. R The fuel tank is sufficiently filled. # Start the vehicle using the smartphone: R R The starter battery has sufficient charge. After every vehicle start, the engine runs for ten minutes. Starting the vehicle using a smartphone R You can carry out a maximum of two consec‐ utive starting attempts. & WARNING Risk of crushing or entrap‐ R ment due to unintentional starting of the You can stop the vehicle again at any time. engine R Further information can be found in the smartphone app. Limbs could be crushed or trapped if the engine is started unintentionally during Securing the engine against starting before service or maintenance work. carrying out maintenance or repair work: # Make sure that marked space 2 is empty. # Always secure the engine against unin‐ # Switch on the hazard warning lights. # Remove SmartKey 1 from the ring. tentional starting before carrying out or # Place SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. maintenance or repair work. # Unlock the doors. The vehicle will start after a short while. If you remove SmartKey 1 from marked Requirements: or space 2 the engine continues running. For R j # Open a side window or the sliding sunroof. Park position is selected. further vehicle starts however, SmartKey 1 R The anti-theft alarm system is not armed. 146 Driving and parking

must be located in marked space 2 during R Move up a gear before the tachometer nee‐ R Brake linings, brake discs and tires that are the entire journey. dle is Ô of the way to the red area of the either new or have been re placed only ach‐ # Have SmartKey 1 checked at a qualified tachometer. ieve optimum braking effect and grip after specialist workshop. R Do not shift down a gear manually in order to several hundred kilometers of driving. Com‐ brake. pensate for the reduced braking effect by If the vehicle does not start: R applying greater force to the brake pedal. # Avoid overstraining the vehicle, e.g. driving at Leave SmartKey 1 in marked space 2. full throttle. # Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle R Do not depress the accelerator pedal past Notes on driving using the start/stop button. the pressure point (kickdown). & WARNING Risk of accident due to % You can also switch on the power supply or R Only increase the engine speed gradually and objects in the driver's footwell the ignition with the start/stop button. accelerate the vehicle to full speed after 1,000 miles (1,500 km). Objects in the driver's footwell may impede Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This also applies when the engine or parts of the This jeopardizes the operating and road Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you drivetrain have been replaced. safety of the vehicle. read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ Please also observe the following breaking-in # Stow all objects in the vehicle securely wise, you may fail to recognize dangers. notes: so that they cannot get into the driver's To preserve the engine during the first R In certain driving and driving safety systems, footwell. 1,000 miles (1,500 km): the sensors adjust automatically while a cer‐ # Ensure floor mats and carpets cannot R tain distance is being driven after the vehicle Drive at varying road speeds and engine slip and provide sufficient room for the has been delivered or after repairs. Full sys‐ speeds. pedals. R Drive in drive program C or E. tem effectiveness is not achieved until the end of this teach-in process. # Do not lay multiple floor mats or car‐ pets on top of one another. Driving and parking 147

& WARNING Risk of accident due to # Do not switch off the ignition whilst the & DANGER Risk of fatal injury due to poi‐ unsuitable footwear vehicle is in motion. sonous exhaust gases Operation of the pedals may be restricted If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient ventila‐ due to unsuitable footwear such as: & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning tion is not possible, poisonous exhaust gases R Shoes with platform soles Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust such as carbon monoxide may enter the vehi‐ cle. This is the case if the vehicle gets stuck R Shoes with high heels gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases causes poisoning. in snow, for example. R Slippers # Never leave the engine running in an # Keep the tailpipe and the area around # When driving always wear suitable enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ the vehicle free from snow when the shoes in order to be able to operate the lation. engine or the stationary heater are run‐ pedals safely. ning. & WARNING Risk of skidding and of an # Open a window on the windward side of & WARNING Risk of accident due to the accident due to shifting down on slippery the vehicle to ensure an adequate sup‐ ignition being switched off whilst the road surfaces ply of fresh air. vehicle is in motion If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to & If you switch off the ignition whilst the vehi‐ increase the engine braking effect, the drive WARNING Risk of accident and injury cle is in motion safety-relevant functions will wheels may lose traction. due to being under the influence of alco‐ hol and drugs while driving be restricted or no longer available. This may # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ effect the power steering system and brake faces to increase the engine braking Driving when under the influence of alcohol force boosting, for example. effect. and/or drugs is an extremely dangerous You will need to use considerably more force combination. Even small quantities of alcohol to steer and brake. or drugs may affect your reflexes, perception and judgment. 148 Driving and parking

The probability of a serious or even fatal acci‐ * NOTE Wearing out the brake linings by Non-combusted fuel may get into the cata‐ dent greatly increases if you drive when continuously depressing the brake pedal lytic converter. under the influence of alcohol or drugs. # # Do not depress the brake pedal contin‐ Only depress the accelerator pedal # Do not drink alcohol or take drugs while uously whilst driving. slightly. driving, and do not allow anyone to # # To use the braking effect of the engine, Have the cause rectified immediately at drive who has been drinking alcohol or a qualified specialist workshop. taking drugs. shift to a lower gear in good time. Limited braking effect on salt-treated roads: * & WARNING Risk of accident due to the NOTE Damage to the drivetrain and the R engine when pulling away due to salt build-up on the brake discs and brake system overheating brake lining, the braking distance can If you leave your foot on the brake pedal # Do not warm up the engine when the increase considerably or result in braking when driving, the brake system may over‐ vehicle is stationary. Pull away immedi‐ only on one side. heat. ately. R maintain a much greater distance to the vehi‐ This increases the braking distance and the # Avoid high engine speeds and driving at cle in front. brake system may even fail. full throttle until the engine has reached operating temperature. To prevent salt build-up: # Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. R # Do not allow the wheels to spin. brake occasionally while paying attention to # Do not depress the brake pedal and the the traffic conditions. accelerator pedal at the same time R carefully depress the brake pedal at the end while driving. * NOTE Damage to the catalytic converter due to non-combusted fuel of the journey and when starting the next journey. The engine is not running smoothly and is misfiring. Driving and parking 149

ECO start/stop function R An automatic engine start is necessary. Deactivating or activating the ECO start/ stop function Operation of the ECO start/stop function If the engine was switched off by the ECO start/ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you stop function and you leave the vehicle, a warn‐ read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ ing tone sounds. The wise, you may fail to recognize dangers. display message The engine is automatically switched off if the also appears in the multifunction display. If you following conditions are met: do not switch off the ignition, the ignition is automatically switched off after one minute. R If you brake the vehicle to a standstill in transmission position h or i. R If all vehicle conditions for an automatic engine stop are met. The è symbol appears in the multifunction display when the vehicle is stationary. The engine is restarted automatically if: R You release the brake pedal with the trans‐ mission in position h when the HOLD func‐ tion is not active. # Press button 1. R You shift from transmission position j. If indicator lamp 2 lights up, the ECO start/ stop function is switched on. R You engage transmission position h or k. % Depending on the model, the button may R You depress the accelerator pedal. also be located at a different position in the R You change the vehicle level. center console. 150 Driving and parking

ECO display R 2 Gentle deceleration and rolling DYNAMIC SELECT switch The ECO display summarizes the driving style R 3 Consistent speed Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT switch from the start of the journey to its completion The inner segment is gray and the outer seg‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you and assists you in achieving the most economi‐ ment empties: cal driving style. read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ R 1 Sporty acceleration wise, you may not recognize dangers. You can influence consumption if you: R 2 Heavy braking Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to change R Drive with particular care R 3 Fluctuations in speed between the following drive programs: R Drive the vehicle in drive program E R I (Individual): individual settings You have driven economically when: R Observe the gearshift recommendations R S+ (Sport Plus): particularly sporty driving R The three outer segments are completely fil‐ style led simultaneously. R S (Sport): sporty driving style R The ECO display border lights up. R C (Comfort): comfortable and economical The additional range achieved as a result of your driving style driving style in comparison to a driver with a R E (Eco): particularly economical driving style very sporty driving style is shown under . The range displayed does not indicate a Depending on the drive program selected the fol‐ fixed reduction in consumption. lowing vehicle characteristics will change: R Drive system The inner segment lights up green and the outer - Engine and transmission management segment fills up: - Active Distance Assistant DISTRONIC R 1 Moderate acceleration R ESP® Driving and parking 151

R Suspension Configuring drive program I R sea level R Steering Multimedia system: R fuel grade , . e R outside temperature Selecting the drive program . # Select the individual setting. Automatic transmission DIRECT SELECT selector lever Displaying vehicle data Function of the DIRECT SELECT lever Multimedia system: & , . e WARNING Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the # Select . vehicle If children are left unattended in the vehicle, Displaying engine data they could: Multimedia system: R Open doors, thereby endangering other , . e persons or road users # Select . R Get out of the vehicle and be hit by oncoming traffic % The values for engine output and engine tor‐ que may deviate from the nominal values. R Operate vehicle equipment # Press DYNAMIC SELECT switch 1 forwards Items that can influence this are, for exam‐ or backwards. ple: The drive program selected appears in the multifunction display. R engine speed 152 Driving and parking

In addition, the children could also set the pedal firmly and do not accelerate at i Neutral vehicle in motion, for example, by: the same time. h Drive position R Releasing the parking brake Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the trans‐ Engaging reverse gear R R # Shifting the transmission out of park mission position. The current transmission posi‐ Depress the brake pedal and push the position j tion is displayed in the multifunction display. DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point R Starting the engine. of resistance. The transmission position display shows k # Never leave children and animals unat‐ in the multifunction display. tended in the vehicle. Shifting to neutral N # When leaving the vehicle, always take # Depress the brake pedal and push the the SmartKey with you and lock the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first vehicle. point of resistance. # Keep the SmartKey out of the reach of The transmission position display shows i children. in the multifunction display.

& Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push rect gearshifting it or tow it away. If the engine speed is higher than the idle If you want the automatic transmission to speed and you engage the transmission posi‐ remain in neutral N even if the ignition is tion h or k, the vehicle may accelerate switched off: sharply. j # Start the vehicle. # If you engage the transmission position Park position h or k always depress the brake k Reverse gear Driving and parking 153

# Depress the brake pedal and shift to neutral # Press button 1. Manual gearshifting i. The transmission position display shows j & # Release the brake pedal. in the multifunction display. WARNING Risk of skidding and of an accident due to shifting down on slippery # Switch the ignition off. Park position j is engaged automatically if one of the following conditions is met: road surfaces % If you then exit the vehicle leaving the SmartKey in the vehicle, the automatic trans‐ R If you switch the engine off with the trans‐ If you shift down on slippery road surfaces to mission remains in neutral i mission in position h or k. increase the engine braking effect, the drive R If you open the driver's door when the vehi‐ wheels may lose traction. Engaging park position P cle is stationary or when driving at a very low # Do not shift down on slippery road sur‐ speed and the transmission is in position h faces to increase the engine braking or k. effect. Engaging drive position D # Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. The transmission position display shows h in the multifunction display. When the automatic transmission is in transmis‐ sion position h, it shifts the gears automati‐ cally. This depends on the following factors: R The selected drive program R The position of the accelerator pedal R The road speed 154 Driving and parking

# To activate: pull steering wheel gearshift Shift recommendation Using kickdown paddle or . 1 2 Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you Manual gearshifting is activated for a short read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ time. The current gear is displayed in the wise, you may not recognize dangers. wise, you may not recognize dangers. multifunction display. The gearshift recommendations assist you in # Maximum acceleration: depress the accel‐ # To shift up: pull steering wheel gearshift adopting an economical driving style. erator pedal beyond the pressure point. paddle 2. # To shift down: pull steering wheel gearshift During kickdown, you cannot shift gears using paddle 1. the steering wheel gearshift paddles. The auto‐ # To deactivate: pull steering wheel gearshift matic transmission shifts up to the next gear paddle 2 and hold it in place. when the maximum engine speed is reached to The transmission position protect the engine from overrevving. h appears in the multifunction display. # Ease off the accelerator pedal once the % If you select the Manual drive setting in desired speed is reached. drive program I, manual gearshifting is per‐ manently activated. Glide mode function Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you # If gearshift recommendation message 1 is Mercedes-AMG vehicles: make sure that you read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ shown in the multifunction display, shift to read the separate operating instructions. Other‐ wise, you may not recognize dangers. the recommended gear. wise, you may not recognize dangers. With an anticipatory driving style, glide mode helps you to reduce fuel consumption. Driving and parking 155

Glide mode is characterized by the following: Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, Refueling Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active R The combustion engine is disconnected from Refueling the vehicle the drivetrain and the vehicle continues to Brake Assist: Glide mode is also deactivated depending on the traffic situation and the vehi‐ roll in neutral. & WARNING Risk of fire and explosion R cle then switches to overrun mode. This further The transmission position h is displayed in reduces fuel consumption. caused by fuel green in the multifunction display. Glide mode can also be prevented by the follow‐ Fuels are highly inflammable. Glide mode is activated if the following condi‐ ing parameters: # You must avoid fire, open flames, creat‐ tions are met: R Uphill gradient ing sparks and smoking. R Drive program E is selected. R Downhill gradient # Before refueling, switch off the engine R and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta‐ The speed is within a suitable range. R Temperature R tionary heater. The course of the road is suitable, e.g. no R Height steep uphill or downhill gradients or tight bends. R Speed & WARNING Risk of injury from fuel R R You are no longer depressing the accelerator Obstacle detection Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your or brake pedal. R Operating condition of the engine health % Glide mode can also be activated if you have # Do not swallow fuel or let it come into selected the "Eco" setting for the drive contact with skin, eyes or clothing. (engine management) when in drive program # Do not inhale fuel vapors. I. # Keep children away from fuel. Glide mode is deactivated again if one of the conditions is no longer met. If you or other people come into contact with fuel, observe the following: 156 Driving and parking

# Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with * NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel R Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30, soap and water. M85, M100) Fuel that does not conform to the required # R If fuel comes into contact with your quality can lead to increased wear as well as Gasoline with additives containing metal eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ damage to the engine and exhaust system. oughly with clean water. Seek medical If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: # attention immediately. Only use the fuel recommended. # Do not switch the ignition on. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel ing. Vehicles with a gasoline engine: * NOTE Do not use diesel to refuel vehi‐ # Change immediately out of clothing that Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could cles with a gasoline engine. has come into contact with fuel. result in damage to the fuel system, the If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: engine and the emission control system. & R Do not switch on the ignition. Otherwise, WARNING Risk of explosion or fire due # Only refuel with low-sulfur premium fuel can enter the fuel system. to electrostatic charge grade fuel. Even small amounts of the wrong fuel Electrostatic charge can cause sparks and could result in damage to the fuel system thereby ignite fuel vapors. This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. and the engine. The repair costs are high. # Always touch the metal vehicle body # before opening the fuel filler cap or Do not refuel using: Contact a qualified specialist workshop. touching the pump nozzle. R Diesel # Have the fuel tank and fuel lines R drained completely. This discharges any electrostatic charge that E15, E85, E100 may have built up. Driving and parking 157

# * NOTE Damage to the fuel system caused Insert the fuel filler cap into holder 2. by overfilled fuel tanks. # Completely insert the fuel pump nozzle into the tank filler neck, hook in place and refuel. # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump nozzle switches off. # Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. * NOTE Fuel may spray out when you remove the fuel pump nozzle. Parking # Only fill the fuel tank until the pump Switching off the vehicle nozzle switches off. & WARNING Risk of fire caused by hot Requirement: exhaust system parts R The vehicle must be unlocked. Flammable material such as leaves, grass or % Do not get into the vehicle again during the twigs may ignite if they come into contact refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic with hot parts of the exhaust system or charge could build up again. 1 Fuel filler flap exhaust gas flow. Observe the notes on operating fluids 2 Bracket for the fuel filler cap # Park the vehicle so that no flammable (→ page 394). 3 Tire pressure table material can come into contact with hot 4 QR code for rescue card vehicle components. 5 Fuel type # In particular, do not park on dry grass‐ land or harvested grain fields. # Press fuel filler flap 1. # Turn the fuel filler cap counter-clockwise and remove it. 158 Driving and parking

# & WARNING Risk of accident and injury * NOTE Damage to the vehicle or the driv‐ Apply the electric parking brake. due to children left unattended in the etrain caused by the vehicle rolling away # Press button 1 (USA) or 2 (Canada) once. vehicle % # Always properly secure the vehicle When you switch off the vehicle, you can still If you leave children unaccompanied in the against rolling away. operate the side windows and the panoramic vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in sliding sunroof for five minutes. motion, for example by: R Releasing the parking brake. Garage door opener R Shifting the transmission out of park Programming buttons for the garage door position j. opener R Starting the engine. & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ ment. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust # gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Never leave children and animals unat‐ these exhaust gases causes poisoning. tended in the vehicle. # # Never leave the engine running in an When leaving the vehicle, always take enclosed space without sufficient venti‐ the SmartKey with you and lock the lation. vehicle.

# On uphill or downhill inclines, turn the front wheels towards the curb. # Select transmission position j. Driving and parking 159

# & WARNING Risk of injury and entrapment Press and hold button 1, 2 or 3 that you when opening the garage door using the wish to program. garage door opener Indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow. When you operate or program the garage % It can take up to 20 seconds before the indi‐ door with the integrated garage door opener, cator lamp flashes yellow. persons in the range of movement of the # Release the previously pressed button. garage door can become trapped or struck Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. by the garage door. # Point remote control 5 at a distance of 1 in # When using the integrated garage door (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) towards buttons 1, 2 opener, always make sure that nobody or 3. is within the sweep of the garage door. # Press and hold button 6 of remote control 5 until: Only operate the garage door opener on the fol‐ R Indicator lamp 4 lights up green contin‐ lowing garage doors: uously. Programming is complete. R Garage doors with a safety stop and revers‐ # R Indicator lamp 4 flashes green. Pro‐ ing feature. Check if the transmitter frequency of the remote control has the frequency range of gramming was successful. Additionally, R Garage doors which conform to the current 280 to 868 MHz. synchronization of the rolling code with U.S. safety standards. the garage door system must also take Radio equipment approval number: place. Prior to programming a garage door opener, park R NZLMUAHL5 (USA) the vehicle outside the garage and switch off the # If indicator lamp 4 does not light up or flash R engine. 4112A-MUAHL5 (Canada) green: repeat the procedure. # Release all of the buttons. 160 Driving and parking

% The remote control for the garage door drive % Please also read the operating instructions is not included in the scope of delivery of the for the garage door drive. garage door opener. Troubleshooting when programming the Synchronizing the rolling code remote control Requirements: R The garage door system uses a rolling code. R The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or exterior gate drive. R The vehicle as well as persons and objects, are located outside the sweep of the garage door.

# Check if the transmitter frequency of remote # Press the programming button on the door control is supported. drive unit. 5 Initiate the next step within approximately # Replace the batteries in remote control 5. 30 seconds. # Hold remote control 5 at various angles at # Press previously programmed button 1, 2 a distance between 1 in (1 cm) to 3 in (8 cm) or 3 repeatedly, until the door closes. in front of the inside rear view mirror. You When the door closes, programming is com‐ should test every position for at least 25 sec‐ pleted. onds before trying another position. Driving and parking 161

# Hold remote control 5 at the same angles Clearing the garage door opener memory at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. # Note that some remote controls transmit only for a limited period, press button 6 on remote control 5 again before transmission ends. # Align the antenna line of the garage door opener unit with the remote control. % Support and additional information on pro‐ gramming: R On the toll free HomeLink® Hotline on 1-800-355-3515. # Press and hold buttons 1, 2 or 3 until R On the Internet at http:// the garage door opens or closes. www.homelink.com/mercedes. # Press and hold buttons 1 and 3. # If indicator lamp 4 flashes yellow after Indicator lamp lights up yellow. Opening/closing the garage door 4 approximately 20 seconds: press and hold # the previously pressed button again until the If indicator lamp 4 flashes green: release Requirement: buttons 1 and 3. R The corresponding button is programmed to garage door opens or closes. operate the garage door. 162 Driving and parking

Radio equipment approval numbers for the Country Radio equipment approval CountryRadio equipment approval garage door opener number number Radio equipment approval numbers Liechten‐ CE South CountryRadio equipment approval stein Africa number Mexico RCPGEMU15-0448 EgyptTAC.2511151293.WIR Monaco CE TA-2015/1386 Andorra CE New Zea‐ R-NZ Turkey not required Australia R-NZ land United ER41849/15 Barbados MED1578 NorwayCE Arab Emi‐ Dealer No: DA35176/14 rates Chile 2488/DFRS20576/F-74 Russian not required Federa‐ United FCC ID: NZLMUAHL5 European CE tion States Union Saudi Ara‐ TA 10525 GibraltarCE bia Iceland CE Switzer‐ CE Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/299 land CanadaIC: 4112A-MUAHL5 Kuwait CE Driving and parking 163

Brazil Electric parking brake The electric parking brake is applied if the trans‐ mission is in position j and one of the follow‐ Automatically applying the electric parking ing conditions is fulfilled: brake R The engine is switched off. & WARNING Risk of accident and injury R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the due to children left unattended in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the vehicle driver's door is opened. If you leave children unaccompanied in the % To prevent application: pull the handle of the vehicle, they may be able to set the vehicle in electric parking brake. motion, for example by: In the following situations, the electric parking R Releasing the parking brake. brake is also engaged: Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, R isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interfer‐ Shifting the transmission out of park R The Active Distance Assistant DISTRONIC ência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo position j. brings the vehicle to a standstill. tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas R Starting the engine. R The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle sta‐ operando em caráter primário. In addition, they may operate vehicle equip‐ tionary. Para maiores informações acessar ment. R Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle www.anatel.gov.br # Never leave children and animals unat‐ stationary. Further information on the declaration of con‐ tended in the vehicle. This is only the case if one of the following con‐ formity for wireless vehicle components # When leaving the vehicle, always take ditions is also fulfilled: (→ page 23). the SmartKey with you and lock the R The engine is switched off. vehicle. 164 Driving and parking

R The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the shift from transmission position j to h or Applying or releasing the electric parking seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the k. brake manually driver's door is opened. R If the transmission is in position k, the R There is a system malfunction. trunk lid must be closed. R The power supply is insufficient. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the R The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, the follow‐ ing conditions must be fulfilled: When the electric parking brake is applied, the F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator lamp R The driver's door is closed. lights up in the instrument cluster. R You move the transmission out of transmis‐ The electric parking brake is not automatically sion position j or you have previously applied if the engine is switched off by the ECO driven faster than 2 mph (3 km/h). start/stop function. R If the transmission is in position k, the trunk lid must be closed. Releasing the electric parking brake auto‐ matically If the electric parking brake is released, the The electric parking brake is released when the F (USA) or ! (CANADA) indicator lamp in following conditions are fulfilled: the instrument cluster goes out. R The engine is running. # To apply: push handle 1. F ! R The (USA) or (Canada) indicator The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat lamp appears in the instrument cluster. belt buckle of the driver's seat. # To release: switch on the ignition. R The transmission is in position h or k and you depress the accelerator pedal or you Driving and parking 165

# Pull handle 1. Standby mode (extension of the starter bat‐ guaranteed that the starter battery will reliably The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indicator tery's period out of use) start the engine. lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. Standby mode function The starter battery must be charged first in the Emergency braking If standby mode is activated, the vehicle can be following situations: # Press and hold handle 1. parked for an extended period of time without R the vehicle's period out of use must be When the vehicle has been braked to a losing power. extended. standstill: Standby mode is characterized by the following: R the R The electric parking brake is applied. R the starter battery is preserved. message appears in the multimedia system display. R The F (USA) or ! (Canada) indica‐ R the maximum period out of use is displayed tor lamp appears in the instrument clus‐ in the multimedia system display. % Standby mode is automatically deactivated ter. R functions such as interior protection or tow- when the ignition is switched on. away protection are not available. Activating or deactivating standby mode Notes on parking the vehicle for an extended R the connection to online services is interrup‐ Multimedia system: period ted. , . î If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than If the following conditions are fulfilled, standby . four weeks, the battery may become damaged. mode can be activated or deactivated using the # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six multimedia system: When you activate the function, a prompt weeks, it may suffer damage as a result of lack R the engine is switched off. appears. of use. R the ignition is switched on. # Select . % Further information can be obtained at a Standby mode is activated. qualified specialist workshop. Exceeding the vehicle's displayed period out of use may cause inconvenience, i.e. it cannot be 166 Driving and parking

Driving and driving safety systems the event of associated damage, which may not R EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) be visible, to the bumpers or radiator grille, have (→ page 170) Driving systems and your responsibility the function of the radar sensors checked at a R ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) qualified specialist workshop. The driver assis‐ Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems (→ page 167) which assist you in driving, parking and maneu‐ tance system may no longer work properly. R vering the vehicle. The driving systems are aids HOLD function (→ page 186) R and do not relieve you of your responsibility. Pay Overview of driving systems and driving STEER CONTROL (→ page 170) attention to the traffic conditions at all times safety systems R Active Steering Assist (→ page 183) and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the R limitations regarding the safe use of these sys‐ In this section, you will find information about Active Parking Assist (→ page 199) tems. the following driving systems and driving safety R Parking Assist PARKTRONIC(→ page 190) systems: R Rear view camera (→ page 194) Function of the radar sensors R 360° Camera (→ page 196) R Cruise control (→ page 175) R ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) R Some driving and driving safety systems use Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist (→ page 166) radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, (→ page 208) behind or next to the vehicle (depending on the R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC R Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 206) vehicle's equipment). (→ page 177) R Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the radar AIR BODY CONTROL(→ page 187) Functions of ABS (anti-lock braking system) sensors are integrated behind the bumpers R Active Brake Assist (→ page 170) ABS regulates the brake pressure in critical driv‐ and/or behind the radiator grill. Keep these R Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 211) parts free of dirt, ice and slush (→ page 336). ing situations: The sensors must not be covered, for example R ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 205) R During braking, e.g. at maximum full-stop by bicycle racks, overhanging loads or radar- R BAS(Brake Assist System) (→ page 167) braking or insufficient traction of the tires, reflecting stickers. Following an impact and in R DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL (→ page 187) the wheels are prevented from blocking. Driving and parking 167

® R Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. # Depress the brake pedal with full force Functions of ESP (Electronic Stability Pro‐ gram) If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake & ® pedal can be an indication of hazardous road WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP is conditions and can serve as a reminder to take BAS supports your emergency braking situation malfunctioning with additional brake force. extra care while driving. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS is out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other System limitations activated: R ABS is active from speeds of approx. 5 mph driving safety systems are switched off. (8 km/h). R BAS automatically boosts the brake pres‐ # Drive on carefully. sure. R ABS may be impaired or may not function if a # Have ESP® checked at a qualified spe‐ R malfunction has occurred and the yel‐ BAS can shorten the braking distance. cialist workshop. low ! ABS warning lamp lights up contin‐ R ABS prevents the wheels from locking. uously in the instrument cluster after the & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is engine is started. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. deactivated ® ® Function of BAS (Brake Assist System) If you deactivate ESP , ESP cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by # ESP® should only be deactivated in the a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist Sys‐ following situations. tem) ESP® monitors and improves driving stability and If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance traction, particularly in the following situations: in an emergency braking situation is increased. R When pulling away on wet or slippery roads. 168 Driving and parking

R When braking. R Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System) R In strong sidewinds when you are driving is necessary. ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). R Adapt your driving style to suit the current ETS/4ETS can improve the vehicle's traction by road and weather conditions. intervening in the following ways: ESP® can stabilize the vehicle by intervening in the following ways: Deactivate ESP® in the following situations to R The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. R One or more wheels are braked. improve traction: R R R when using snow chains More drive torque is transferred to the wheel The engine output is adapted according to or wheels with traction. the situation. R in deep snow R Influence of drive programs on ESP® ESP® is deactivated if the ESP® OFF å warn‐ on sand or gravel The drive programs enable ESP® to adapt to dif‐ ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument % Spinning the wheels results in a cutting ferent weather and road conditions as well as cluster: action which provides better grip. the driver's preferred driving style. You can R Driving stability will no longer be improved. ESP® is deactivated if the å ESP® OFF warn‐ select the drive programs using the DYNAMIC R Crosswind Assist is no longer active. ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument SELECT switch. R The drive wheels could spin. cluster. R ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. If the ESP® ÷ warning lamp lights up continu‐ ously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunction. % Even when ESP® is deactivated, you are still ® Observe any information which may be displayed assisted by ESP when braking. in the instrument cluster: ® ® ESP is intervening if the ESP ÷ warning R Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 449) lamp flashes in the instrument cluster: R Display messages (→ page 402) R Do not deactivate ESP®. Driving and parking 169

ESP® characteristics per drive program

Drive program ESP® mode Characteristics

C (Comfort) ESP® Comfort These drive programs provide the ideal balance E (Economy) between traction and stability. Select drive program E or C in difficult road con‐ ditions, such as in snow or ice, or when the road is wet from rain. S (Sport) ESP® Sport This drive program continues to offer stability but with a sporty setup which allows the enthu‐ siastic driver a more active driving style. Only select drive program S in good road condi‐ tions, for example on dry road and clear stretches of road. S+ (Sport Plus) ESP® Sport Plus The vehicle's own understeering and oversteer‐ ing characteristics are accentuated. This allows a more active driving style to be adopted. Only select drive program S+ in good road con‐ ditions, for example on dry road and clear stretches of road. 170 Driving and parking

Activating/deactivating ESP® (Electronic Sta‐ 125 mph (200 km/h) when driving straight R The vehicle starts to skid. bility Program) ahead or cornering slightly. System limitations R Multimedia system: The vehicle is stabilized by means of individ‐ ual brake application on one side. STEER CONTROL may be impaired or may not , . k . function in the following situations: Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: always observe the R ® Function of EBD (electronic brake force dis‐ ESP is deactivated. notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may tribution) R ESP® is malfunctioning. not recognize dangers. R The steering is malfunctioning. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. EBD is characterized by the following: R ® ® ® Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure If ESP is malfunctioning, you will be assisted ESP is deactivated if the å ESP OFF warn‐ on the rear wheels. further by the electric power steering. ing lamp lights up continuously in the instrument R cluster. Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends. Observe the information on warning lamps and Function of Active Brake Assist display messages which may be shown in the Active Brake Assist consists of: Function of STEER CONTROL instrument cluster. R Distance warning function STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a R Autonomous braking function Functions of ESP® Crosswind Assist noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization. R Situation-dependent braking assistance ® ESP Crosswind Assist detects sudden gusts of This steering recommendation is given particu‐ R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ side wind and helps the driver to keep the vehi‐ larly in the following situations: age: Evasive Steering Assist cle in the lane: R R ® Both right wheels or both left wheels are on Active Brake Assist can help you to minimize the ESP Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle a wet or slippery road surface when you risk of a collision with vehicles or pedestrians or speeds between 50 mph (80 km/h) and brake. to reduce the effects of such a collision. Driving and parking 171

If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of colli‐ & WARNING Risk of an accident caused by Also observe the system limitations of Active sion, you will be warned visually and acousti‐ limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist. cally. Brake Assist The individual subfunctions are available in If you do not react to the visual or acoustic warn‐ Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly the following speed ranges: ing, autonomous braking can be initiated in criti‐ Distance warning function cal situations. identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ tions. The distance warning function issues a warning In especially critical situations, Active Brake In such cases, Active Brake Assist might: at speeds: Assist can initiate autonomous braking directly. R In this case, the visual and acoustic warning R Give a warning or brake without reason From approximately 4 mph (7 km/h), if your vehicle is critically close to a vehicle or occurs simultaneously with the braking applica‐ R Not give a warning or not brake tion. pedestrian. An intermittent warning tone # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ sounds and the · distance warning lamp If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situa‐ fic situation; do not rely on Active Brake lights up in the instrument cluster. tion or apply the brake during autonomous brak‐ Assist alone. Active Brake Assist is only Brake immediately or take evasive action, provi‐ ing, situation-dependent braking assistance an aid. The driver is responsible for occurs. If necessary, this increases the brake ded it is safe to do so and the traffic situation maintaining a suitable distance to the allows this. pressure up to full brake application. vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for If the autonomous braking function or the situa‐ braking in good time. tion-dependent braking assistance is triggered, # Be prepared to brake or swerve if nec‐ additional preventive measures for occupant essary. protection (PRE-SAFE®) may also be initiated, if the vehicle is equipped with these. 172 Driving and parking

The distance warning function can aid you in the following situations with an intermittent warning tone and a warning lamp:

Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐ front trians Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 50 mph no reaction up to approx. 37 mph no reaction ing Assistance pack‐ (250 km/h) (80 km/h) (60 km/h) age Vehicles with Driving up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph Assistance package (250 km/h) (100 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h)

Autonomous braking function The autonomous braking function may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐ front trians Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. 124 mph up to approx. 31 mph no reaction up to approx. 37 mph no reaction ing Assistance pack‐ (200 km/h) (50 km/h) (60 km/h) age Vehicles with Driving up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph Assistance package (250 km/h) (100 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h) Driving and parking 173

Situation-dependent braking assistance Situation-dependent braking assistance may intervene at speeds starting from approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) in the following situations: Vehicles traveling in Stationary vehicles Crossing vehicles Crossing pedestrians Stationary pedes‐ front trians Vehicles without Driv‐ up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 50 mph no reaction up to approx. 37 mph no reaction ing Assistance pack‐ (250 km/h) (80 km/h) (60 km/h) age Vehicles with Driving up to approx. 155 mph up to approx. 62 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph up to approx. 43 mph Assistance package (250 km/h) (100 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h) (70 km/h)

Canceling a brake application of Active Brake R An obstacle is no longer detected in front of R Can be activated by an abrupt steering move‐ Assist your vehicle. ment during a swerving maneuver. You can cancel a brake application of Active Evasive Steering Assist (only vehicles with R Can assist during swerving and straightening Brake Assist at any time by: Driving Assistance package) of the vehicle. R Depressing the accelerator pedal fully. Evasive Steering Assist has the following charac‐ R Can react from a speed of approximately R Releasing the brake pedal. teristics: 12 mph (20 km/h) up to a speed of approx‐ imately 43 mph (70 km/h). Active Brake Assist cancels the intervention R Can detect stationary or crossing pedes‐ trians. R You can prevent the assistance at any time when at least one of the following conditions is by active steering. fulfilled: R Can assist the driver with additional steering R You maneuver to avoid the obstacle. assistance if it detects a swerving maneuver. R There is no longer a risk of collision. 174 Driving and parking

R & WARNING Risk of an accident despite # Drive at an appropriate speed if pedes‐ To pedestrians or vehicles if they move Evasive Steering Assist trians are close to the path of your vehi‐ quickly into the sensor detection range. cle. R To pedestrians who are hidden by other Evasive Steering Assist cannot always clearly objects. identify objects and complex traffic situa‐ Also observe the system limitations of Evasive tions. R If the typical outline of a pedestrian cannot Steering Assist. be distinguished from the background. In addition, the steering support of Evasive Steering Assist is generally not sufficient to System limitations R If a pedestrian is not recognized as such, e.g. avoid a collision. Active Brake Assist may be impaired or may not due to special clothing or other objects. In such cases Evasive Steering Assist can: function in the following situations: R On bends with a tight radius. R give an unnecessary warning or provide R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is assistance glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying Setting Active Brake Assist ambient light. R not give a warning or not provide assis‐ Multimedia system: R If the sensors are dirty, fogged up, damaged tance , . . or covered. k # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ R If the sensors malfunction due to other radar fic situation; do not rely on Evasive source interference, for example strong radar Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐ Steering Assist alone. reflections in a parking garage. age: The settings can be made after starting the # Be ready to brake and take evasive R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire vehicle. action if necessary. has been detected and displayed. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: # Prevent the assistance by actively steer‐ The settings can be made when the ignition is ing in non-critical driving situations. The system may not react correctly: switched on. R In complex traffic stations where objects % It is recommended that you always leave cannot always be clearly identified. Active Brake Assist switched on. Driving and parking 175

Select one of the following settings: Speed control cruise control Change into a lower gear in good time on long # and steep downhill gradients. Take particular : your selection is retained when the Function of cruise control note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By vehicle is next started. Cruise control accelerates and brakes the vehi‐ doing so, you will make use of the braking effect # cle automatically in order to maintain a previ‐ : your selection is retained when the of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake ously stored speed. vehicle is next started. system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ # : your selection is retained when the If you accelerate to overtake, for example, the ing gand wearin too quickly. vehicle is next started. stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your Do not use cruise control in the following situa‐ foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, # : tions: Vehicles without Driving Assistance pack‐ cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. R In traffic situations which require frequent age: The distance warning function and the changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on autonomous braking function are deactiva‐ You can operate cruise control with the cruise winding roads control lever. ted. When the vehicle is next started, the R middle setting is automatically selected. On slippery roads. Accelerating can cause If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con‐ the drive wheels to lose traction and the Vehicles with Driving Assistance pack‐ trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident vehicle could then skid nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take age: The distance warning function and the R autonomous braking function are deactiva‐ into account road, weather or traffic conditions. When visibility is poor ted. Evasive Steering Assist is unavailable. Cruise control is only an aid. You are responsible Operating cruise control When the ignition is next started, the middle for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐ setting is selected automatically and Evasive cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐ & WARNING Risk of accident due to Steering Assist is available. ing in lane. unknown stored speed % When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the System limitations If you call up the stored speed and this is æ symbol appears in the assistance Cruise control may be unable to maintain the lower than your current speed, the vehicle graphic in the multifunction display. stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored decelerates. speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. 176 Driving and parking

If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. # Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. # If the stored speed is not known, store the desired speed again.

Change into a lower gear in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheat‐ ing and wearing too quickly. Requirements # # R Cruise control is selected. Store current speed 2 (once after starting Press the lever briefly: the stored speed is the vehicle). increased 3 or reduced R ® ESP must be switched on, but not interven‐ 4 by 1 mph (1 km/h). ing. or # or R Call up stored speed 2. The driving speed must be at least 15 mph # # (20 km/h). Deactivate cruise control 1. Press the lever beyond the pressure point: the stored speed is increased 3 or reduced 4 by 5 mph (10 km/h). If cruise control has been deactivated, the cur‐ rent driven speed is adopted with 3 or 4. Driving and parking 177

% If you brake, deactivate ESP® or if ESP® deceleration performance is required, a vis‐ journey or while stationary. When Active Dis‐ intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. ual and acoustic warning is given and you tance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, a speed is When you switch off the vehicle, the last must then intervene yourself. stored which the driver can increase or reduce speed stored is cleared. R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ at any time. The speed can be adjusted between 15 mph (20 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h). Setting the speed limit for winter tires age, Active Parking Assist and COMAND: Multimedia system: When driving in stop-start traffic, the driver is Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ , . . supported by extended, automatic pulling age: The speed can be adjusted between î away in traffic jams. 15 mph (20 km/h) and 130 mph (210 km/h). R Vehicles with Driving Assistance Pack‐ Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package, # Select the speed or deactivate the function. age: Responds in urban speed ranges to sta‐ Active Parking Assist and COMAND: Up to 30 tionary vehicles (except bicycles, motorcy‐ seconds after stopping, the vehicle automatically Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cles and pedestrians) if conditions are suffi‐ follows the vehicle ahead without the interven‐ cient to enable detection. tion of the driver. This is only possible if the vehi‐ Function of Active Distance Assist cle is traveling on a freeway or a high-speed DISTRONIC If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Dis‐ major road. If an obstacle is detected in front of tance Assist DISTRONIC can neither reduce the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC the vehicle during the driving-off procedure, a risk of an accident nor override the laws of phys‐ R Maintains the set speed and accelerates or takeover warning is given. Acceleration is ics. It cannot take into account road, weather or reduced, the driver is given a visual and acoustic decelerates the vehicle if the distance from traffic conditions. Active Distance Assist the vehicle in front permits. warning and must stop the vehicle before reach‐ DIST RONIC is only an aid. You are responsible ing the obstacle or take evasive action. R Assists you in maintaining the distance from for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi‐ the vehicle in front and can bring your vehi‐ cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay‐ Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ cle to a standstill if necessary. ing in lane. age: In conjunction with navigation systems, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC prevents pro‐ R Brakes your vehicle with up to 50 % of the If all activation conditions are met, you can acti‐ hibited overtaking on the right at speeds over maximum possible braking power. If greater vate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC during a 50 mph (80 km/h) in right-hand traffic and over‐ 178 Driving and parking taking on the left in left-hand traffic on freeways play in the Instrument Display is always updated System limitations and high-speed major roads. when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ If you activate the turn signal indicator to change If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been age: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active lanes, the vehicle will accelerate more briskly to put into passive mode by pressing the accelera‐ in the 0 mph (0 km/h) to 130 mph (210 km/h) the set speed under the following conditions: tor pedal, only speed limits which are higher speed range. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ than the set speed are adopted. The system may be impaired or may not function ted. Pulling the cruise control lever will set the dis‐ in the following instances, for example: R If the driving speed is higher than 45 mph played speed limit as the speed, provided that: R In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is (70 km/h). R Active Speed Limit Assist has been activated glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying ambient light. R If the driven speed drops below the stored in the multimedia system and speed. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been R The windshield in the area of the camera is dirty, fogged up, damaged or covered. R The system cannot detect a vehicle in the rel‐ activated R If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. evant area of the overtaking lane. If no speed limit is displayed when the lever is operated, the speed set by the driver is adopted. R On slippery roads, braking oracceler ating Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and Traffic Sign Assist: Active Distance Assist Drive program and the vehicle could then skid. DISTRONIC also has the Active Speed Limit The DYNAMIC SELECT switch allows you to Assist function. This function can be configured R In parking garages, toll stations or on roads change the driving style of Active Distance with steep uphill or downhill gradients. in the multimedia system. If a change in the Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive speed limit is detected and Active Distance program is selected, the driving characteristics Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in Assist DISTRONIC is activated, Active Distance can be geared towards fuel economy, comfort or these situations. Assist DISTRONIC assumes this new speed. dynamic performance (→ page 150). The driven speed is adapted when the vehicle is level with the traffic signs. The speed limit dis‐ Driving and parking 179

Tips Display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Pay particular attention in the following traffic in the assistance graphic and in the speed‐ situations. In such situations, brake if necessary. ometer Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is then deacti‐ vated: R When cornering, entering and exiting a bend. R When not driving in the center of the lane. R When other vehicles are changing lane. R If there are narrow vehicles. R If there are obstacles and stationary vehi‐ 1 Speed of vehicle ahead cles. 2 Stored speed R If there are crossing vehicles, pedestrians, Displays in the multifunction display motorcyclists or cyclists. 1 Vehicle ahead When activating Active Distance Assist 2 Distance indicator DISTRONIC or when changing the stored speed, 3 Set specified distance the new stored speed is shown for around five 4 Your vehicle seconds in the multifunction display ç 50 mph (70 km/h). When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active, the set stored speed is displayed next to the ç symbol. When distance control is active, the symbol is shown in green. Vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ age: On freeways or high-speed major roads the 180 Driving and parking

ç symbol is displayed cyclically when the R To oncoming vehicles and crossing traf‐ # Continue driving with care and be ready vehicle is ready to pull away. fic. to brake, particularly if Active Distance Vehicles with Active Speed Limit Assist: If a Assist DISTRONIC warns you. speed limit is automatically adopted, this is Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC can nei‐ ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐ shown as the stored speed with the ê sym‐ & uations. WARNING Risk of accident from acceler‐ bol. ation or braking by Active Distance # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ Assist DISTRONIC Operating Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ditions and be ready to brake at all times. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may accel‐ & WARNING Risk of accident if detection erate or brake in the following cases, for function of Active Distance Assist & example: DISTRONIC is impaired WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ ted detectability of road users and traffic R If the vehicle pulls away using Active Dis‐ Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC does not situations tance Assist DISTRONIC. react: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot R If the stored speed is called up and is R To people or animals. always clearly identify other road users and considerably faster or slower than the R To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. complex traffic situations. currently driven speed. stopped or parked vehicles (vehicles with‐ In these conditions, Active Distance Assist R If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no out the Driving Assistance Package). DISTRONIC may: longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. R To stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. R Give an unnecessary warning and then stopped or parked vehicles, if conditions brake the vehicle. # Always carefully observe the traffic con‐ are not sufficient to enable detection R Neither give a warning nor intervene. ditions and be ready to brake at all (vehicles with the Driving Assistance times. Package). R Accelerate or brake unexpectedly. Driving and parking 181

# Take into account the traffic situation & WARNING Risk of accident due to Active before calling up the stored speed. Distance Assist DISTRONIC still being activated when you leave the driver's & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ seat ficient deceleration by Active Distance If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle Assist DISTRONIC is being braked by Active Distance Assist Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. your vehicle with up to 50 % of the maximum # Always deactivate Active Distance possible deceleration. If this deceleration is Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehi‐ not sufficient, Active Distance Assist cle to prevent it from rolling away DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and before you leave the driver's seat. acoustic warning. # In these cases, adjust your speed and Requirements: keep a sufficient distance. R The vehicle's engine must be switched on. # R The electric parking brake must be released. Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take # Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. evasive action. R Active Parking Assist is not being used to # park the vehicle or to exit from a parking To store current speed 2. space. Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored R ® ESP must be activated, but not intervening. speed. R The transmission must be in position h. or R The driver door, front passenger door and the # Call up stored speed 2. rear doors must be closed. R The engine hood must be closed. 182 Driving and parking

# Or On vehicles with Driving Assistance # Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Package and Traffic Sign Assist: The dis‐ you 2. played speed limit is adopted, if available 2. or # Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Accelerate briefly. 1. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle accelerates to the set speed. Adopting the speed limit as the stored speed Requirements: R Active Speed Limit Assist is activated in the multimedia system (→ page 208). R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ ted. # To reduce 5 or increase 6 the specified R The system detects a traffic sign indicating a distance from the vehicle in front. speed limit. Pulling away with Active Distance Assist # Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards DISTRONIC you 2. Requirement: a speed must have been previ‐ The displayed speed limit is adopted as the ously stored. stored speed. Your vehicle adapts its speed # To increase 3 or reduce 4 the speed. # Remove your foot from the brake pedal. to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed. If Active Speed Limit Assist Driving and parking 183

is activated, any detected changes in the you to stay in the center of the lane by from the active to passiv e status, the è sym‐ speed limit are adopted by the system. means of moderate steering interventions. bol is shown as enlarged and flashes yellow. R It uses the vehicle in front and the lane mark‐ Once the system is passive the è symbol is Collision warning shown as gray in the multifunction display. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is unable to ings as a reference depending on the driven sufficiently decelerate the vehicle in order to speed. The system may be impaired or may not function prevent it from approaching the vehicle in front, R Active Steering Assist requires you as the in the following instances: you will be warned visually and acoustically. An driver, to keep your hands on the steering R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ intermittent warning tone will then sound and wheel at all times so that you are able to cient illumination of the road, or due to snow, the distance warning lamp will light up in the intervene at any time to correct the course of rain, fog or heavy spray. instrument cluster. the vehicle and keep it in lane. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, # Brake immediately in order to increase the R Active Steering Assist can be overridden at direct sunlight or reflection from other vehi‐ distance from the vehicle in front. any time by steering the vehicle yourself. cles (e.g. if the road is wet). or R When the system is actively steering, the R If the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged # Take evasive action provided it is safe to do è symbol is shown in green in the multi‐ or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the so. function display. vicinity of the camera. System limitations of Active Steering Assist R If no, or several, unclear lane markings are Active Steering Assist Active Steering Assist has a limited steering tor‐ present for one lane, e.g. in a construction que for lateral guidance. In some cases, the area. Function of Active Steering Assist steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the R If the lane markings are worn away, dark or Active Steering Assist is only available for vehicle in the lane. covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. vehicles with the Driving Assistance Pack‐ R age. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles The distance to the vehicle in front is too ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist small and the lane markings thus cannot be R Active Steering Assist is operational at switches to passive mode. The system provides detected. speeds up to 130 mph (210 km/h) and helps no support in this case. During the transition 184 Driving and parking

R If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC must be make sure that the neighboring lane is free lanes branch off, cross one another or activated. (shoulder view). merge. % The availability of the following function is R The road is narrow and winding. country-dependent. R If there are highly variable shade conditions Active Steering Assist remains active even if the on the road. turn signal indicator is switched on. Active Steer‐ R If there are obstacles such as object markers ing Assist then assists the driver when changing on the lane or projecting out into the lane. lanes by applying steering torques to initiate the lane change. The system does not provide assistance in the Assistance when changing lanes is provided if all following conditions: the following conditions are met: R On very sharp bends. R You are driving on a freeway or high-speed R When towing a trailer. multi-lane major road with multiple lanes in R If you actively change lane without switching the direction of travel. on the turn signal indicator. R The neighboring lane is free and separated R If you switch on the turn signal indicator and by a broken lane marking. the conditions for activating Active Lane R The driven speed is between 50 mph Change Assist are not fulfilled. # If indicator lamp 1 is off: press button 2. (80 km/h) and 110 mph (180 km/h). Activating Active Steering Assist Function of Active Lane Change Assist R The turn signal indicator is switched on for Active Steering Assist is only an aid. You are longer than two seconds. Requirements: responsible for the distance to the vehicle in R ESP® must be activated, but not intervening. If the system is impaired, Active Lane Change front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time Assist may be interrupted. If an interruption and for staying in lane. Before changing lanes, occurs, display 1 appears in the multifunction Driving and parking 185 display along with a warning tone prompting you warning. 1 appears in the multifunction display. R Activating or deactivating Active Steering to take control of the vehicle. If you are still not steering the vehicle yourself or Assist or Distance Assist DISTRONIC if you have not taken hold of the steering wheel, a warning tone sounds in addition to the warning The driver must be ready to take control of the message to remind you to take control of the vehicle at any time. vehicle. The warning message does not appear or disap‐ Information on Hill Start Assist pears if one of the following conditions are met: Hill Start Assist holds the vehicle for a short R The driver steers the vehicle. time when pulling away on a hill under the fol‐ R The driver presses a steering wheel button or lowing conditions: operates Touch Control. R The transmission is in position h or k. Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist R The electric parking brake is released. Steering and contact detection If the driver continues to ignore the acoustic Active Steering Assist requires you as the driver, This gives you enough time to move your foot warning of Active Lane Change Assist, Active to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal Distance Assist DISTRONIC reduces the speed. times so that you are able to intervene at any and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. If the driver still does not respond, the vehicle is time to correct the course of the vehicle and decelerated in stages to a standstill. keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change & WARNING Risk of accident and injury from active to passive mode or vice versa at any The driver can cancel the deceleration at any caused by the vehicle rolling away time by performing one of the following actions: time. After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer If you are not steering yourself or if you take R Steering holds the vehicle and it can roll away. your hands off the steering wheel for a pro‐ R Braking or accelerating # Therefore, swiftly move your foot from longed period of time, the system will, depend‐ R Pressing a steering wheel button or operat‐ the brake pedal to the accelerator ing on the situation, first alert you with a visual ing Touch Control 186 Driving and parking

pedal. Never attempt to leave the vehi‐ R If the HOLD function is deactivated by Requirements: cle if it is being held by Hill Start Assist. depressing the accelerator pedal or the R The vehicle is stationary. brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. R The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on R If the electrics in the engine compart‐ the driver's side is fastened. HOLD function ment, the battery or the fuses are tam‐ R The engine is running or has been automati‐ HOLD function pered with or if the battery is disconnec‐ cally switched off by the ECO start/stop The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a stand‐ ted. function. still without requiring you to depress the brake R # Always deactivate the HOLD function The electric parking brake is released. pedal, e.g. when pulling away on steep slopes. and secure the vehicle against rolling R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is not acti‐ System limitations away before leaving the vehicle. vated. The incline must not be greater than 30%. R The transmission is in position h, k or i. * NOTE Damage from automatic braking Activating/deactivating the HOLD function Activating the HOLD function When Active Brake Assist, Active Distance # & WARNING Risk of an accident due to the Depress the brake pedal and after a short Assist DISTRONIC or the HOLD function are time depress further until the ë display HOLD function being activated when you activated, the vehicle brakes autonomously appears in the multifunction display. leave the vehicle in certain situations. # Release the brake pedal. If you leave the vehicle while only the HOLD To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate function is braking the vehicle, the vehicle these systems in the following or similar sit‐ Deactivating the HOLD function can roll away in the following situations: uations: # Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. R If there is a malfunction in the system or # During towing or in the power supply. # In a car wash # Depress the brake pedal until the ë dis‐ play disappears from the multifunction dis‐ play. Driving and parking 187

The HOLD function is deactivated in the follow‐ R Continual adjustment of the damping forces reduce fuel consumption. The option of manually ing situations: adjusting the vehicle level is also available. The damping characteristics adapt to the current R When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operating and driving situation. AIR BODY CONTROL comprises: activated. The damping is tuned individually for each wheel R Air suspension with variable spring rate R The transmission is switched to position j. and is affected by the following factors: R Automatic level control system R When the vehicle is secured with the electric R The road surface conditions R Speed-dependent lowering to reduce fuel parking brake. R Vehicle load consumption In the following situations, the vehicle is held by R The drive program selected R Manual level adjustment the transmission position j or by the electric R ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with parking brake: The drive program can be adjusted using the constant damping force adjustment) DYNAMIC SELECT switch. R When the seat belt is unfastened and the R DYNAMIC SELECT switch and level button driver's door is opened. R When the engine is switched off. AIR BODY CONTROL R When there is a malfunction in the system or AIR BODY CONTROL function if the power supply is insufficient. AIR BODY CONTROL is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving com‐ DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL fort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL has the following ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. characteristics: When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered R Variable damping characteristics automatically to improve driving safety and to 188 Driving and parking

Available suspension settings

Drive programCharacteristics C R Comfortable suspension tuning (Comfort) R Normal level R When driving at speeds above 78 mph (125 km/h), the vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) R When driving at speeds below 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle is raised again by 0.6 in (15 mm) E R Comfortable suspension tuning (Economy) R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds S R Firmer suspension tuning (Sport) R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds S+ R Even firmer suspension tuning (Sport Plus) R The vehicle is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm) compared to the normal level R The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are traveling at higher speeds Driving and parking 189

Setting the vehicle level & WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ Raising the vehicle cle lowering & WARNING Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL or level control system: When you unload lug‐ If you drive at a higher vehicle level, the driv‐ gage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first ing characteristics may be impaired due to rises slightly and then returns to the set level the higher vehicle center of gravity. shortly afterwards. The vehicle may tip over more quickly on a You or anyone else in the vicinity of the bend, for example. wheel arches or the underbody could thus # Always select as low a vehicle level as become trapped. possible and adapt your driving style The vehicle can also be lowered after being accordingly. locked. # & When leaving the vehicle, make sure WARNING Risk of entrapment from vehi‐ that nobody is in the vicinity of the cle lowering wheel arches or the underbody. When lowering the vehicle, people could become trapped if their limbs are between Requirements: # Press button 1. the vehicle body and the tires or underneath R The vehicle's engine must be switched on. Indicator lamp 2 lights up. the vehicle. R The vehicle must not be moving faster than The vehicle is raised by 1 in (25 mm) com‐ # Make sure no one is underneath the 37 mph (60 km/h). pared to the normal level. vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of Your selection is saved. the wheel arches when you lower the vehicle. 190 Driving and parking

The vehicle is lowered again in the following sit‐ Parking Assist PARKTRONIC the maneuvering area while maneuvering and uations: parking in/exiting parking spaces. Function of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC R When driving faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). In the standard setting, an intermittent warning R When driving between 37 mph (60 km/h) tone sounds from a distance of approximately and 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) to an obstacle. A continuous tone three minutes. sounds from a distance of approximately 0.7 ft R (0.2 m). You can set the warning tone in the mul‐ After selecting a drive program using the timedia system so that it will sound earlier at a DYNAMIC SELECT switch. greater distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last (→ page 193). active drive program. If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, Lowering the vehicle Active Parking Assist is unavailable. # Press button 1. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display in the Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The vehicle is parking assistance system with ultrasound. It multimedia system adjusted to the height of the last active drive monitors the area around your vehicle using six If Active Parking Assist is not activated and an program. sensors 1 in the front bumper and six sensors obstacle is detected in the path of the vehicle, a in the rear bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC pop-up window for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the distance 1 appears in the multimedia system at speeds between your vehicle and an object. up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the sur‐ roundings. The responsibility for safe maneuver‐ ing and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in Driving and parking 191

System limitations During the parking procedure or maneuvering, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC does not necessa‐ objects are detected as the vehicle drives past. rily take into account the following obstacles: If you steer in the direction of a detected obsta‐ R cle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. warning is issued. The lateral segments light up persons, animals or objects. orange or red, depending on the distance to the R Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. obstacle. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks. Segment color depending on distance The sensors must be free of dirt, ice and slush. Color Lateral distance in cm Vehicles with Active Parking Assist without 360° Otherwise, they may not function correctly. RedApprox. < 30 Camera Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. OrangeApprox. 30 - 60 Function of the passive side impact protec‐ In order for lateral front or rear segments to be tion displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance Passive side impact protection is an additional of at least half of the vehicle length. Once the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC function which vehicle has traveled the length of the vehicle, all warns the driver about obstacles at the side of of the lateral front and rear segments can be dis‐ the vehicle. A warning is issued when obstacles played. are detected between the front and rear detec‐ tion range. In order for an object to be detected, the sensors in the front or rear bumper must Vehicles with Parking Assist and 360° Camera detect the object while you are driving past it. 192 Driving and parking

After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again, before a new warning can be issued. System limitations The system limitations for Parking Assist PARKTRONIC apply for passive side impact pro‐ tection. The following objects are not detected, for exam‐ ple: R Vehicles without 360° Camera Vehicles with 360° Camera Pedestrians who approach the vehicle from the side 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐ 1 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only opera‐ tional in the front and rear tional in the front and rear R Objects placed next to the vehicle 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational 2 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC and can also warn the driver about obstacles and can also warn the driver about obstacles at the side of the vehicle at the side of the vehicle * NOTE Risk of an accident from objects 3 Obstacles detected at the front right 3 Obstacles detected at the front right at close range (orange) and rear (red) (orange) and rear (red) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect Saved obstacles are deleted in the following sit‐ certain objects at close range. uations, for example: # When parking or maneuvering the vehi‐ R You switch off the vehicle cle, pay particular attention to any R You open the doors objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flower pots or drawbars. Driving and parking 193

% The vehicle or other objects could oth‐ Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the when the vehicle is further away from an obsta‐ erwise be damaged. button may also be located in the center cle. console. # Select . % If indicator lamp 1 is not lit, Parking Assist Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp is lit activated when the vehicle is started. or the é symbol appears in the multifunction Activating/deactivating audio fadeout display, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not Adjusting the warning tones of Parking You can specify whether the volume of a media active. Assist PARKTRONIC source in the multimedia system is to be Multimedia system: reduced when Parking Assist PARKTRONIC gives , . k . an audible warning. . # Select . Adjusting the volume of the warning tones # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Select . # Adjust the value. Adjusting the pitch of the warning tones # Select . # Adjust the value. Specifying the starting point for the warning tones You can specify whether the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tones should commence # Press button 2. 194 Driving and parking

Reversing camera yourself and to avoid obstacles when backing R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ up. ged up. Observe the notes on cleaning the Function of the rear view camera The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a rear view camera (→ page 336). substitute for your attention to the surroundings. R The camera or rear of your vehicle is dam‐ You are always responsible for safe maneuvering aged. In this case, have the camera and its and parking. Make sure that there are no per‐ position and setting checked at a qualified sons, animals or objects in the maneuvering specialist workshop. area while maneuvering and parking in parking spaces. The field of vision and other functions of the rear view camera may be restricted due to additional You can select from the following views: accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. R Normal view license plate bracket or bicycle rack). R Wide-angle view % The display contrast may be impaired due to R Trailer view incident sunlight or other light sources. In this case, pay particular attention. The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a % Have the display repaired or replaced if, for mirror image, as in the inside rearview mirror. example, pixel errors considerably restrict its System limitations use. When you engage reverse gear, the image from The rear view camera will not function or will Vehicles without Parking Package rear view camera 1 is shown in the multimedia only partially function in the following situations: The following camera views are available in the system. Dynamic guide lines show the path the R If the trunk lid or tailgate is open. multimedia system: vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. current position. This helps you to orientate R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. Driving and parking 195

Normal view 5 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ Wide-angle view imately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear area 1 Yellow guide line at a distance of approx‐ Vehicles with Parking Package imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear area 6 Vehicle center axis (locating aid) The following camera views are available in the 2 White guide line without turning the steering 7 bumper multimedia system: wheel, vehicle width including the outside 8 Red guide line at a distance of approximately mirrors (static) 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 3 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ face) depending on the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 4 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle (dynamic) 196 Driving and parking

5 Red warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are very close (approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) or less) 6 Orange warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles are a medium dis‐ tance away (between approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) and 2.0 ft (0.6 m)) % If the entire system fails, the inner segments of the warning display are shown in red. The indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button Normal view lights up and the é symbol appears in Wide-angle view 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will the multifunction display. take at the current steering wheel angle If the system fails at the rear : 360° camera (dynamic) R The rear segments are shown in red 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ when backing up. Function of the 360° Camera The 360° Camera is a system that consists of face) depending on the current steering R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐ four cameras. The cameras cover the immediate wheel angle (dynamic) ing forwards. 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately vehicle surroundings. The system assists you, 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area When Active Parking Assist is active, the e.g. when parking or at exits with reduced visibil‐ ity. 4 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist lanes are displayed in green. PARKTRONIC: obstacles are at a distance of If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, The 360° Camera is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ between approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) and the warning display fades out. stitute for your attention to the surroundings. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. Make sure that there are no per‐ sons, animals or objects in the maneuvering Driving and parking 197 area while maneuvering and parking in parking 3 Top view with images from the side cameras Top view spaces. in the outside mirrors The system evaluates images from the following 4 Wide-angle view, rear cameras: 5 Top view with image from the rear view cam‐ R Rear view camera era R Front camera 6 Top view with trailer view (if trailer hitch is installed) R Two side cameras in the outside mirrors Views of the 360° Camera You can select from different views:

1 Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take with the steering wheel in its current position 2 Yellow warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: obstacles at a distance of approximately 3.3 ft (1.0 m) or less 3 Your vehicle from above If the distance to the object lessens, the color of the warning display changes 2. From a dis‐ 1 Wide-angle view, front tance of approximately 2.0 ft (0.6 m) the warn‐ 2 Top view with image from the front camera ing display is shown in orange. From a distance of approximately 1.0 ft (0.3 m) the warning dis‐ play is shown in red. 198 Driving and parking

When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational Guide lines The guide lines in the multimedia system dis‐ and no object is detected, the segments of the play show the distances to your vehicle. The warning display are shown in gray. distances only apply to road level. % If the entire system fails, the segments of Side view of the mirror cameras the warning display are shown in red. The The sides of the vehicle can be seen in this view. indicator lamp on the PARKTRONIC button lights up and the é symbol appears in the multifunction display. If the system fails at the rear: R The rear segments are shown in red when backing up. R The rear segments are hidden when driv‐ ing forwards. 1 Yellow lane marking the course the tires will take at the current steering wheel angle If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated, (dynamic) the warning display fades out. 2 Yellow guide line, vehicle width (driven sur‐ face) depending on the current steering 1 Guide line of external vehicle dimensions wheel angle (dynamic) with outside mirrors folded out 3 Red guide line at a distance of approximately 2 Marker of the wheel contact points 12 in (0.3 m) from the rear area 4 Mark at a distance of approx. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) System limitations % When Active Parking Assist is active, the The 360° Camera will not function or will only lanes are displayed in green. partially function in the following situations: R If the doors are open. Driving and parking 199

R The side mirrors are folded in. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera # Navigate downwards twice. R The trunk lid or tailgate is open. (→ page 336). The Favorites menu appears. R There is heavy rain, snow or fog. Selecting a view for the 360° Camera # Select . R The ambient light is poor, e.g. at night. The function is selected in # Select . the multimedia system. R The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or fog‐ # Select . ged up. # Engage reverse gear. R Cameras, or vehicle components in which # In the multimedia system, select the desired Active Parking Assist view. the cameras are installed, are damaged. In Functions of Active Parking Assist this event, have the cameras, their positions Opening the camera cover of the rear view Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking and their setting checked at a qualified spe‐ camera assistance system which uses ultrasound and is cialist workshop. Multimedia system: automatically activated during forward travel. Do not use the 360° Camera under such circum‐ , . k . The system is operational at speeds of up to stances. You could otherwise injure others or approximately 22 mph (35 km/h). When all the collide with objects when parking the vehicle. conditions are fulfilled, the c symbol appears # Select . On vehicles with height-adjustable suspension or in the multifunction display and the system auto‐ % The camera cover closes automatically after matically searches for and measures parking if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load, leaving the some time or after an ignition cycle. standard height can result in inaccuracies in the spaces on both sides of the vehicle parallel and guide lines and in the display of the generated Assigning the camera as a favorite perpendicular to the direction of travel. If Active images, depending on technical conditions. You can call up the camera view directly in the Parking Assist is activated, suitable parking multimedia system by assigning it as a favorite. spaces are displayed in the multimedia system. The field of vision and other functions of the The ë symbol appears in the multifunction camera system may be restricted due to addi‐ # Press the ò button on the touchpad or display. The arrows show on which side of the tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g. controller. road free parking spaces are located. license plate bracket, bicycle rack). The main functions are displayed. 200 Driving and parking

The parking space and, if necessary, the parking System limitations of Active Parking Assist # In these situations, do not use Active direction can be selected as desired. Active Objects located above or below the detection Parking Assist. Parking Assist calculates a suitable vehicle path range of Active Parking Assist are not detected and assists you in parking and exiting the park‐ when the parking space is being measured. Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking ing space. These are also not taken into account when the space being measured inaccurately. Parking Active Parking Assist changes gear, accelerates, parking maneuver is calculated, e.g. overhanging spaces that are partially occupied by trailer brakes and steers the vehicle. loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or drawbars might not be identified as such or be the boundaries of parking spaces. In some cir‐ Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking cumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore Assist on level, high-grip ground. substitute for your attention to the surroundings. guide you into the parking space prematurely. The responsibility for safe maneuvering and Do not use Active Parking Assist in the following parking remains with you. Make sure that no & WARNING Risk of accident due to situations: persons, animals or objects etc. are in the objects located above or below the R In extreme weather conditions such as ice or maneuvering range. detection range of Active Parking Assist packed snow or in heavy rain. Active Parking Assist is canceled if, among other If there are objects above or below the R If you are transporting a load that protrudes things, one of the following actions is carried beyond the vehicle. out: detection range, the following situations may arise: R If the parking space is on a steep downhill or R You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. R Active Parking Assist may steer too early. uphill gradient. R You deactivate Active Parking Assist. R Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ R If you have installed snow chains. R You begin steering. sion: The vehicle may not stop in front of Active Parking Assist may also display parking R You apply the parking brake. these objects. spaces that are not suitable for parking, e.g.: R You engage drive range j. This could cause a collision. R Parking spaces where parking is prohibited. R ESP® intervenes. R Parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces. R You open the tailgate. Driving and parking 201

Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: R If two parking spaces are located immedi‐ ately next to each other. R If the parking space is directly next to a low obstacle such as a low curb. Active Parking Assist will not assist you with parking spaces at right angles to the direction of travel in the following situations: # If you have driven past a suitable parking R If the parking space is on a curb. space: bring the vehicle to a standstill. R If the parking space is bordered by an obsta‐ # Select desired parking space 4. cle, e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer. # Where necessary, select the parking direc‐ Parking with Active Parking Assist tion: forwards or reverse. # % Press button 1. Vehicle path 3 is shown, depending on the Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the The Active Parking Assist view appears on selected parking space and parking direc‐ button may also be located at a different the multimedia system display. Area 2 dis‐ tion. position in the center console. plays detected parking spaces 4 and vehi‐ # Confirm the selected parking space. cle path 3. % Vehicle path 3 shown on the multimedia system display may differ from the actual vehicle path. 202 Driving and parking

& WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ display message appears. Further maneuvering Please note that you are responsible for the vehi‐ cle swinging out while parking or pulling may still be necessary. cle and surroundings during the entire parking out of a parking space # After completion of the parking procedure, procedure. safeguard the vehicle against rolling away. # Start the vehicle. While parking or exiting a parking space, the When required by legal requirements or local vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas conditions: turn the wheels towards the curb. of the oncoming lane. % You can stop the vehicle and change the This could cause you to collide with objects transmission position during the parking pro‐ or other road users. cedure. The system then calculates a new # Pay attention to objects and other road vehicle path. The parking procedure can users. then be continued. If no new vehicle path is # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or available, the transmission position will be cancel the parking procedure with changed again. If the vehicle has not yet Active Parking Assist. reached the parking space, the parking pro‐ cedure will be canceled, should a gear be # If, for example, the changed. message appears in the multimedia system Exiting a parking space with Active Parking display: select the corresponding transmis‐ Assist sion position. The vehicle drives into the selected parking Requirement: space. You can only exit a parking space with Active # Press button 1. Parking Assist if you have previously parked the The Active Parking Assist view appears on On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle with Active Parking Assist. the multimedia system display. Driving and parking 203

# If the vehicle has been parked at right angles & WARNING Risk of accident due to vehi‐ to the direction of travel: in area 2, select cle swinging out while parking or pulling direction of travel 3. out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. # Pay attention to objects and other road users. Example: vehicles with 360° Camera # Where necessary, stop the vehicle or After the exiting procedure has been completed, cancel the parking procedure with the Active Parking Assist. % The vehicle path shown on the multimedia message appears in the display of the system display may differ from the actual multimedia system. A warning tone and the dis‐ # If, for example, the vehicle path. play 4 in the multimedia system prompt you to message appears in the multimedia system take over. You have to accelerate, brake, steer # Confirm to start the exiting process. display: select the corresponding transmis‐ and change gear yourself again. sion position. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If an obstacle is detected in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approx. 1 mph (2 km/h). If a critical situation is detected, a 204 Driving and parking symbol appears on the camera image of the mul‐ The responsibility for safe maneuvering and Cross Traffic Alert timedia system. parking remains with you. Make sure that no % Also read the instructions on Blind Spot persons, animals or objects etc. are in the Assist (→ page 208). & WARNING Risk of accident caused by maneuvering range. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: Drivers can limited detection performance of Drive A risk of a collision may arise in the following sit‐ Away Assist also be warned of any crossing traffic when uations, for example: backing up out of a parking space. If a critical Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly iden‐ R If the driver mixes up the accelerator and situation is detected, a warning symbol appears tify objects and traffic situations. brake pedals. on the camera image of the multimedia system. In such cases, Drive Away Assist might: R If the wrong gear is selected. If the driver does not respond to th e warning, R the vehicle's brakes can be applied automati‐ Warn you without reason and limit the The Drive Away Assist function is active under vehicle speed. cally. To do this, the function uses the radar sen‐ the following conditions: sors in the bumper. The area adjacent to the R Not warn you or not limit the vehicle R If Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activated. vehicle is continually monitored. speed. R Every time the gear is changed to k or h If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ when the vehicle is at a standstill. or other objects, detection is not possible. fic situation; do not rely on Drive Away R If the detected obstacle is less than approx. The Cross Traffic Alert function is active under Assist alone. 3.3 ft (1.0 m) away. the following conditions: # Be prepared to brake or swerve as nec‐ R If the maneuvering assistance function is R If Blind Spot Assist is activated. essary, provided the traffic situation activated in the multimedia system. R permits and that it is safe to take eva‐ If the vehicle is backing up at walking pace. sive action. Drive Away Assist is not available on inclines. R If the maneuvering assistance function is activated in the multimedia system. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a sub‐ The Cross Traffic Alert function is not available stitute for your attention to the surroundings. on inclines. Driving and parking 205

Activating/deactivating maneuvering assis‐ R Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The You can have the following status information for tance driver is warned earlier and the attention ATTENTION ASSIST displayed in the assistance Multimedia system: level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adap‐ menu of the on-board computer: , . k . ted accordingly. R The length of the journey since the last . If drowsiness or increasing lapses in concentra‐ break. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. tion are detected, the R The attention level determined by ATTENTION warning appears in the Instrument Dis‐ ASSIST. play. You can acknowledge the message and ATTENTION ASSIST If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the take a break where necessary. If you do not take attention level and cannot issue a warning, the Function of ATTENTION ASSIST a break and ATTENTION ASSIST continues to message appears. ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monoto‐ detect increasing lapses in concentration, you nous journeys, e.g. on freeways and trunk roads. will be warned again after a minimum of If a warning is given in the Instrument Display, If ATTENTION ASSIST detects indicators of fati‐ 15 minutes. the multimedia system offers to search for a rest gue or increasing lapses in concentration on the area. You can select a rest area and start naviga‐ part of the driver, it suggests taking a break. tion to this rest area. This function can be activa‐ ted and deactivated in the multimedia system. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration If ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the é until too late. The system is not a substitute for a symbol appears in the assistance graphic in the well-rested and attentive driver. On long jour‐ Instrument Display when the engine is running. neys, take regular breaks in good time that allow ATTENTION ASSIST is activated automatically for adequate recuperation. when the engine is re-started. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. You can choose between two settings. R Standard: normal system sensitivity 206 Driving and parking

System limitations R If you unfasten your seat belt and open the Traffic Sign Assist ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 37 mph driver's door (e.g. change drivers or take a Function of Traffic Sign Assist (60 km/h) to 124 mph (200 km/h) speed range. break). The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is Setting ATTENTION ASSIST restricted, and warnings may be delayed or not Multimedia system: occur at all in the following situations: , . k . R If you have been driving for less than 30 minutes. R If the road condition is poor (uneven road Setting options surface or potholes). # Select , or . R If there is a strong side wind. Suggesting a rest area R If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cor‐ # Select . nering speeds or high rates of acceleration). # Activate O or deactivate the function ª. R If the Steering Assist function of Active Dis‐ If ATTENTION ASSIST detects fatigue or tance Assist DISTRONIC is active. increasing lack of attention, it suggests a R If the time has been set incorrectly. rest area in the vicinity. R In active driving situations, if you change # Selecting a suggested rest area. lanes and vary your speed frequently. You are guided to the selected rest area. Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs with mul‐ tifunction camera 1 and assists you by display‐ The ATTENTION ASSIST tiredness or alertness ing detected speed limits and overtaking restric‐ assessment is deleted and restarted when con‐ tions in the instrument cluster. The camera also tinuing the journey in the following situations: detects traffic signs with a restriction indicated R If you switch off the engine. by an additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions). Driving and parking 207

Warning when the maximum permissible % The illustration shows the Instrument Display System limitations speed is exceeded in the Widescreen Cockpit The system may be impaired or may not function The system can warn you if you unintentionally Since Traffic Sign Assist also uses the data in the following situations: exceed the maximum permissible speed. To do stored in the navigation system, it can update R If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insuffi‐ this, you can specify in the multimedia system the display in the following situations without by how much the maximum permissible speed cient illumination of the road, if there are detecting traffic signs: highly variable shade conditions or in rain, can be exceeded before a warning is issued. You R can specify whether the warning is to be just a When the vehicle changes roads, e.g. high‐ snow, fog or spray. visual warning or an acoustic one as well. way exit or slip road. R If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, R When a village or city boundary is passed direct sunlight or reflections from other vehi‐ Display in the Instrument Display which is stored in the digital map. cles. R If the windshield in the area of the multifunc‐ tion camera is dirty, or if the camera is fog‐ ged up, damaged or covered. R If the traffic signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt or snow, or because they are covered or because of insufficient lighting. R If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out-of-date. R If the signs are ambiguous, e.g. traffic signs on construction sites or in adjacent lanes. 1 Permissible speed Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun‐ 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction tries. If it is unavailable, display 1 is shown in 3 Additional sign with restriction the speedometer. 208 Driving and parking

Setting Traffic Sign Assist Activating/deactivating the warning when a to your vehicle, the warning lamp in the outside Multimedia system: speed limit is exceeded mirror lights up red. , . k . The point at which a warning is given once a If a vehicle is detected close to your vehicle in speed is exceeded (warning threshold) can be the lateral monitoring range and you switch on set according to individual preferences. the turn signal indicator in the corresponding Activating /deactivating automatic adoption # Select . direction, a warning tone sounds once. The red of speed limits # Select , or . warning lamp in the outside mirror flashes. If the Requirement: turn signal indicator remains on, all other detec‐ R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activa‐ Setting a speed ted vehicles are indicated only by the flashing of ted. # Select . the red warning lamp. # # Set the desired speed. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is Select . given. # Activate Oor deactivate ª the function. The speed limits detected by Traffic Sign Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot & WARNING Risk of accident despite Blind Assist are automatically adopted by Active Assist Spot Assist Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles Displaying detected traffic signs in the Blind Spot Assist approaching and overtaking you at a greatly media display Blind Spot Assist uses two lateral, rear-facing different speed. radar sensors to monitor the area up to 130 ft # As a result, Blind Spot Assist cannot warn Select . (40 m) behind your vehicle and 10 ft (3 m) drivers in this situation. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. directly next to your vehicle. # Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approx‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ imately 8 mph (12 km/h) and this vehicle subse‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. quently enters the monitoring range directly next Driving and parking 209

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist Brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist & WARNING Risk of accident despite are only aids. They may fail to detect some vehi‐ If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side Active Blind Spot Assist cles and are no substitute for attentive driving. impact in the monitoring range, a course-cor‐ Always ensure that there is sufficient distance to recting brake application is carried out. This is Blind Spot Assist does not react to the fol‐ the side for other road users and obstacles. designed to help you avoid a collision. lowing: R System limitations The course-correcting brake application is availa‐ Overtaking vehicles closely on the side, ble in the speed range between approximately placing them in the blind spot area The detection capability of Blind Spot Assist can 20 mph (30 km/h) and 125 mph (200 km/h). R be restricted in the following situations: Vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a very different speed R If the sensors are dirty or obscured. & WARNING Risk of accident despite R When there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, brake application of Active Blind Spot As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei‐ heavy rain, snow or spray. Assist ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit‐ uations. R If narrow vehicles are within the monitoring A course-correcting brake application cannot # range, e.g. bicycles. always prevent a collision. Always pay careful attention to the traf‐ fic situation and maintain a safe dis‐ Warnings may be issued in error when driving # Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ tance at the side of the vehicle. close to crash barriers or similar solid lane bor‐ self, especially if Active Blind Spot ders. Warnings may be interrupted when driving Assist warns you or makes a course- alongside long vehicles, for example, trucks, for correcting brake application. a prolonged period. # Always maintain a safe distance at the Blind Spot Assist is not operational when reverse sides. gear is engaged. 210 Driving and parking

System limitations Activating or deactivating Blind Spot Assist Either a course-correcting brake application or Active Blind Spot Assist appropriate to the driving situation, or none at Multimedia system: all, may occur in the following situations: , . k . R There are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, on both sides of your vehicle. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. R A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. R You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. If a course-correcting brake application occurs, R You clearly brake or accelerate. the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mir‐ R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a dis‐ ESP® or Active Brake Assist. play 1 indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the multifunction display. R ESP® is deactivated. In rare cases, the system may make an inappro‐ R Tire pressure loss or a defective tire has priate brake application. This brake application been detected. may be interrupted at any time if you steer R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐ slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate. nection to the trailer hitch has been correctly established. Driving and parking 211

Active Lane Keeping Assist and a course-correcting brake application guides vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, fo r braking in you back into your lane. good time and for staying in lane. Function of Active Lane Keeping Assist You are warned by vibration pulses in the steer‐ Vehicles with Lane Tracking package: If the ing wheel in the following circumstances: lane markings are solid lines and you do not R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake markings. application can bring the vehicle back into the original lane. R A front wheel passes over the lane markings. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or You will also be guided back into your lane by Driving Assistance Plus package: If you do not means of a course-correcting brake application react to the warning, a lane-correcting brake if the following conditions are met: application can bring the vehicle back into the R Active Lane Keeping Assist detects lane original lane. In the case of a broken lane mark‐ markings on both sides. ing being detected, a brake application will only R A front wheel drives over a solid lane mark‐ be made if a vehicle has been detected in the ing. adjacent lane. Oncoming vehicles, overtaking vehicles and vehicles in adjacent lanes can be Whether a warning is issued and when this detected. occurs also depends on the selected sensitivity The brake application is available in the speed setting (standard or adaptive). Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in range between 40 mph (60 km/h) and 120 mph front of your vehicle by means of multifunction If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane (200 km/h). camera 1. It serves to protect you against unin‐ Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an tentionally leaving your lane. You will be warned accident nor override the laws of physics. It can‐ by means of a vibration in the steering wheel not take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Active Lane Keeping Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the 212 Driving and parking

R You have adopted a sporty driving style with R The lane markings are worn, dark or covered. high cornering speeds or high rates of accel‐ R The distance to the vehicle in front is too eration. small and the lane markings thus cannot be R ESP® is deactivated. detected. R When driving with a trailer, the electrical con‐ R The lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes nection to the trailer has been correctly branch off, cross one another or merge. established. R The road is very narrow and winding. R If a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire Vehicles with Driving Assistance package or has been detected and displayed. Driving Assistance Plus package: Active Lane If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, dis‐ The system may be impaired or may not function Keeping Assist uses radar sensors to monitor play 1 appears in the multifunction display. in the following situations: several areas around the vehicle. If the radar System limits R There is poor visibility, for example due to sensors in the rear bumper are dirty or covered insufficient illumination of the road, highly with snow, the system may be impaired or may No lane-correcting brake application occurs in not function. If an obstacle in the lane in which the following situations: variable shade conditions, or due to rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. you are driving has been detected, no lane-cor‐ R recting brake application occurs. You clearly and actively steer, brake or accel‐ R erate. There is glare, for example from the sun, reflections or oncoming traffic. Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐ R tor. There is dirt on the windshield in the vicinity & of the multifunction camera or the camera is WARNING Risk of accident despite R A driving safety system intervenes, such as fogged up, damaged or obscured. Active Lane Keeping Assist warning ESP®, Active Brake Assist or Active Blind R No or several, unclear lane markings are A lane-correcting brake application cannot Spot Assist. present for one lane, for example in a con‐ always bring the vehicle back into the origi‐ struction area. nal lane. Driving and parking 213

# Always steer, brake or accelerate your‐ In such cases, Lane Keeping Assist can: self, especially if Active Lane Keeping R give an unnecessary warning Assist warns you or makes a lane-cor‐ R recting brake application. not give a warning # Always pay particular attention to the & WARNING Risk of accident despite inter‐ traffic situation and keep within the vention of Active Lane Keeping Assist lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect traffic conditions or road users. In very rare Prerequisite cases, the system may make an inappropri‐ The driving speed is at least 40 mph (60 km/h). ate brake application, e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lane marking. The brake application can be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction. # Press button . # 2 Always make sure that there is suffi‐ If indicator lamp 1 lights up, Lane Keeping cient distance to the side for other traf‐ Assist is activated. When lane markings are fic or obstacles. detected, the lines in the assistance graphic are shown in white. & WARNING Risk of accident despite Lane Keeping Assist Sensitivity of Active Lane Keeping Assist With the standard or adaptive setting, you can Lane Keeping Assist cannot always clearly influence when the warning vibration of Lane detect lane markings. Keeping Assist takes place. 214 Driving and parking

In both the standard and adaptive settings, no warning vibration occurs in the following situa‐ tions: R You have switched on the turn signal indica‐ tor. R A driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. In the adaptive setting, there will also be no warning vibration in the following situations: R The vehicle is accelerated or braked consid‐ erably. R You steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an obstacle or change lane quickly. R You cut the corner on a sharp bend. Setting the sensitivity of Active Lane Keep‐ ing Assist Multimedia system: , . k . Selection options # Select or . Instrument Display and on-board computer 215

Instrument display overview Instrument display (standard) Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐ pit Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you may not recognize dangers.

& WARNING Risk of accident due to an instrument display malfunction If the instrument display has failed or mal‐ functioned, you cannot recognize function restrictions applying to safety relevant sys‐ tems. The operating safety of your vehicle may be 1 Speedometer impaired. 2 Multifunction display 1 Speedometer # Drive on carefully. 3 Tachometer 2 Multifunction display 3 Example: area for additional values # Have the vehicle checked immediately 4 Coolant temperature display at a qualified specialist workshop. 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐ 4 Coolant temperature display tor 5 Fuel level and fuel filler flap location indica‐ If the operating safety of your vehicle is tor impaired, park the vehicle safely as soon as pos‐ % Further display content can be shown in dis‐ sible. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. play 3 for additional values . The segments in speedometer 1 indicate the system status for the following: R Cruise control (→ page 175) 216 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC # Before opening the hood, allow the W Increases the volume (→ page 177) engine to cool down. X Decreases the volume # 2 * NOTE Engine damage due to excessively In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ Touch Control (on-board computer) high engine speeds partment, keep the hood closed and 3 Touch Control (multimedia system) call the fire service. 4 Button group: The engine will be damaged if you drive with % Main menu and back button (multime‐ the engine in the overrevving range. dia system) # Do not drive with the engine in the over‐ Overview of the buttons on the steering ó Voice Control System revving range. wheel 6 Makes/accepts a call The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the ~ Rejects/ends a call engine when the red band in tachometer 3 (overrevving range) is reached. Operating the on-board computer During normal operating conditions, coolant temperature display 4 may rise to the red & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ mark. mation systems and communications equipment & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ ing the hood If you operate information and communica‐ tions equipment integrated in the vehicle If you open the hood when the engine has 1 Button group: when driving, you will be distracted from the overheated or during a fire in the engine % Main menu and back button (on-board traffic situation. This could also cause you to compartment, you could come into contact computer) lose control of the vehicle. with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. 8 Switches sound off/on Instrument Display and on-board computer 217

# Only operate this equipment when the The on-board computer is operated using Touch traffic situation permits. Control 2 and back button 1 on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road The following menus are available: and traffic conditions and operate the R equipment with the vehicle stationary. R R You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when R operating the on-board computer. R # To call up the menu bar: press the back % The on-board computer displays appear in R button on the left. the multifunction display (→ page 218). R # To scroll in the menu bar: swipe to the left R Vehicles with an Instrument Display in or right on the left-hand Touch Control. the Widescreen Cockpit: # To call up the menu or confirm the selec‐ R tion: press the left-hand Touch Control. R Vehicles with an Instrument Display in # To scroll through displays or lists in the the Widescreen Cockpit: menu: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. The menus can be called up from the menu bar in the multifunction display. # To call up the submenu or confirm the selection: press the left-hand Touch Control. # To exit the submenu: press the back button on the left. 218 Instrument Display and on-board computer

If you are browsing a submenu and you press the displays deviates from those displayed Adjusting the instrument lighting and hold the back button on the left, the menu here. bar appears. Further displays in the multifunction display: Z Gearshift recommendation (→ page 154) Displays in the multifunction display ë Active Parking Assist activated é Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated ¯ Cruise control (→ page 175) ç Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 177) a Active Steering Assist (→ page 183) è ECO start/stop function ë HOLD function (→ page 186) _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (→ page 126)

1 Outside temperature Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: Detected instructions and traffic signs (→ page 206). 2 Drive program # Turn brightness control 1 up or down. 3 Transmission position The lighting of the Instrument Display and in 4 Time the controls in the vehicle interior is adjus‐ ted. 5 Display section % Vehicles with the Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cockpit: The position of Instrument Display and on-board computer 219

Menus and submenus Calling up the Assistance graphic display Functions in the Service menu of the on- On-board computer: board computer , On-board computer: % Vehicles with the instrument display in , the Widescreen Cockpit: When you have # the design set to , you can view To select the function: swipe upwards or the assistance graphic in the left-hand por‐ downwards on the left-hand side of Touch tion of the instrument display. Control. # The following displays are available from the Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. Assistance graphic menu: Functions in the menu: R Assistance graphic R Message memory (→ page 402) R Attention level (→ page 205) R : # To switch between the displays: swipe - Checking tire pressure with the tire pres‐ upwards or downwards on the left-hand side Status displays in the Assistance graphic: sure monitoring system (→ page 366) of Touch Control. - Restarting the tire pressure monitoring R é: ATTENTION ASSIST deactivated system (→ page 367) R æ: Active Brake Assist deactivated R : calling up the service due R Light lane markings: Active Lane Keeping date (→ page 326) Assist activated R Green lane markings: Active Lane Keeping Assist active 220 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R Gray radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot When gliding mode is active (→ page 154), Assist activated is displayed instead of the cur‐ R Green radar waves next to vehicle: Blind Spot rent fuel consumption. Assist active A recuperation display is also available for R Display of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC certain engines. If there is only a small (→ page 177) amount of fuel left in the fuel tank, the dis‐ play shows a vehicle being refueled instead of the approximate range. Calling up displays in the Trip menu R ECO display (→ page 150) On-board computer: R Trip computer and , Example: standard display R Digital speedometer % 1 Trip distance Vehicles with an instrument display in % the Widescreen Cockpit: When you have Vehicles with an Instrument Display in 2 Total distance the Widescreen Cockpit: The digital speed‐ the design set to , you can view information on the journey in the left-hand ometer only appears in the and area of the instrument display. designs. # To select a display: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand side of Touch Control. Displays in the menu: R Standard display R Range and current fuel consumption Instrument Display and on-board computer 221

view for the instrument display Calling up navigation instructions in the on- (→ page 216). board computer You can reset the values of the following func‐ On-board computer: tions: , R Trip distance R Trip computer "From start" and "From reset" R ECO display # To select the function to be reset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand side Example: trip computer of Touch Control. 1 Total distance # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. 2 Driving time # Select . 3 Average speed # 4 Average fuel consumption Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. If you press and hold the left-hand side of Touch Example: no change of direction announced 1 Distance to the next destination Resetting values in the Trip menu of the on- Control, the function will be reset immediately. board computer 2 Estimated arrival time 3 Distance to the next change of direction On-board computer: 4 Current road , % The spelling may differ in the main menu dis‐ played. Therefore, observe the menu over‐ 222 Instrument Display and on-board computer

R or : a new # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. route is calculated. Route guidance is started. R : the road is unknown, e.g. If route guidance has already been activated, newly built roads. a request will appear asking whether you R : no route could be calculated to wish to end the current route guidance. the selected destination. # Select . R : the map for the current location is # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. not available. Route guidance is started. R : you have Example: change of direction announced reached the area of destination. 1 Road to which the change of direction leads R O: you have reached the destination or an 2 Distance to the change of direction intermediate destination. 3 Change-of-direction symbol # To exit the menu: press the back button on 4 Recommended lane and new lane during a the left. change of direction (white) Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐ 5 Possible lane tem: You can also start the navigation to one of 6 Lane not recommended (dark gray) the recent destinations in the menu: # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. Further possible displays in the menu: # To select the destination: swipe upwards or R downwards on the left-hand side of Touch : display of direction of Control. travel and road currently being traveled on. Instrument Display and on-board computer 223

Selecting radio stations using the on-board # To select a radio station: swipe upwards or Playing back media using the on-board com‐ computer downwards on the left-hand side of Touch puter Control. On-board computer: On-board computer: , Selecting the frequency range or station pre‐ , set # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. # To select the frequency range/station preset: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control.

1 Frequency range 1 Media source 2 Station 2 Current track and track number 3 Name of track 3 Name of artist 4 Name of artist 4 Name of album When you select a station in the presets, the # To change tracks in the active media preset appears next to the station name. When source: swipe upwards or downwards on the you select a saved station in the frequency left-hand side of Touch Control. range, an asterisk appears next to the station name. 224 Instrument Display and on-board computer

Changing the media source traffic situation. This could also cause you to # If there are multiple telephone numbers # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. lose control of the vehicle. saved to an entry: swipe upwards or down‐ # # wards on the left-hand side of Touch Control To select a media source: swipe upwards Only operate this equipment when the to select the desired telephone number. or downwards on the left-hand side of Touch traffic situation permits. # Control. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the The telephone number is dialed. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the The following displays may appear instead of the equipment with the vehicle stationary. telephone numbers dialed: Dialing a telephone number using the on- R board computer : the application is starting. When telephoning, you must observe the legal When a Bluetooth® connection to the mobile Requirement: requirements for the country in which you are phone is not established, the menu for R Mobile phone connected to the multimedia currently driving. authorizing and connecting a mobile phone is system Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys‐ displayed in the multimedia system tem: the most recent telephone connections (→ page 283). On-board computer: (dialed, received and missed calls) are displayed R , : the call list is being upda‐ in the menu. ted. # To select the telephone number: swipe & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ R : the contacts from the upwards or downwards on the left-hand side mobile phone or from a storage medium are mation systems and communications of Touch Control. equipment being imported. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. If you operate information and communica‐ If there is only one telephone number Accepting/rejecting a call tion equipment integrated in the vehicle saved to an entry: the telephone number is When you receive a call, a message appears in when driving, you will be distracted from the selected. the Head-up Display . Instrument Display and on-board computer 225

# Swipe upwards or downwards on the left- # To adjust the value: swipe upwards or Setting the design hand side of Touch Control and select 6 downwards on the left-hand side of Touch On-board computer (Accept) or ~ (Reject). Control. , # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. % This function is only available for vehicles The call may be accepted/rejected using the with a Widescreen Cockpit. 6 ~ or buttons on the steering wheel. The following designs can be selected: R Adjusting the Head-up Display settings in the R on-board computer R On-board computer: # , To select a design: swipe upwards or down‐ wards on the left-hand Touch Control. The following Head-up Display settings can be adjusted: # Press the left-hand Touch Control. R The Instrument Display is shown in the selec‐ ted design. R R Head-up Display # To select the setting: swipe upwards or Function of the Head-up Display downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. 1 Currently selected setting Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control. 2 Digital speedometer the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you 3 Traffic Sign Assist may fail to recognize dangers. 4 Navigation displays 226 Instrument Display and on-board computer

The Head-up Display projects information from In audio mode, the station name or track is tem‐ the navigation system and the driver assistance porarily shown when the active audio source is system above the cockpit into the driver's field being operated. of vision. System limitations Display elements The visibility is influenced by the following condi‐ tions: R Seat position R The positioning of the display image R Light conditions R Wet roads R Objects on the display cover R Polarization in sunglasses

1 Navigation messages 2 Current speed 3 Detected instructions and traffic signs 4 Set speed in the driver assistance system (e.g. cruise control) When you receive a call, a message appears in the Head-up Display 6 . Voice Control System 227

Operating safety This could also cause you to lose control of Operation the vehicle. & Operating the multifunction steering wheel WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐ The Voice Control System is operational approx‐ mation systems and communications cle is stationary. equipment imately thirty seconds after the ignition is switched on. If you operate information and communica‐ For your own safety, always observe the follow‐ tion equipment integrated in the vehicle ing points when operating mobile communica‐ when driving, you will be distracted from the tions equipment and especially your voice con‐ traffic situation. This could also cause you to trol system: lose control of the vehicle. R Observe the legal requirements for the coun‐ # Only operate this equipment when the try in which you are driving. traffic situation permits. R While driving, only operate mobile communi‐ # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the cations equipment and your voice control vehicle whilst paying attention to road system when the traffic conditions permit it. and traffic conditions and operate the You may otherwise be distracted from the equipment with the vehicle stationary. traffic conditions and cause an accident, injuring yourself and others. 1 8 Switches the sound off/on (ends the & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ R Do not use the voice control system in an Voice Control System) ating mobile communication equipment emergency as your voice can change and 2 ó Starts the Voice Control System while the vehicle is in motion your telephone call can be unnecessarily 3 6 Makes/accepts a call delayed. 4 ~ Rejects/ends a call (ends the Voice If you operate communication equipment R integrated in the vehicle when driving, you Familiarize yourself with the voice control Control System) will be distracted from the traffic situation. system functions before starting the journey. 228 Voice Control System

5 W Increases the volume Operable functions R Application-specific voice commands are only available for the active application. 6 X Decreases the volume You can use the Voice Control System to operate the following equipment regardless of the fea‐ Voice prompting tures: R Telephone # To start or continue a dialog: press the ó button on the multifunction steering R Text messages wheel. R Navigation You can say a voice command after an R Address book acoustic signal. R Radio # To correct an entry: say the R voice command. Audio (memory card, Media Interface, USB and Bluetooth® audio) # To select an entry from the selection list: 1 Global voice commands R Vehicle say the line number or the contents. 2 Application-specific voice commands # To browse the selection list: say the On the display next to the active application, or voice command. Types of voice commands examples of global voice commands and the cor‐ # To interrupt the dialog: say the voice A distinction is made between the following responding application-specific voice commands command. voice commands: are displayed on an autocue. This makes entry # To cancel the dialog: say the voice R Global voice commands can be said at any easier and supports interactive operation. The command or press the 8 button on the time and regardless of the current applica‐ list can be scrolled or it can be operated by multifunction steering wheel. tion, e.g. the , or speech or the controller/touchpad. # To cancel the dialog: say the voice voice commands. command. Voice Control System 229

Entering numbers R Current application: push the ó rocker If an address book entry voice tag is not rec‐ switch on the multifunction steering wheel ognized: Entering numbers: up and say the voice command. R Only create sensible address book entries in R The numbers allowed are to . R Continued dialog: say the voice com‐ the system/mobile phone, e.g. enter sur‐ R Telephone numbers can be entered as single mand during a voice dialog. name and first name in the correct field. digits. R A specific system: say the voice commands R Do not use any abbreviations, unnecessary for the desired system, e.g. . spaces or special characters. Changing the language setting If a station list entry is not recognized: You can change the language of Voice Control Speech quality improvement R Say the voice command. System via the system language settings. If the set system language is not supported by Voice If Voice Control System does not understand you: Control System, English will be selected. Essential voice commands R Only operate Voice Control System from the Voice Control System is available in English, Switch voice commands French, Portuguese and Spanish. driver's seat. R Say the voice commands coherently and Switch voice commands can be used to open clearly, but do not exaggerate the words. certain applications. The voice command selec‐ Using Voice Control System effectively R tion can be used regardless of the application Avoid loud noises, e.g. the blower, that cause that is currently active. Audible help functions interference while making a voice command You receive information and help for: entry. R R Optimal operation: say the Say the voice tag with the same intonation when creating voice tags. voice command. 230 Voice Control System

Voice command Function To switch to navigation mode To switch to map display To switch to address book To switch to telephone mode To switch to text messages To switch to radio mode To switch to media mode To switch to USB To switch to memory card To start a Mercedes-Benz online application. The application must be called up by touch once prior to use. To switch to Mercedes-Benz Apps To switch to Internet mode Voice Control System 231

Voice command Function To switch to vehicle settings To switch to system settings

Navigation voice commands Using navigation voice commands, you can enter POIs or conventional addresses as well as directly change important navigation settings.

Voice command Function Universal search for destinations of all types. A search is also performed in the address book con‐ tacts, in the navigation database and on the Internet (POIs). The order of the details, e.g. city, street or house number, can be variably selected. Destination entry in a desired country, e.g. address in France Starts navigation to home address Starts navigation to your workspace Destination entry for a POI, e.g. the POI Brandenburg Gate. A search is also performed in the navi‐ gation database and on the Internet. Conducts a POI search on the Internet only 232 Voice Control System

Voice command Function Destination entry to a contact in the address book Enters a country/city/district/street/intersection/house number/ZIP code Searches for nearby restaurants, parking spaces, rest areas with rest rooms and gas stations Selects a destination from the list of last entered destinations Switches route guidance to another route Starts route guidance after entering a valid destination Cancels route guidance Voice Control System 233

Voice command Function Switches the route guidance voice output on/off Switches the traffic map on/off Switches the POI symbols display on the map on/off

Telephone voice commands You can use the telephone voice commands to make phone calls or search through the address book.

Voice command Function Makes a phone call. All address book names are available. Searches for and displays a contact. All address book names are available. Displays the last call Selects the last phone number dialed 234 Voice Control System

Radio voice commands Radio voice commands can also be used when the radio application is running in the back‐ ground.

Voice command Function To call up receivable or saved stations To enter a frequency directly To switch to the next available station To save a station in the station list To display the names of all receivable stations To listen to the names of all receivable stations To switch the traffic information service on/off To switch the current station information on/off Voice Control System 235

Media player voice commands Media player voice commands can also be used when the media player is running in the back‐ ground.

Voice command Function The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐ ing the search. The names of all available tracks, albums, artists, composers, genres or playlists are accepted dur‐ ing the search. 236 Voice Control System

Voice command Function Available albums, artists, composers, genres, tracks or playlists are searched for. To select the next track To select the previous track To switch the random track list on/off

Message voice commands Text messages can be created, edited and lis‐ tened to using the message voice commands. Voice Control System 237

Voice command Function To create a message. All address book names are available. To reply to a message To forward a message

Vehicle voice commands You can use the vehicle voice commands to directly call up the corresponding menus for the vehicle settings.

Voice command Function To display ambient light settings To display the blue ambient light To show display settings To display assistance settings To display fragrancing settings To display energy flow settings To display ionization settings 238 Voice Control System

Voice command Function To display climate control settings To switch on the automatic climate control settings on the driver's side To display light settings To display massage settings To switch on the massage function for the driver's seat To switch off the massage function for the driver's seat To display the outside temperature To display engine data To display seat adjustment settings To set the seat heater for the front passenger seat to level 2 To display consumption To display vehicle data Multimedia system 239

Overview and operation 6 Main functions button group (→ page 242) brightness is initially reduced automatically. The 7 Touchpad media display may then switch off completely for Overview of the multimedia system a while. 8 Volume control % Adjusts volume and switches the sound If you are wearing polarized sunglasses, it on/off may be difficult to read the media display. 9 Button Ü Switches multimedia system on/off Central control elements overview A Controller

Notes on the media display

* NOTE Scratching of the display The display has a highly sensitive, high-gloss surface. There is a risk of it becoming scratched. Avoid touching the display. Observe the notes on cleaning. 1 Touch Control 1 Switches the sound on or off 2 Controller 2 Decreases the volume Observe the notes on caring for the interior 3 Touchpad 3 Increases the volume (→ page 338). 4 Touch Control Automatic temperature-controlled switch- 5 Media display off feature: if the temperature is too high, the 240 Multimedia system

Touch Control # To call up the menu list/favorites: hold Operating the controller Operating Touch Control button 2. # To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. Setting the sensitivity for Touch Control Multimedia system: , . . # Select , or .

1 % button, to return to the previous dis‐ # To select a menu item: swipe up, down, left play (press briefly), to call up the main func‐ or right on Touch Control 1. tions and favorites (press and hold) 2 ò # Press Touch Control 1. button, to call up main functions and favorites # To open a list: press Touch Control 1. 3 Controller # To close a list: press the 2 button. Controller operating options: Multimedia system 241

# Turn 3 left or right. Press briefly: returns to the previous display # Slide 1 left or right. Press and hold: calls up main functions # Slide 4 up or down. You can navigate in menus and lists via touch- # Slide 2 diagonally. sensitive surface 1 by using a single-finger swipe. # Press 7 briefly or press and hold. # To open or close lists: swipe left or right. Touchpad # To select the menu item: swipe up, down, left or right. Switching the touchpad on/off # Multimedia system: Press touchpad 1. # , . w To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. # Switch on O or off ª. Use the following functions with a two-finger Operating the touchpad swipe: Requirement: 1 Touchpad # To call up main functions and favorites: For vehicles with a controller: the touchpad is 2 Button © swipe down with two fingers. switched on (→ page 241). Calls up main functions and favorites # To zoom in and out of the map: move two 3 Button D fingers together or apart. Calls up the control menu of the last active # To call up the control menu of the last audio source active audio source: swipe up with two fin‐ 4 Button % gers. 242 Multimedia system

Setting the sensitivity for the touchpad # Swipe upwards using two fingers on the # 1 Button ß calls up navigation Multimedia system: touchpad. # 2 Button $ calls up the radio , . The control menu appears for the audio w # 3 Button Õ calls up media sources # source that was last selected. Select . # Use one finger to swipe up or down. # 4 Button % calls up the telephone # Select , or . Radio: the previous or next station is set. # 5 Button Ø sets vehicle functions # To set the pressure sensitivity: switch Media source: the previous or next track is # Alternatively: press the ò button on the on O or off ª. selected. controller, the touchpad or Touch Control. If the function is switched on O, a tap on # To hide the control menu: swipe down on The main functions are displayed. the touchpad is enough to select a menu the touchpad using two fingers. # Select a main function. item. Calling up lists and menus on the multimedia Handwriting recognition: switching the read- Main functions system aloud function on/off Multimedia system: Calling up the main functions Call up a list , . õ . # Call up a main function (→ page 242). # To open a list: swipe left on the touchpad. # Switch on # To close a list: swipe right on the touchpad. O ª or off . # To select a menu item: swipe up or down Selecting a station and track using the on the touchpad. touchpad # Press the touchpad. # Press the D button on the touchpad. or Multimedia system 243

Favorites Calling up favorites # Store the favorite at the desired position. # Press the button. If a favorite has already been added at this Overview of favorites © The main functions are displayed. position, it will be overwritten. Favorites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. It is possible to create 20 # Navigate downwards once. Example: adding your own favorite Navigating means: favorites in total. # Select . R swiping on the touchpad and Touch Con‐ The following functions are available: # Select . R trol add pre-defined favorites from the follow‐ # R sliding the controller Press and hold the © button until the ing categories (→ page 243): favorites are displayed. - Leaving the favorites menu # Store the favorite at the desired position. - # Press the © button. Renaming a favorite - Adding a favorite # Press the © button. - The main functions are displayed. Adding a pre-defined favorite - # Navigate downwards once. # Press the © button. - The main functions are displayed. # Select a favorite. R add your own favorites (→ page 243). # Navigate downwards twice. # Navigate downwards once. R rename a favorite (→ page 243). The Favorites menu appears. The Favorites menu appears. # R move a favorite (→ page 244). # Select . Select . R delete a favorite (→ page 244). The categories are displayed. # Enter the characters. R reset all favorites (→ page 244). # Select a category. # To confirm the entry: select ¡. The favorites are displayed. # Select a favorite. 244 Multimedia system

Moving a favorite # To restore all favorites: select . # To mute: press volume control 1. # Press the © button. A query appears. The 8 symbol appears in the status line. The main functions are displayed. # Select . You will also hear traffic announcements and # Navigate downwards once. The favorites are reset to the factory set‐ navigation announcements even when the # Select a favorite. tings. sound is muted. # Navigate downwards once. # To switch on: change the media source or The Favorites menu appears. Switching the sound on or off adjust the volume. # Select . # Move the favorite to the desired position. If a favorite has already been added at this position, it will be overwritten. Deleting a favorite # Press the © button. The main functions are displayed. # Navigate downwards once. # Select a favorite. # Navigate downwards once. The Favorites menu appears. # To delete: select . # Select . Multimedia system 245

Adjusting the volume Adjust this in the following situations: R writing a character on the touchpad R during a traffic announcement Character input can be started with a control R during a navigation announcement element and resumed with another. The volume of the navigation announce‐ # On Touch Control and controller: select a ment changes in accordance with the vol‐ character in the character bar. ume of the current media source. Depending on the destination entered, the R during a telephone call following is available: R when entering or exiting a parking space R the full set of characters while using Active Parking Assist R characters which are useful for the cur‐ or rent input string # Select . Other characters are grayed out. # # Select . On the touchpad: select a character in the character bar. # Select a volume setting. or # Set the volume. # Write the characters on the touch-sensitive % The volume can also be set on the multifunc‐ On the multimedia system surface of the touchpad. tion steering wheel (→ page 216). Handwriting recognition supports you by # Turn volume control 1. means of character suggestions and a read- The volume of the current radio or media Entering characters aloud function. source is set. The volume of other audio Examples of character entry: sources can be adjusted separately. Using the character input function The following functions are available: R Renaming a favorite R selecting a character in the character bar 246 Multimedia system

R Entering a POI or an address using free or Use the following entry functions: R The entered or selected character should be step-by-step search % To delete a character: press the control‐ read out: the handwriting recognition read- R Entering a web address ler. aloud function is switched on (→ page 242). Character input using the controller To delete an entry: press and hold the Example: renaming a favorite controller until the entire entry is deleted. Example: renaming a favorite Ä To switch to special characters and sym‐ bols. X To switch to upper-case or lower-case let‐ ters. B To change the language v To switch to character entry on the touch‐ pad. % The available editing functions depend on the editing task, the language set and the # Calling up the "Renaming a favorite" function character level. (→ page 243). # Calling up the "Renaming a favorite" function # To confirm the entry: select ¡. # To enter a character: use your finger to (→ page 243). write characters on the touchpad. # To enter a character: turn 3, slide 4 Example: entering a destination (navigation) The character is entered in the input line. If and press the controller. # Enter a POI or address (→ page 259). different interpretations are possible, charac‐ The character is entered in the input line. ter suggestions are displayed. Entering characters on the touchpad # To select a character suggestion: turn the Requirements: controller. R The touchpad is switched on (→ page 241). Multimedia system 247

# Resume character input. Adapting the ambient lighting for the style Switching the display off/on # To enter a space: swipe right when the cur‐ # Select . # Off: select . sor is located in the input line. Activate O or deactivate the function ª. # On: press a button, %, for example. # To delete a character: swipe left when the This function adjusts the ambient lighting for cursor is located in the input line. the selected display style. Display design # # Select . To confirm the entry: press the touchpad. Additional display area # To finish character entry: swipe upwards. Depending on the vehicle, various items of addi‐ # Select , or or tional information can be shown. The additional . # Press the % button. display area comprises the left-hand or right- hand third of the display. Time and date Example: entering a destination (navigation) # Select . # Setting the time and date automatically Enter a POI or address (→ page 259). The following display content can be selected: Multimedia system: R , . & System settings R # Deactivate ª . Display R The time and date are set automatically for R the selected time zone and daylight saving Configuring display settings time. Multimedia system: Display brightness % The correct time is required for the following , . G # Select . functions: R Designs # Select a brightness value. route guidance with time-dependent traf‐ fic guidance # Select . R calculation of expected time of arrival # Select , or . 248 Multimedia system

Setting the time zone Manually # Confirm changes when exiting the menu. Multimedia system: # Deactivate ª The date is set automatically via GPS. , . & . . # Select . Connectivity A list of countries is displayed. # Select or . # Select a country #. Switching transmission of the vehicle posi‐ Setting the time and date format Depending on the country, time zones are tion on/off displayed. Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . & . , . # Select a time zone. ö The time zone set is displayed after # Select . . # Set the date and time format #. # Switch the function on O or off ª. Setting summer time Setting the time manually The and ® Requirement: Bluetooth options cannot be selected in R The function is ® all countries. Bluetooth settings switched on. ® Multimedia system: Bluetooth technology is a standard for short- , . Multimedia system: range wireless data transfer up to approximately & ® , . & . 32.8 ft (10 m). You can use Bluetooth to con‐ Automatically nect your mobile phone to the multimedia sys‐ tem and use the following functions, for exam‐ # Switch on # Set the hours. ple: O or off ª. # Navigate to the right to set the minutes. R hands-free system with access to the follow‐ # Set the minutes. ing options: Multimedia system 249

- contacts (→ page 286) If Android Auto is active, a prompt appears ask‐ The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is ® - call lists (→ page 289) ing whether Bluetooth should be deactivated. made via a PIN. R - text messages # Select . WPS PBC ® R Internet connection Android Auto is closed and Bluetooth is The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is deactivated. made by pressing a button (push button). R ® listening to music via Bluetooth audio R (→ page 313) Security key Wi-Fi R transferring business cards (vCards) into the The connection to a secure Wi-Fi network is vehicle Wi-Fi connection overview made via a security key. You can use Wi-Fi to establish a connection with ® Setting up Wi-Fi Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue‐ a Wi-Fi network and to access the Internet or tooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. other network devices. Prerequisite R % Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not The following connection options are available: The device to be connected supports one of the three means of connection described. available in all countries. R Wi-Fi connection Activating/deactivating Bluetooth® The Wi-Fi connection is established to a Wi- Multimedia system: Fi-capable device, e.g. to the customer's , . ö Requirement: mobile phone or tablet PC. R Apple CarPlay™ is not active. Activating/deactivating Wi-Fi R Multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot # Switch on O or off ª. Multimedia system: Using this function, a tablet PC or notebook , . If is deactivated ª, communication via ö can be connected, for example. Wi-Fi is interrupted to all devices. This also # ® Activate O or deactivate ª Bluetooth . To establish a connection, you can use the fol‐ means that a connection to the HERMES lowing methods: communication module cannot be estab‐ lished. Functions such as dynamic route R WPS PIN 250 Multimedia system

guidance with Live Traffic Information are # Confirm the entry. Device has already been connected: then unavailable. Using a button: # To automatically connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. Connecting the multimedia system with a # Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. device via Wi-Fi # Activate O ¥ . # Select ¥ . This function is available if a HERMES communi‐ # # To connect: highlight a Wi-Fi network in the cation module is not installed. Select "Connect via WPS PBC" in the options list. on the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be # Select . # Press the WPS button on the device to be ¥ selected on the multimedia system and on the The connection is established again. These connected. device to be connected. functions are possible when the device has % The connection procedure may differ # Select in the multimedia system. already been connected to the Wi-Fi network. depending on the device. Follow the instruc‐ Using a security key: tions that are shown in the display. Further Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot information (see the manufacturer's operat‐ # Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. Multimedia system: ing instructions). # Select ¥ . , . ö # Select . # Have the security key displayed on the device Configuring the multimedia system as a Wi- # Select . to be connected (see the manufacturer's Fi hotspot operating instructions). The type of connection established depends on Using a WPS PIN: # Enter this security key on the multimedia sys‐ the device to be connected. The function must # Highlight a Wi-Fi network in the list. tem. be supported by the multimedia system and by # the device to be connected. The type of connec‐ Select ¥ . # Confirm the entry with ¡. The multimedia system generates an eight- tion established must be selected on the multi‐ % All devices support a security key as a digit PIN. media system and on the device to be connec‐ means of connection. ted. # Enter this PIN on the device to be connected. Multimedia system 251

# Select . # Select the vehicle from the device to be con‐ # To save a security key: select . # Highlight . nected. The vehicle is displayed with the When a new security key is saved, all existing SSID . Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If # To generate a WPS PIN: select ¥ # the Wi-Fi connections are being re-estab‐ . Enter the security key which is shown in the multimedia system display on the device to lished, the new security key must be entered. # Enter the PIN shown in the multimedia sys‐ be connected. tem display on the device to be connected # Managing COMAND Touch devices and confirm. Confirm the entry. # To connect via NFC: select # Connect via WPS PIN: select ¥ Requirements . R . The COMAND Touch App is installed on the # Activate NFC on the mobile device (see the external device (e.g. tablet) which is to be # Select . manufacturer's operating instructions). used as a Rear Seat Entertainment System # Enter the PIN that is shown on the external # unit. device's display on the multimedia system. Bring the mobile device into the NFC area of the vehicle (→ page 284). R Wi-Fi is activated (→ page 249) and the mul‐ # Select . # Select . timedia system is configured as a Wi-Fi Hot‐ # To connect by pressing a button: select The mobile device is now connected to the spot (→ page 250). ¥ . multimedia system hotspot via NFC. Multimedia system: # Press the push button on the device to be To generate a new security key: , . connected. # Select . # Select . Connecting a new device # Select . # # To connect via a security key: select Select . A connection will be established with the # Select . . newly created security key. A security key is displayed. 252 Multimedia system

# the connection request from the new # Select . announcements are not available in all lan‐ device. A prompt will appear asking whether you guages. If a language is not available, the naviga‐ A security key is displayed. would like to deauthorize the selected tion announcements will be in English. device. # Enter the security key in the external device. Setting the system language The device is authorized. # Select . Multimedia system: The device is deauthorized. Selecting a connected device , . # Select . # Set the language. Child safety lock The devices already connected are displayed. % If you are using Arabic map data, the text # Select . Multimedia system: information can also be shown in Arabic on as العربية The , . the navigation map. To do so, select message the language from the language list. Naviga‐ appears. Locking an external device tion announcements are then also made in # # Select . Select an external device. Arabic. Follow the instructions to authorize the # Select . selected device. The device connected via the COMAND Setting the distance unit Touch App is locked O or unlocked ª. De-authorizing the device Multimedia system: # Select the connected device from the list. , . % System language The # Select or . message Notes on the system language # appears. This function allows you to determine the lan‐ In the multifunction display of the Instrument guage for the menu displays and the navigation Display, switch the announcements. The selected language affects display on O. the characters available for entry. The navigation Multimedia system 253

Data import and export Requirements # Enter your four-digit PIN. R The vehicle is stationary. Data import/export function # Select a data storage medium. R The ignition is switched on or the vehicle has The data is exported. The data export may The following functions are possible: been started. take several minutes. R Transferring data from one system or vehicle R The SD card is inserted (→ page 306) or the to another system or vehicle. USB device is connected (→ page 308). Activating/deactivating PIN protection R Creating a backup copy of your personal data and loading it again. Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . R Protecting your personal data against unwan‐ , . # ted export with PIN protection. Select or . Setting the PIN You can either use an SD card or a USB storage Importing # Select . device as temporary storage. # Select a data storage medium. # Enter your four-digit PIN. % Please note that the NTFS file system is not A prompt appears asking whether you really # Enter your four-digit PIN again. supported. The FAT32 file system is recom‐ wish to overwrite the current data. If data If both PINs match, PIN protection is active. mended. originates from another vehicle, this is recog‐ nized during data reading. Changing the PIN Importing/exporting data The multimedia system is restarted once the Prerequisite * NOTE Data loss data has been imported. R A current PIN must be set. % Current vehicle settings can be edited after # Do not remove the data storage # Select . medium when data is being exported. the import. # Enter the current PIN. Exporting Mercedes-Benz is not liable for any loss of # Select . data. If PIN protection is activated, your PIN is reques‐ ted. # Set the new PIN. 254 Multimedia system

Activating PIN protection for data export Mercedes me connect online portal to reset the Selecting a user profile # Select . PIN protection. # Select or individual profile #. Confirm with the PIN. # Select . % Some settings from the user profile are only # Select . # Enter the single-use password. loaded when the vehicle is stationary or Activate O or deactivate ª the function. PIN protection is reset, and you can set a when the ignition is switched on. new PIN. Activating PIN protection for offline mode Automatic synchronization % Alternatively, you can have PIN protection # Each time the ignition is switched off or on, the Select . reset at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ Confirm with the PIN. individual user profiles are synchronized on the ter. multimedia system and on the server. This # Select . ensures that the latest user profiles are always Activate O or deactivate ª the function. User profile available. # Unblocking the PIN Setting a user profile Select . Requirements: Multimedia system: # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. R There is an Internet connection. , . g % For more information about importing/ R exporting user profiles (→ page 255). A Mercedes me account exists at http:// Displaying a user profile when starting www.mercedes.me. If this function is active, a prompt appears when Creating a user profile R The (→ page 254)service is starting the system asking which user profile to Multimedia system: activated. use. , . g . If the PIN has been entered incorrectly three # Select . times, the PIN will be blocked. You can have a # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. # Enter a name. single-use password sent to you via the # Select a. Multimedia system 255

Individual settings are saved in the user profile, The individual profiles are always collectively % The guest profile cannot be deleted or e.g.: imported or exported. renamed. R System settings # Import: select . R Settings in the TV tuner's channel list The Software update R Navigation and traffic information message appears. Information on software updates The multimedia system provides a message The settings differ depending on the vehicle # Select . when an update is available. equipment. User profiles are imported. # Depending on the source, you can perform vari‐ Importing/exporting user profiles Export: select . User profiles are exported. ous updates: Requirements: % Certain settings, such as address book Software update R There is an Internet connection . entries or previous destinations from the Source of the Update type R A Mercedes me account exists at http:// navigation system, are not exported. update www.mercedes.me. User profile options R The service is activated. InternetNavigation map, sys‐ Multimedia system: tem updates, Digital Multimedia system: , . g Operator's Manual , . g . # Highlight a profile. External storage Navigation maps # ¥ Select an option. medium, e.g. USB This function is not available in all countries. The following options are available: flash drive Only individual profiles can be imported or R exported. Software updates ensure your vehicle's technol‐ R ogy is always up-to-date. R 256 Multimedia system

In order to constantly improve the quality of our Performing a software update Searching for new Updates services you will receive future updates for your Requirement: Requirements multimedia system, the Mercedes-Benz mbrace® R An Internet connection is required for R Your vehicle does not have a built-in commu‐ services and your vehicle's communication mod‐ updates which are obtained online . nication module. ule. These will conveniently be sent to you via the mobile phone connection in your vehicle Multimedia system: R An Internet-enabled mobile phone is connec‐ ted to the multimedia system (→ page 283). and, in many cases, installed automatically. You , . can monitor the status of your updates at any # Select . time on the Mercedes me portal and find infor‐ Automatically The list of available updates is refreshed. mation about potential innovations. Requirement: # Select an update and start the update. Your advantages at a glance: R Your vehicle has a built-in communication The selected update is downloaded via the R conveniently receive software updates via module. connected mobile phone. the mobile phone network # Activate O . Activating the software update R the long-term quality and availability of Updates are performed. # Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is guaranteed Restart the system. The current status of the updates is dis‐ R keep your multimedia system and communi‐ played. Important system updates cation module up-to-date Important system updates may be necessary for Manually the security of your multimedia system's data. Further information about software updates can # Deactivate ª. Please install these updates, or else the security be found at http://me.mercedes-benz.com of your multimedia system cannot be ensured. # Select an update from the list and start the update. % If automatic software updates are activated, the system updates will be downloaded auto‐ matically (→ page 256). Multimedia system 257

As soon as an update is available for download, If all requirements are met, the update will be # Select a corresponding message appears on the multi‐ installed. The multimedia system cannot be # Enter the current PIN. media system display. operated while the update is being installed and The PIN is reset. vehicle functions are restricted. You have the following selection options: Or If errors should occur during the installation, the R # multimedia system automatically attempts to Select . The update will be downloaded in the back‐ restore the previous version. If restoration of the The current PIN stays the same after reset‐ ground. previous version is not possible, a symbol ting. R appears on the center console display. Please % If you have forgotten your PIN, an authorized Information about the pending update is dis‐ consult a qualified specialist workshop to Mercedes-Benz Center can deactivate your played. resolve the problem. PIN protection for you. R A prompt appears again asking whether you really wish to reset. The update can be downloaded manually at a Reset function # later time (→ page 256). Multimedia system: Select . The multimedia system is reset to the factory , . If the download is completed and the update is settings. ready for installation, you will be informed of this Personal data is deleted, for example: after the next ignition cycle, for example: R station presets Requirements for the installation: R connected mobile phones R The ignition is switched off. # R Notes and warnings have been read and Select . accepted. If PIN protection is activated, a prompt appears R The electric parking brake is applied. asking if you also wish to restore this to the fac‐ tory settings during a reset. 258 Multimedia system

% Navigation If a climate control setting is changed, a cli‐ , mate bar appears briefly. Switching navigation on

Multimedia system: Showing/hiding the navigation menu , Requirement: R The map shows the vehicle's current posi‐ tion.

# To show: swipe left on the touchpad or Touch Control. or # Slide the controller to the left. # Alternatively: press the ß button. # To hide: swipe right on the touchpad or The map appears and shows current vehicle Touch Control. position 1. or Multimedia system 259

# Slide the controller to the right. There are two available methods of destina‐ # To switch to character selection: press the % To show or hide lower menu levels, swipe or tion entry: % button. slide to the left or right as many times as R free search 2 or necessary. R search step-by-step 3 # Press the touchpad. # To delete an entry: select 4 % (if avail‐ Method 1: free search Destination entry able). # Enter a POI or address 2. The entries can R Press briefly: deletes the last character Entering a POI or address be made in any order. entered or the last suggestion adopted. Multimedia system: During destination entry, suggestions are R Press and hold: deletes the entire entry. , made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list. # To set the language: select 8. The following entries can be made, for exam‐ # Select a language. ple: % This function is useful for countries in which R city, street, house number several character sets are supported. An R street, city example is Russia, which uses Cyrillic and Latin characters. R ZIP code # To call up the online search function: R POI name select 6 . R POI category, e.g. Once an Internet connection is established, a R city, POI name list appears. It shows online destinations # Show the navigation menu. # To switch to handwriting recognition: related to the previous entry. # Select ª . select 5 v. Online destinations are provided by the Inter‐ The state or province in which the vehicle is # Write characters on the touchpad. net service provider. located is set 1. 260 Multimedia system

# Select the online destination. # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐ R to delete an entry or ted, navigate upwards. Entries in the field, for example, can The character bar is hidden. is # Enter an online destination in the input line. also be deleted by pressing £. Navi‐ highlighted. Additional entry fields, e.g. for gate to the left to do so. % Online search is not available in all coun‐ , are available. tries. R call up online search function (if availa‐ # Select . ble) % Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz The character bar appears. ® R calls up a list mbrace is activated. # Enter a city or ZIP code. # # To call up the list: press the % button. During destination entry, suggestions are To change the state/province: select the state or province. or made by the multimedia system. A selection of destinations appears in a list. # Enter a state or province. You only need to # If the top line of the character bar is highligh‐ enter the first character. ted, navigate upwards. The address can be entered in various orders, for example: # Select a state or province in the list. # Select a destination in the list. R , , # To change the country: select the country. # To adopt a destination: select # Enter a country. You only need to enter the 7. A street intersection may be entered, if If there are several listings for a destination, available. first character. a list appears. R , # Select a country in the list. # Select the destination. R , e.g. , # To adopt a destination: select The destination address is shown. % The functions described for the free search . may be used: If there are several listings for a destination, Method 2: search step-by-step a distance-orientated list appears. # Press the % button. R to switch to handwriting recognition # Select the destination. R or to switch to character selection The destination address is shown. Multimedia system 261

Selecting a POI # If intermediate destinations are set, these Example: setting the search position for the Multimedia system: can also be selected as the search position parking category during active route guid‐ , . after selecting . ance . Method 2 # Select , or # . Method 1 Select . The list shows the located POIs or opens an # Select a category. # Select a category. overview of the route destination after If route guidance is not active: the search # Select a POI. selecting . begins in the vicinity of the current vehicle # Route guidance is active: select the search # Select a POI. position. The list is sorted by distance in # ascending order. position prior to choosing a POI. Select : select an intermedi‐ # ate destination or destination. If route guidance is active: the search begins If intermediate destinations are set, these after selecting a search position. can also be selected as the search position Selecting previous destinations after selecting . The POIs show the following information: Multimedia system: , . R name of POI Alternatively filtering the display by POI # R linear distance to the POI Enter a search term in the ª line. # Select . R the direction of the linear distance to the The results list shows relevant POIs. # Select a destination suggestion or a destina‐ POI (arrow) is displayed when searching # for the vehicle's current position Select ¡. tion. The first POI in the list is highlighted. The destination address is shown. # Select a POI. # Select a POI. # Route guidance is active: select the search % If is switched on O, destina‐ position prior to choosing a POI. tion suggestions are displayed (→ page 272). 262 Multimedia system

# Alternatively: if a favorite has been saved Enter geo-coordinates # Select "Move map" in map menu 2 (→ page 272), select . Multimedia system: (→ page 276). # Select a favorite. , . # Swipe in any direction on Touch Control or The destination address is shown. . touchpad. Selecting a contact # Enter geo-coordinates as latitude and longi‐ or tude coordinates in degrees, minutes and # Slide the controller in any direction. Requirement: seconds. The map moves in the corresponding direc‐ R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ The map shows the position. tion under the crosshair. The more you move dia system (→ page 283). # Confirm the entry. your finger away from the starting position Multimedia system: # To calculate a route: select on the touchpad, the faster the map moves. # Press Touch Control, the controller or the , . . . touchpad. # If a route has already been created, select If several destinations are located around the # Select the contact. or crosshair, a list shows the available POIs and The contact details are displayed. . roads. # Select an address. Selecting from the map If a destination is located exactly on the # Alternatively, to filter the display by con‐ Multimedia system: crosshair, the destination address is dis‐ tacts: enter names or telephone numbers, , . Z . played. for example, into the search field. # Select a destination in the list. # Select ¡. # The destination address is shown. The first contact in the list is highlighted. Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full screen mode, press Touch Control, the con‐ Setting the map orientation to 2D or 3D # Select the contact. troller or the touchpad. # Highlight . # Select an address. The map menu appears. Multimedia system 263

# Press Touch Control, the touchpad or the # Alternatively, to filter the display by POI # Select an intermediate destination using controller. category: swipe down on Touch Control or ª during route guid‐ The map will be displayed in the selected the touchpad. ance. map orientation. or # Select Showing traffic messages in the vicinity of # Slide the controller down. after entering the destination. the map # Select a POI category. Calculating a route with intermediate desti‐ # Select . % allows personal POI symbols to nations The map appears. be selected (→ page 277). # Swipe left or right on the touchpad. Requirement: Entering an intermediate destination R Enter the destination and at least one inter‐ or mediate destination. # Slide the controller to the left or right. Prerequisite R The previous or next traffic incident is high‐ A destination is entered. Multimedia system: , . lighted on the map. Information on the traffic Multimedia system: incident is displayed. , . Showing POIs in the vicinity of the map # Select . # # The route is calculated with the set inter‐ Select . Select mediate destinations. # Swipe left or right on the touchpad. . Editing intermediate destinations or # Enter an intermediate destination as a POI or address (→ page 259). # Slide the controller to the left or right. Requirement: The previous or next POI is highlighted on the # Select an intermediate destination. R A destination is entered. map. The name or address is displayed. # Select . or 264 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: Starting an automatic gas station search # Method 2: if route guidance is activated, , . select or Requirement: R . The automatic gas station search is activated : the selected gas # To change the order of destinations: high‐ O (→ page 267). station is set as a new destination. The previ‐ light the destination or intermediate destina‐ Driving situation ous destinations and intermediate destina‐ tion. Route guidance is active. The fuel level in the tions are deleted. Route guidance to the gas # Select ¥ . fuel tank reaches the reserve fuel level. station begins. # Move the intermediate destination to the The : the desired position. message is selected gas station is set as the next inter‐ # Press Touch Control, the controller or the shown. mediate destination. Route guidance begins. touchpad. # Select . # If there are already four intermediate des‐ # To call up the map: highlight the destination The automatic gas station search begins. The tinations: select in the prompt. or intermediate destination. available gas stations along the route or in The selected gas station is entered into posi‐ the vicinity of the vehicle's current position tion 1 of the intermediate destinations menu. # Select ¥ . are displayed. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route # Move the map (→ page 277). # Select the gas station. guidance begins. # Select destination on the map (→ page 262). The address of the gas station is displayed. # To delete a destination: highlight a destina‐ # Method 1: if route guidance is not active, Route tion or intermediate destination. select . Calculating a route # Select ¥ . The selected gas station is set as the desti‐ nation. Route guidance begins. Requirement: R The destination has been entered. The desti‐ nation address is shown. Multimedia system 265

# Method 1: if route guidance is not active, # To display on the map: select ¥ . R select . # To call a telephone number: select ¥ A route with a quick journey time is cal‐ The route to the destination is calculated. . culated. The map shows the route. Route guidance R then begins. # To call up an Internet address: select (if available). # Method 2: if route guidance is activated, ¥ A route with a short driving distance is calculated. select or Selecting a route type . Multimedia system: can be : the selected des‐ , . À switched on O or off ª for these route tination address is set as a new destination. types. If is # Select . The previous destinations and intermediate switched on, destinations are deleted. Route guidance to # Select a route type. can be selected. the new destination begins. A route has already been created: the route The route types : the is calculated on the basis of the new route type. and selected destination address is set as the are not available in every country. next intermediate destination. Route guid‐ A route has not been created: the next route R ance begins. is calculated on the basis of the new route type. The route is calculated with the currently Taking alternative routes into consideration set route type. R # Select an alternative route (→ page 267). An economical route is calculated. The Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information Other menu functions journey time may be somewhat longer are taken into account. # To save the destination: select ¥ than for quicker routes. Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. . The symbol for the current vehicle posi‐ tion is displayed in green. R 266 Multimedia system

A prompt appears when a new route is The selected route options cannot always be This function is not available in all coun‐ detected with a shorter journey time implemented. Therefore, a route may include a tries. based on traffic reports. You can con‐ ferry, for instance, even though the avoid R tinue to use the current route or use the option is enabled. A message appears and you dynamic route instead. will hear a corresponding message. The multimedia system announces the names of the roads that will follow the Selecting route options Using carpool lanes upcoming change of direction. Multimedia system: # Select . This function is not available in all coun‐ , . . À # Select number. tries and languages. . When using carpool lanes, observe the appli‐ Displaying destination information Avoiding areas cable legal requirements as well as any con‐ ditions pertaining to when and where such Requirement: # Select (→ page 278). lanes may be used. Carpool lanes may only R A destination is entered. Avoiding highways, ferries, motorail trains, be used if certain conditions are met. Multimedia system: tunnels, unpaved roads These route options are not available in every , # Select O or deselect ª avoid option. country. # Select . Using toll roads Selecting notifications The following information is displayed: # Select . Multimedia system: R intermediate destinations and destination , # Select or or . . . The route can also include up to four The route takes into account roads that Z intermediate destinations. # require the payment of a usage fee (toll). Switch announcements on O or off ª. R Name, address R If is selected, toll roads are not taken into R Remaining driving distance account. R Time of arrival Multimedia system 267

Selecting an alternative route Driving situation : the Multimedia system: The selected service station is set as the next , . À message is shown. destination. Route guidance begins. # Select . # Select . The routes are displayed in accordance with The service station search starts. The availa‐ Route guidance the setting made in the route settings. ble service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are Notes on route guidance The currently selected route is shown with a displayed. Route guidance begins once a route has been dark blue line. calculated. # # Select a service station. Select an alternative route. The service station address is displayed. The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving rec‐ Switching the automatic gas station search # Method 1: if route guidance is not active, ommendations. on/off select . Multimedia system: The selected service station is set as a desti‐ Driving recommendations are: , . Z nation. Route guidance begins. R Navigation announcements # Switch on O or off ª. # Method 2: if route guidance is activated, R Route guidance displays Switched on O: when the fuel reserve level select or R Lane recommendations is reached, a prompt appears asking whether . you want to start searching for gas stations. : the selected If you do not follow the navigation announce‐ service station is set as a new destination. ments or if you leave the calculated route, a new Starting the automatic service station The previous destination and all intermediate route is calculated automatically. search destinations are deleted. Route guidance to Driving recommendations may differ from the Requirements the service station begins. actual road and traffic conditions if: R ATTENTION ASSIST and the R The route is diverted function are activated (→ page 206). 268 Multimedia system

R the direction of a one-way street has Notes on driving maneuvers The map appears in full-screen mode. changed R Announcement phase For this reason, you must always observe road The multimedia system announces the and traffic rules and regulations during your upcoming change of direction, e.g. by journey. announcing "Turn right in 300 feet (100 m)". The route may differ from the ideal route due to The display is split into two parts. The map is the following: displayed on the left; on the right, there is a R Roadworks detailed image of the intersection or a 3D image of the upcoming change of direction. R Incomplete digital map data R Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the immi‐ nent change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Now turn right". The display is split into two parts. The vehicle has successfully changed direc‐ tion when the light-colored bar on the right There are three phases when changing direction: drops down to 0 feet (0 meters) and the cur‐ R Preparation phase rent vehicle position symbol has reached the If there is enough time between the changes highlighted change-of-direction point. of direction, the multimedia system prepares When the change of direction is complete, you for the upcoming change of direction. A the map appears in full-screen mode. navigation announcement, e.g. "Prepare to % turn right", is issued. Changes of direction are also shown in the Instrument Display. Multimedia system 269

Information on lane recommendations R Recommended lane 1 destination Î. After this, route guidance is This display appears for multi-lane roads. In this lane, you will be able to complete both continued. If the digital map contains the relevant data, the the next change of direction and the one Switching navigation announcements on/off multimedia system can display lane recommen‐ after that. dations for the next two changes of direction. R Possible lane 2 Requirements: R a route has already been created. In this lane, you will only be able to complete R the next change of direction. route guidance is active. R Lane not recommended 3 # To switch off: press the 8 button on the In this lane, you will not be able to complete multifunction steering wheel during a naviga‐ the next change of direction without chang‐ tion announcement. ing lane. or # During the change of direction, new lanes may Press on the volume control to the right of be added. the controller during a navigation announce‐ % ment (→ page 244). Lane recommendations can also be dis‐ The played in the Instrument Display and in the message appears. Head-up Display. or Destination reached # Show the navigation menu (→ page 258). Once the destination is reached, you will see the # Exchequer flag Í. Route guidance is finished. Select ! . The symbol changes to #. 1 Recommended lane When an intermediate destination has been 2 Possible lane reached, you will see the intermediate destina‐ 3 Lanes not recommended tion flag with the number of your intermediate 270 Multimedia system

# To switch on: select # Adjusting the volume of navigation # Select . announcements . The current navigation announcement is # Requirements: Select . played. R a route has already been created. # Set the volume. % In the following situations, navigation R route guidance is active. announcements are switched on automati‐ Switching audio fadeout on/off during navi‐ cally: # Press the W or X button on the multi‐ gation announcements R A new route guidance is started. function steering wheel during a navigation # Select . R The route is recalculated. announcement. # Select õ . % You can access and add this function as a or # Select favorite under # Turn the volume control to the right of the . controller during a navigation announcement . # Switch (→ page 245). on O or off ª. Switching navigation announcements on/off % during a phone call In the following situations, the volume is raised to the minimum volume or lowered to Repeating navigation announcements # Select . the maximum volume: Requirements: # Select õ . R A new route guidance is started. R A route has already been created. # Select R The route is recalculated. R Route guidance is active. . % The minimum volume can be individually set Multimedia system: # Switch at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. , O ª on or off . # Alternatively: select . # Select ! . # Select õ . Multimedia system 271

# Select # . Multimedia system: The following displays appear when route guid‐ The current navigation announcement is , . À ance begins: repeated. # Select . R the message % You can access and add this function as a The route is recalculated. R a direction arrow showing the linear direction favorite under to the POI . Route guidance to an off-road destination Off-road destination: the destination is within When the vehicle is back on a road known to the Cancels route guidance the digital map. However, the map contains no multimedia system, route guidance continues as Requirements roads that lead to the destination. normal. R A route has already been created. You can enter off-road destinations on the map. Notes on the off-road status during route R Route guidance is active. Route guidance guides you for as long as possi‐ guidance ble with navigation announcements and displays Due to roadworks, for example, there may be dif‐ Multimedia system: on roads that are known to the multimedia sys‐ ferences between the data on the digital map , tem. and the actual course of the road. In suc h cases, # Select . Shortly before you reach the last known position the multimedia system will temporarily be on the map, you will hear the "Please follow the unable to locate the vehicle's current position on Continuing route guidance direction arrow" announcement. The display the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Requirements: shows a direction arrow and the linear distance The following displays appear when the vehicle R A route has already been created. to the destination. is off-road: R Route guidance is interrupted. Route guidance from an off-road location to R the message a destination R % If the journey was interrupted for less than 2 a direction arrow showing the linear direction Off-road position: the current vehicle position is to the POI hours, route guidance continues automati‐ located within the digital map on roads that are cally. not available. 272 Multimedia system

When the vehicle is back on a road known to the # Select "Move map" in map menu 2 # To save as "Home" address: select ¥ multimedia system, route guidance continues as (→ page 276). . normal. # Select a position on the map. # To save as "Work" address: select ¥ If multiple entries are available for a map . Destination position, a list appears. # To delete a single or all destinations: # Saving the current vehicle position Highlight the entry. select ¥ or . Multimedia system: # Select ¥ A prompt appears. , . # Select . The map position is saved to the "Previous # # To display destination information: select Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full destinations" memory. screen mode, press Touch Control, the con‐ ¥ . Editing the previous destinations troller or the touchpad. Using intelligent destination suggestions The map menu appears. Multimedia system: Multimedia system: # Select on the map menu (→ page 276). , . ¬ 1 , . Z . The current vehicle position is saved to the . "Previous destinations" memory. # Highlight one of the previous destinations. The navigation system learns the user habits of Storing a map position # To save as a favorite: select ¥ the driver. The most probable destinations are Multimedia system: . suggested. , The favorites are displayed. # Activate O . The map is in full-screen mode. # Move the favorite to the desired position. The destination suggestions are displayed in # Press Touch Control, the controller or the If a favorite has already been added at this the previous destinations and can be selec‐ touchpad. position, it will be overwritten. ted for route guidance. Multimedia system 273

# To not use the function: switch # Method 1: if route guidance is not active, Route guidance with current traffic reports select . off ª. Traffic information overview The route to the destination is calculated. # To delete destination suggestions: select Traffic reports are received using Live Traffic The map shows the route. Route guidance . Information and are used for route guidance. then begins. This service is unavailable in some countries. Using external destinations and routes # Method 2: if route guidance is active, select % External destinations and routes can be received or There may be differences between the traffic from the following sources: . reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions. R Mercedes-Benz Apps : the received des‐ tination address is set as a new destination. Important information on Live Traffic Informa‐ R door-to-door navigation with Companion App The previous destinations and intermediate tion: (USA) destinations are deleted. Route guidance to R Current traffic reports are received via the R via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz the new destination begins. Internet connection. Customer Assistance Center : the R The traffic situation is updated at short, regu‐ A prompt appears on the media display. received destination address is set as the lar intervals. Received destinations and routes are saved in next new destination. Route guidance begins. R The status of the service subscription can be the previous destinations. # If a route is received: select displayed (→ page 274). # If a destination is received: select and or continue with method 1 or 2. . Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Daimler AG. The data is immediately ren‐ or Route guidance starts from the selected position. dered anonymous by Daimler AG and forwarded # If a destination was received with photo to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traf‐ information, select . fic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are Route guidance starts. sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor 274 Multimedia system for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the # To display manually: select Multimedia system: quality of the traffic reports. . , . Z . If you do not wish to transmit your vehicle posi‐ Depending on the status, one of the following tion, you can have this service deactivated at an messages appears: # Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R The period of validity for the subscription screen mode, press Touch Control, the con‐ Displaying subscription information is displayed. troller or the touchpad. R The subscription has expired. The map menu appears. Requirement: # O R The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic % The subscription can be extended: Activate º. Information. R At an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center The traffic map can show the following infor‐ mation: Multimedia system: R Via an MB Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center R traffic incidents, for example: , . Z - roadworks The subscription expiry date is automatically dis‐ Displaying the traffic map - road blocks played: Requirements: - warning messages R One month before the expiry date. R For Live Traffic Information: the vehicle is R One week before the expiry date. equipped with a communication module fea‐ The symbols for traffic incidents are dis‐ turing an activated, integrated SIM card. R On the expiry date. played in color (on the route) or gray (off When the vehicle is started, the communica‐ the route). tion module automatically establishes an R traffic flow information: Internet connection. Traffic information is made available shortly afterwards. - traffic jam (red line) - slow-moving traffic (yellow line) - free-flowing traffic (green line) Multimedia system 275

R display for traffic delays on the route last‐ Activating free flow and traffic display R reason for the traffic report, e.g. traffic ing at least one minute # Activate O and jam R warning message symbols: . R warning message (highlighted in red) - symbol Ô % The traffic delay is displayed for the current # To select a traffic report symbol: select - additional road safety note when route. Traffic delays lasting one minute or or . approaching a traffic incident, e.g. the longer are taken into consideration. # Press Touch Control, the controller or the end of a traffic jam Displaying details touchpad. The traffic report details are displayed. If the vehicle approaches a danger # Display the traffic map (→ page 274). area on the route, a warning message # Issuing hazard alerts is displayed on the map. A warning Move the map (→ page 277). # Method 1: when a traffic report symbol is Multimedia system: message may also be issued , (→ page 275). under the crosshair, press Touch Control, the controller or the touchpad. . Z . Displaying traffic incidents The traffic report details are displayed. # Activate O . Multimedia system: # Method 2: press Touch Control, the control‐ Warning messages are issued and tailbacks , . Z . ler or the touchpad. which pose a risk are announced. # Select . # Activate O . The map shows the traffic report symbols in Roadworks, road blocks, local area reports the vicinity. (e.g. fog) and warning messages are dis‐ Traffic report information is displayed in the played. status line: R traffic report symbol 276 Multimedia system

Map and compass • To filter the display of POIs in the vicinity If online information is available, fuel prices and the availability of parking spaces in parking Map and compass overview according to POI category 5 To switch the display of personal POI sym‐ garages are displayed, for example. bols on the map on or off % Online information is not available in all 6 To switch one of the following displays on or countries. off depending on the equipment: % Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz • Weather information mbrace® is activated. • Satellite map If is activated in Traffic Sign • Traffic incidents Assist (→ page 208), speed limits and overtak‐ 7 To switch the traffic map display on or off ing restrictions are displayed on the map. % The map and satellite images are shown in globe Company logos displayed on the map are projection. This allows for a realistic map display trademarks of the respective companies and in all map scales. The map uses elevation model‐ used solely for the purpose of indicating the ing. locations of these companies. The use of such logos on the map does not indicate Depending on the map data, important buildings approval of, support of or advertising by in many cities are depicted realistically on the these companies for the navigation system map in small map scales (1/32 mi (20 m), itself. 1 To save the current vehicle position 1/16 mi (50 m)). Other buildings are shown as models. Setting the map scale 2 To move the map % Multimedia system: 3 To select the map orientation and map view You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale (→ page 252). , 4 To select the function depending on the equipment: The map is shown. • To transmit a hazard alert (Car-to-X) Multimedia system 277

# To zoom in: swipe down on Touch Control. # Select "Move map" in map menu 2 R The map is aligned in 2D and dis‐ or (→ page 276). played in the direction of travel. # Swipe in any direction on Touch Control or R # Turn the controller counter-clockwise. : the 3D map view is aligned to the touchpad. direction of travel. or or # Selecting POI symbols Move two fingers apart on the touchpad. # Slide the controller in any direction. # To zoom out: swipe up on Touch Control. Multimedia system: The map moves in the corresponding direc‐ , . . or tion under the crosshair. The more you move Z # Turn the controller clockwise. your finger away from the starting position on the touchpad, the faster the map moves. POIs include gas stations and hotels, for exam‐ or ple. These can be displayed as symbols on the # Selecting the map orientation Move two fingers together on the touchpad. map. Not all POIs are available everywhere. Multimedia system: % You can set the unit of measurement for the # Select . , . Z . map scale (→ page 252). The # dot indicates the current setting. displays symbols of predefined cat‐ Moving the map # Multimedia system: Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full egories on the map. , . . screen mode, press Touch Control or the Z touchpad. allows you to personally select The map menu appears. the symbols for the available categories. # Alternatively: if the map is displayed in full # In map menu 3 , select , or switches the display off. screen mode, press Touch Control, the con‐ (→ page 276). # Select the setting. troller or the touchpad. R The map is aligned in 2D and displayed # : select categories. The map menu appears. so that north is up. The POI symbols of the selected categories are displayed O or not displayed ª. 278 Multimedia system

Selecting text information switches the display off. Avoiding an area Multimedia system: You can define areas along a route that you Displaying the next intersecting street , . Z . would like to avoid. Requirement: Avoiding a new area R Route guidance is not active. # Select text information. Multimedia system: shows the street you are cur‐ Multimedia system: , . À rently driving on at the bottom of the display. , . Z . . When the map is moved, the street name, # Switch on O or off # Select . the POI name or the area name appears ª. # Variant 1: select . under the crosshair. If the function is switched on O, the name # Move the map. displays the following infor‐ of the next intersecting street will be dis‐ mation: played at the upper edge of the display. # Method 2: select . R # longitude and latitude Displaying the map version Enter the address. R elevation Multimedia system: # Select . The elevation shown may deviate from , . Z The map appears. # To display an area: press Touch Control, the the actual elevation. # Select . R number of satellites from which a signal touchpad or the controller. # Select . can be received A red rectangle appears. This designates the % Information about new versions of the digital area that should be avoided. When the map is moved, this information map can be obtained from an authorized # does not appear. To change the size of the area: swipe up or Mercedes-Benz Center. down on Touch Control or the touchpad. displays the current climate or control settings. Multimedia system 279

# Slide the controller up or down. # Swipe up or down on Touch Control or the Deleting one or all areas The map scale is enlarged or reduced and touchpad. Multimedia system: changes the size of the area. or , . À # To set the area: press Touch Control, the # Slide the controller up or down. . . touchpad or the controller. # The area is entered into the list. Press Touch Control, the touchpad or the # Highlight an area in the list. controller. # Select ¥ or ¥ . Changing an area Multimedia system: Taking the area for the route into account # Confirm the prompt with . # One or all areas are deleted. , . À Avoid O an area in the list. . . Route guidance active: a new route is calcu‐ Updating the map data lated. # Highlight an area in the list. No route has been created: the setting is car‐ Updating at the authorized Mercedes-Benz # Select ¥ . ried over to the next route guidance. Center The digital maps generated by the map software Moving the area on the map The route can include an area that is to be become outdated in the same way as conven‐ # Swipe in any direction on Touch Control or avoided in the following cases: tional road maps. Optimal route guidance can touchpad. R the destination is located in an area that only be provided by the navigation system in or is to be avoided conjunction with the most up-to-date map data. # Slide the controller in any direction. R there is no sensible alternative route Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from an authorized Changing the size of the area Mercedes-Benz Center. # Press Touch Control, the touchpad or the There you can receive updates to the digital controller. map. 280 Multimedia system

Map data Displaying the compass % The automatically selected map scale can be Your vehicle is supplied with map data at the fac‐ Multimedia system: changed manually. After a few seconds, this tory. Depending on the country, map data for , . À is automatically reset. your region is either pre-installed or the map # data is supplied on a data storage medium. You Select . Displaying the satellite map do not require an activation code for the map The compass display shows the following Multimedia system: data which is provided with your vehicle. information: , . Z . If the map data on your vehicle has been instal‐ R the current direction of travel with bear‐ led at the factory and you wish to reinstall it, you ing (360 degree format) and compass Satellite maps can be displayed in map scales do not need to enter the activation code. direction from 2 mi (2 km). An activation code is required for purchased R longitude and latitude coordinates in # Switch on O or off ª. map data. degrees, minutes and seconds By doing so, satellite maps in map scales The activation code: R height (rounded) from 2 mi (2 km) to 10 mi (10 km) can be switched off. R can be used in one vehicle R number of GPS satellites from which a % R is non-transferable signal can be received Satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries. R has six digits Setting the map scale automatically Multimedia system: # Alternatively: switch the map menu on O or Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz , . off ª. Center if you are experiencing the following Z problems: The map scale is set automatically depending on R the multimedia system does not accept the your driving speed. activation code For journeys in cities with detailed city models, a R you have lost the activation code map view from the driver's perspective is used. # Switch on O or off ª. Multimedia system 281

Displaying weather information Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual Telephone Multimedia system: (navigation) Telephony , . Z . Information on navigation Multimedia system: Telephone menu overview # Switch on O or off ª. , . Z . When the function is switched on O, current weather information is displayed on the navi‐ # Select the topic. gation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. This function is not available in all countries. # Alternatively: in map menu 6 switch on O or off ª (→ page 276). % Weather information is not available in all countries. % Requirement (USA): Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is activated.

1 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone 2 Signal strength of the mobile phone network 282 Multimedia system

3 Battery status of the connected mobile Bluetooth® profile overview Notes on telephony phone Bluetooth® profile Function & 4 ¢ (telephone ready) or w (call active) WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ of the mobile phone ating integrated communication equip‐ 5 Contacts (→ page 286) ment while the vehicle is in motion 6 Call list (→ page 289) PBAP (Phone Book Contacts are auto‐ matically displayed in 7 To connect the device (→ page 283) Access Profile) If you operate communication equipment the multimedia sys‐ integrated in the vehicle when driving, you 8 Text messages tem will be distracted from the traffic situation. 9 Active call This could also cause you to lose control of A Options MAP (Message Message functions the vehicle. Access Profile) can be used Symbols 1 to 4 are not shown until after a # Only operate this equipment when the mobile phone has been connected to the multi‐ Telephony operating modes overview traffic situation permits. media system. The symbols depend on your Depending on your equipment, the following tel‐ # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the mobile phone and your mobile phone network ephony operating modes are available: vehicle whilst paying attention to road provider. and traffic conditions and operate the R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ equipment with the vehicle stationary. dia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 283). & WARNING Risk of distraction from oper‐ ating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you will be distracted from the traffic situation. Multimedia system 283

This could also cause you to lose control of The following situations can lead to the call Multimedia system: the vehicle. being disconnected while the vehicle is in , . á motion: Only operate this equipment when the vehi‐ Searching for a mobile phone cle is stationary. R There is insufficient network coverage in the area. # Select . You must observe the legal requirements for the R You move from one GSM or UMTS transmit‐ # Select . country in which you are currently driving when ter/receiver area (cell) into another and no The available mobile phones are displayed. If operating mobile communication equipment in communication channels are free. a new mobile phone is found, it is indicated the vehicle. R The SIM card used is not compatible with the by the á symbol. Further information can be obtained from an network available. Connecting a mobile phone (authorization authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http:// R using Secure Simple Pairing) www.mercedes-benz.com/connect. A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at # To improve voice quality, the multimedia system Select the mobile phone. the same time. A code is displayed in the multimedia system supports telephone calls in HD Voice®. Connecting a mobile phone (Bluetooth® tel‐ and on the mobile phone. In order to use this function, the mobile phones # If the codes match: confirm the code on and the mobile phone network provider of the ephony) the mobile phone. person you are calling must support HD Voice®. Requirements: Depending on the quality of the connection, the R Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone Connecting a mobile phone (authorization by voice quality may fluctuate. (see the manufacturer's operating instruc‐ entering a passkey) tions). # Select the mobile phone. R Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia # Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi‐ system (→ page 249). nation as a passkey. 284 Multimedia system

# On the multimedia system: enter the pass‐ Multimedia system: key and select a. , . á # On the mobile phone: enter the passkey # In the device list, select a mobile phone again and confirm. which has already been authorized. % Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorized % Only one mobile phone can be connected at on the multimedia system. any one time. The connected mobile phone Authorized mobile phones are reconnected is displayed at the top of the list. automatically. Using the mobile phone with Near Field Com‐ Disconnecting a mobile phone (deauthoriz‐ munication (NFC) ing) Multimedia system: Requirements: R NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see , . á the manufacturer's operating instructions) # Select the mobile phone from the device list. R the mobile phone's screen is switched on # Select ¥. and unlocked (see the manufacturer's oper‐ # To connect a mobile phone: open stowage # Select . ating instructions) compartment cover 1. # Select . NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer. # Place the NFC area of the mobile phone (see Switching mobile phones manufacturer's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2 on the inside of the cover. Requirement: R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ The mobile phones are authorized media system. (→ page 283). Multimedia system 285

# To change mobile phones: place the NFC Setting the reception and transmission vol‐ Starting/stopping mobile phone voice recog‐ area of the mobile phone (see manufactur‐ ume nition er's operating instructions) on NFC logo 2. Requirement: Requirements: If the mobile phone has already been author‐ R R ized on the multimedia system, it is now con‐ A mobile phone is authorized (→ page 283). the mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ media system (→ page 283). nected. Multimedia system: If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐ , . á Starting mobile phone voice recognition timedia system for the first time, it is connec‐ This function ensures optimal language quality. # Press and hold the ó button on the multi‐ ted after confirming the mobile phone # function steering wheel for more than one instructions (see the manufacturer's operat‐ Highlight the mobile phone in the device list. second. ing instructions). # Select ¥. You can use mobile phone voice recognition. # Further information can be found at: http:// Select or Stopping mobile phone voice recognition www.mercedes-benz.com/connect . # Press the 8 or ~ button on the multi‐ Further functions without having a mobile phone # Set the volume. function steering wheel. authorized on the multimedia system (see manu‐ facturer's operating instructions): Further information on the recommended recep‐ R tion and transmission volume: http:// Calls transferring a URL to be viewed in the multi‐ www.mercedes-benz.com/connect media system Using the telephone R setting up the vehicle's Wi-Fi access data via Adjusting the call and ringtone volume Multimedia system: Multimedia system: the system settings (→ page 250) , . ª , . õ . Making a call # Select or . # Select . # Set the volume. 286 Multimedia system

# Enter the number. Conducting calls with several participants Incoming call during an existing call (call waiting) # Select w. Requirements: The call is made. R There is an active call (→ page 285). Requirement: Accepting a call R Another call is being made. R There is an active call (→ page 285). # Select . Switching between calls If you receive a call while already in a call, a # message is displayed. An acoustic signal also Rejecting a call Select call #. sounds. # The selected call is active. The other call is Select . # on hold. Select . Ending a call The incoming call is active. The previous call Activating or ending a call on hold is on hold. # Select =. # Select or . # Select . Activating functions during a call % This function and behavior depends on your # To show all functions, navigate down. Conducting a conference call mobile phone network provider and the # Select in the tele‐ The following functions are available during a mobile phone (see the manufacturer's oper‐ phone menu. call: ating instructions). R The new participant is included in the confer‐ ence call. R Contacts Ending an active call R (show to send DTMF tones) # Select =. Information about the contacts menu R Switch on O or off ª. The contacts menu contains all contacts from % On some mobile phones, the call on hold is R existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or (an active call in hands-free activated as soon as the active call is ended. mode is transferred over to the telephone) memory card. It is possible to store up to 6,000 contacts: Multimedia system 287

R 3,000 entries are for permanently saved con‐ Manually R geo-coordinates tacts. # Deactivate ª R Internet address R 3,000 for contacts loaded from the mobile . phone. Editing the format of a contact's name # Select . Multimedia system: From the contacts menu, you can perform the Calling up contacts , . Z . following actions: Multimedia system: R Using the telephone , . ª The following options are available: - Calling a contact (→ page 288) Depending on the character set, the following R - Calling a new number (→ page 288) options can be used to search for contacts: R R Navigation (→ page 262) R search by initials R R Writing messages (→ page 288) R search by name # Select an option. If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia R search by phone number system (→ page 283) and automatic calling up # Enter characters into the search field. (→ page 287) is activated, the mobile phone's A selection of possible contacts appears. contacts are displayed in the address book. Entering more characters into the search Downloading mobile phone contacts field narrows down the number of possible Multimedia system: selections. , . Z # Select the contact. A contact can contain the following details: Automatically R phone numbers # Activate O R . navigation addresses 288 Multimedia system

Overview of importing contacts Source Requirements: Saving a mobile phone contact Multimedia system: Importing contacts as electronic business ñ Bluetooth® con‐ If the sending of , . ª cards ® nection vCards via Bluetooth # Select the ó mobile phone contact. Source Requirements: is supported, vCards # can be received on Select ¥. ò Memory cardThe SD memory card mobile phones or net‐ # Select . is inserted. books, for example. The contact saved in the multimedia system ò USB device The USB device is Bluetooth® is activa‐ is identified by the f symbol. inserted in the USB ted in the multimedia Calling a contact port. system and on the Multimedia system: respective device , . ª (see the manufactur‐ er's operating instruc‐ # Enter characters into the search field. tions). # Select the contact. ó Mobile phone The mobile phone is # Select the telephone number. connected to the mul‐ The number is dialed. timedia system. Selecting further options in the contacts menu Importing contacts into the contacts menu Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . ª , . Z # Select a contact. # Select . # Select ¥. # Select an option. Multimedia system 289

Depending on the stored data, the following Call list Options in the call list options are available: Multimedia system: Call list overview R , . ø If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Blue‐ # R tooth® profile: Highlight an entry. # R (if a web address has been R The call lists from the mobile phone are dis‐ Select ¥. stored) played in the multimedia system. The following options are available: R (if an address has been stored) R When connecting the mobile phone, you may R R have to confirm the connection for the PBAP R ® R (for a number with DTMF Bluetooth profile. tones) If your mobile phone does not support the PBAP Text messages # Bluetooth® profile: Select an option. Notes on the text message functions R Deleting a contact The multimedia system generates its own call If the connected mobile phone supports the Multimedia system: lists. MAP Bluetooth® profile, the text message func‐ R , . ª The call list is not synchronized with the call tions can be used on the multimedia system. lists in the mobile phone. You can delete contacts stored in the vehicle. You can obtain further information about set‐ tings and supported functions of Bluetooth®- # Search for the contact. Making a call from the call list Multimedia system: capable mobile phones from an # Select the contact. , . ø authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at: http:// # Select ¥. www.mercedes-benz.com/connect # Select an entry. # Select . The call is made. Some mobile phones require further settings # after being connected to the multimedia system Select . (see manufacturer's operating instructions). 290 Multimedia system

New messages are identified by the 1 symbol Reading text messages Dictating text in the multimedia system's display and an audi‐ Multimedia system: # Select . ble signal. , . i The App for the dictation function is loaded. Depending on the mobile phone, the multimedia Reading a text message If there was no prior Internet connection, a system only displays new incoming text mes‐ connection is now established. sages or the 100 newest text messages. # Select a text message. The message text is displayed. # To start the dictation function: press the Configuring the displayed text messages controller or touchpad. Using the read-aloud function Multimedia system: # Say the message. , . Z . # Select a text message. The dictation ends automatically after you # Select . have finished speaking. # Select ¥. The text message is read aloud. After the voice message has been processed, A menu with the following options is shown: Composing and sending a text message it is shown as text. R Multimedia system: Editing text , . R i # Select the word. # R Navigate to the left twice. # To call up the correction menu: press the # R (The text messages are not displayed Select . controller or touchpad. automatically.) Adding a recipient The following options are available: # R adjusting the capitalization of words (if Select an option. # Select . supported by the character set) # Select the contact. R expanding the choice of words R deleting the selection Multimedia system 291

R recording a new dictation Further options in the text message menu still be operated via Voice Control System # To leave the menu: select . Multimedia system: (→ page 227). , . i Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ Sending text messages # Select ¥. ted via Apple CarPlay™ to the multimedia sys‐ # Select . tem. # To delete a text message: select . Replying to a text message The availability of Apple CarPlay™ may vary # To change folders: select . Multimedia system: according to the country. # , . i The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ or cation and the services and content connected # Select the text message. # Select . to it. # Select ¥. Notes on Apple CarPlay™ # Select . Apple CarPlay™ While using Apple CarPlay™ various functions of Calling a text message sender the multimedia system, e.g. telephony or the Overview of Apple CarPlay™ ® ® Multimedia system: iPhone® functions can be used via the multime‐ media source Bluetooth audio and iPod are , . i dia system using Apple CarPlay™. They are oper‐ unavailable. # Select the text message. ated using the controller or the Siri® voice-oper‐ Only one route guidance can be active at a time. ated control system. You can activate the voice- If a route guidance is active on the multimedia # Select ¥. operated control system by pressing and holding system, it is closed when a route guidance is # Select . the ó button on the multifunction steering started on the mobile phone. wheel. When using Apple CarPlay™ via the voice-oper‐ ated control system, the multimedia system can 292 Multimedia system

Connecting an iPhone® via Apple CarPlay™ Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ Ending Apple CarPlay™ ulations Multimedia system: Requirements: A message with the data protection regulations , . R Apple® operating system version iOS 8.3 or appears. ® # Select . above is installed on the iPhone . # Select . R The connection is ended. There is an Internet connection for the full or range of functions for Apple CarPlay™. The mobile phone continues to be supplied # Select . with electricity. R The iPhone® is connected to the multimedia If you selected automatic start, you will have or system via the USB port ç using a suita‐ to start Apple CarPlay™ manually the next # ble cable (→ page 308). time you want to use it. Disconnect the connecting cable between the mobile phone and multimedia system. Multimedia system: Exiting Apple CarPlay™ Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting , . # Press the ò button on the multifunction the connecting cable only when the vehicle is stationary. Setting automatic or manual start steering wheel, for example. A message appears when connected for the first % If Apple CarPlay™ was not displayed in the time. foreground before disconnecting, the appli‐ Android Auto # Automatic start: select . cation starts in the background when recon‐ Android Auto overview ® is activated O. nected. You can call up Apple CarPlay in Mobile phone functions can be used with the main menu. Apple CarPlay™ will now start immediately Android Auto using the Android operating sys‐ after the iPhone® is connected to the multi‐ Calling up Apple CarPlay™ sound settings tem on the multimedia system. It is operated media system using a USB cable. Multimedia system: using the controller or the voice-operated con‐ trol system. You can activate the voice-operated # , . . Manual start: select . control system by pressing and holding the ó # Select the iPhone® in the device list. # Select the sound menu (→ page 324). button on the multifunction steering wheel. Multimedia system 293

When using Android Auto via the voice-operated Connecting a mobile phone via Android Auto Multimedia system: control system, the multimedia system can still , . be operated via Voice Control System Requirements R # (→ page 227). The first activation of Android Auto on the Select the mobile phone from the device list. multimedia system must be carried out when Only one mobile phone at a time can be connec‐ the vehicle is stationary for safety reasons. Accepting/rejecting the data protection reg‐ ted via Android Auto to the multimedia system. ulations R The mobile phone supports Android Auto The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto A message with the data protection regulations from Android 5.0. appears. Apps may vary according to the country. R The Android Auto App is installed on the # Select . The service provider is responsible for this appli‐ mobile phone. cation and the services and content connected or R In order to use the telephone functions, a to it. # mobile phone must be connected to the mul‐ Select . Notes on Android Auto timedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 283). Activating automatic start While using Android Auto, various functions of If there was no prior Internet connection, this # Select O. the multimedia system, for example, the media ® is established with the use of the mobile source Bluetooth audio, are not available. phone with Android Auto. Starting manually Only one route guidance can be active at a time. R The mobile phone is connected to the multi‐ # Select the mobile phone from the device list. If route guidance is active on the multimedia sys‐ media system via the USB port ç using a Exiting Android Auto tem, it is closed when route guidance is started suitable cable (→ page 308). on the mobile phone. # Press the ò button on the multifunction R The full range of functions for Android Auto is steering wheel, for example. only possible with an Internet connection. 294 Multimedia system

% If Android Auto was not displayed in the fore‐ Transferred vehicle data when using Apple R distinction between parked, standstill, rolling ground before disconnecting, the application CarPlay™ and Android Auto and driving starts in the background when reconnected. Notes on transferred vehicle data R day/night mode of the instrument cluster You can call up Android Auto in the main When using Android Auto or Apple CarPlay™, menu. The transfer of this data is used to alter how certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile content is displayed to correspond to the driving Calling up the Android Auto sound settings phone. This enables you to get the best out of situation. Multimedia system: selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is Position data: , . . not directly accessible. R coordinates # → System information: Select the sound menu ( page 324). R R software release of the multimedia system speed Ending Android Auto R R compass direction Multimedia system: system ID (anonymized) R acceleration direction , . The transfer of this data is used to optimize com‐ # Select . munication between the vehicle and the mobile This data is only transferred while the navigation The connection is ended. phone. system is active in order to improve it (e.g. so it can continue functioning when in a tunnel). The mobile phone continues to be supplied To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the with electricity. mobile phone, a vehicle ID is randomly gener‐ ated. ® or Mercedes-Benz mbrace (USA) This has no connection to the vehicle identifica‐ # Disconnect the connecting cable between Making a call via the overhead control panel tion number (VIN) and is deleted when the multi‐ ® the mobile phone and multimedia system. media system is reset (→ page 257). Mercedes-Benz mbrace is available in the USA. Mercedes-Benz recommends disconnecting the connecting cable only when the vehicle is Driving status data: stationary. R transmission position engaged Multimedia system 295

# To make an emergency call: press SOS Information on the emergency call system button cover 2 briefly to open. & # Press and hold SOS button 4 for at least WARNING Risk of accident and injury one second. despite pressing the SOS button This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Even if you press the SOS button in an emer‐ Customer Assistance Center. gency, remaining in the vehicle may be dan‐ # To make an MB Info call: press button 3. gerous for the following reasons: This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz R you see smoke inside or outside of the Customer Assistance Center. vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an acci‐ dent An emergency call can be initiated even if a Roadside Assistance or MB Info call is active. R the vehicle is on a dangerous section of This has priority over all other active calls. road Calls via the overhead control panel are only R the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily possible with an available mobile phone net‐ be seen by other road users, particularly work. when dark or in poor visibility conditions 1 Roadside Assistance call ® # 2 SOS button cover Further information on Mercedes-Benz mbrace Leave the vehicle immediately in this or and other services can be found at: http:// similar situations as soon as it is safe to 3 MB Info call www.mbusa.com do so. 4 SOS button # Move to a safe location along with other # To make a Roadside Assistance call: press vehicle occupants. button 1. # In such situations, secure the vehicle in This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz accordance with national regulations, Customer Assistance Center. e.g. with a warning triangle. 296 Multimedia system

Automatic emergency call asks for more detailed information on the You can find information on the following topics: The emergency call is initiated: emergency. R Mercedes-Benz mbrace® activation R R when an air bag is deployed if no vehicle occupant answers, an ambu‐ R operating the vehicle lance is sent to the vehicle immediately. R when an Emergency Tensioning Device is R nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center triggered Transferred data R other products and services from Mercedes- You can end an automatically initiated emer‐ During the voice connection to the Customer Benz gency call yourself after 60 seconds. Assistance Center, the following data is transfer‐ red: Data is transmitted during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Manual emergency call R current vehicle location An emergency call can be initiated manually via (→ page 297). R vehicle identification number the SOS button in the overhead control panel Information on the Roadside Assistance call (→ page 294). Emergency call not possible R A Roadside Assistance call to the Mercedes- If you leave the vehicle immediately after press‐ if the mobile phone network is unavailable, Benz Customer Assistance Center has been initi‐ ing the SOS button, you do not know if Mercedes-Benz mbrace® is not able to make ® ated via the overhead control panel: Mercedes-Benz mbrace has successfully made an emergency call. R the emergency call. The problem with the vehicle is analyzed A corresponding message appears in the using remote diagnosis. multimedia system display. Initiated emergency call Further information about this can be A voice connection between the Customer Assis‐ The indicator lamp flashes continuously. obtained at: http://www.mbusa.com tance Center and the vehicle occupants is estab‐ In this case, seek assistance by other means. R A qualified Mercedes-Benz technician carries lished: Information on the MB Info call out repairs on site and/or the vehicle will be R if the vehicle occupants are responsive, the An Info call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer towed to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center Assistance Center has been initiated via the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. overhead control panel (→ page 294). You may be charged for these services. Multimedia system 297

Data is transmitted during the connection to the Online and Internet functions USA: to use Mercedes-Benz Apps and access Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center ® Internet connection the Internet, Mercedes-Benz mbrace must be (→ page 297). activated and operational. Furthermore, Information about the Internet connection mbrace® must be activated for Mercedes-Benz Apps and Internet access. Transferred data during a service call & WARNING Risk of distraction from infor‐ Canada: the multimedia system must be con‐ In certain countries you must confirm the data mation systems and communications ® transfer. equipment nected to a mobile phone via Bluetooth or to an external device acting as a Wi-Fi hotspot. Fur‐ If you make service calls using Mercedes-Benz If you operate information and communica‐ thermore, you need a valid mobile service con‐ ® mbrace (USA), transferred data includes the tion equipment integrated in the vehicle tract with a data option, which is used to calcu‐ following: when driving, you will be distracted from the late the associated connection costs. Overview of transferred data traffic situation. This could also cause you to The Internet functions can only be used to a limi‐ lose control of the vehicle. ted degree whilst driving. Service callTransferred data # Only operate this equipment when the Setting up an Internet connection via Wi-Fi MB Info call R Current vehicle traffic situation permits. Roadside Assistance location # If you cannot be sure of this, stop the Requirements: call R Vehicle identifica‐ vehicle whilst paying attention to road R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the multi‐ tion number and traffic conditions and operate the media system (→ page 249). equipment with the vehicle stationary. R Service code R the Wi-Fi function is activated on the external R device (see the manufacturer's operating Selected data You must observe the legal requirements for the instructions). about the status country in which you are currently driving when R of the vehicle operating the multimedia system. Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). 298 Multimedia system

The Internet connection via Wi-Fi is restricted or To connect via Bluetooth®, the mobile phone R the mobile phone has not been enabled for does not function if: supports one of the following Bluetooth® pro‐ Internet access via Bluetooth® R files: the mobile phone is switched off If a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile R DUN (Dial-Up Networking) system for the first time via Bluetooth®, you will phone R PAN(Personal Area Network) be assisted through the process of setting up an R Internet connection. the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multi‐ ® media system The Internet connection via Bluetooth is restric‐ ted or does not function if: The Internet connection can also be configured R the Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the exter‐ manually. R the mobile phone is switched off nal device Further information can be obtained at http:// R R Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone network coverage is insuf‐ www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from an the external device ficient authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. R mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile Multimedia system: Multimedia system: phone , . . , . . ö ö R ® . the Bluetooth function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone # Select the network. is to be connected via Bluetooth® Bluetooth® connection via PAN # Logging in to Wi-Fi network (→ page 249). R the Bluetooth® function is switched off on # Select the mobile phone. The Internet connection is established. Setting up an Internet connection via Blue‐ the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to ® tooth® be connected via Bluetooth Bluetooth® connection via DUN R neither the mobile phone network nor the # Select the mobile phone. Requirements: mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a R A mobile phone is connected to the multime‐ phone and an Internet connection dia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 283). Multimedia system 299

# To select the predefined access data of Switching the Bluetooth® profile # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐ the mobile phone network provider: select set or manual access data (→ page 298) . Requirement: Editing access data A list of countries appears. The mobile phone supports the DUN and PAN Bluetooth® profiles. # Select the country of your mobile phone net‐ Requirement: work provider. Multimedia system: The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® DUN The list of available providers appears. , . ö . profile. # Select your mobile phone network provider. Multimedia system: When an overview of the provider settings # To switch from DUN to PAN: select mobile , . ö . appears, make the necessary settings. phone. # Select . # Select ¥. # Highlight a mobile phone. # To manually set the access data of the # Select . # Select ¥. mobile phone network provider: select # Activate O . # . Select . The Internet connection is automatically con‐ An overview of the provider settings appears. # For mobile phones with PAN and DUN: figured using the PAN Bluetooth® profile. # select . Set the access data. # To switch from PAN to DUN: select mobile # # Configure the Internet connection using pre‐ Select . phone. % set or manual access data (→ page 298) Set the access data in accordance with your # Select ¥. data package. Otherwise, additional costs # may be incurred. You can contact your Select . mobile phone network provider to obtain the # Deactivate ª . precise access data. # Select . 300 Multimedia system

Canceling Internet access permission for a % The multimedia system usually establishes Displaying the connection status mobile phone the Internet connection automatically. If the Multimedia system: Multimedia system: multimedia system is not connected to the , . ö , . . Internet, the Internet connection is estab‐ ö # Select . lished when an Internet application is used. % Depending on the means of connection, the # Highlight a mobile phone. approximate data volume transmitted is dis‐ Connection status # Select ¥. played. # Select . Connection status overview # Select . Mercedes-Benz Apps Displaying mobile phone details Calling up Mercedes-Benz Apps Multimedia system: Requirements: , . ö . R The registration for the use of Mercedes- Benz Apps has been completed. # Highlight a mobile phone. R The general terms and conditions have been confirmed. # Select ¥. # Select . Multimedia system: , . Ú Establishing an Internet connection 1 Display of existing connection and reception Multimedia system: field strength of the connected device # Select the App. , Further Mercedes-Benz Apps and information # For example, select z . can be obtained at: http://apps.mercedes- benz.com/apps/ Multimedia system 301

% The available features are country-depend‐ Web browser Web browser overview ent. Calling up a web page License fees may be applicable. Multimedia system: Using Mercedes-Benz Apps voice control , . . Requirements: z z R The registration for the use of Mercedes- # Enter a web address. Benz Apps has been completed. # To finish the entry and call up the web‐ R The general terms and conditions have been site: select ¬. confirmed. Showing/hiding the web browser menu The o symbol indicates that a Mercedes- If you call up a website by selecting a link, for Benz App can be used via voice control. example, the web browser menu is hidden. # Select the Mercedes-Benz App # To show/hide: press the % button. (→ page 300). % The web browser supports video playback. The App menu is displayed. % No websites or videos are displayed while # To use voice control: select o the vehicle is in motion. . 1 URL entry # Say the question or command. 2 Bookmarks % Voice control is not available in all countries 3 Web page, back and languages. 4 Web page, forwards 5 Options 6 To close the browser 302 Multimedia system

Calling up web browser options # Switch the function on O or off ª. Creating a bookmark Multimedia system: # Select . , Deleting browser data Multimedia system: # Enter a URL and a name. . z . Z , # Select ¡. The following functions are available: . z . Z . Editing a bookmark R / # Highlight a bookmark. R The following options are available: # Select ¥. R R # Select . R R # Enter a URL and a name. # Select an option. R # Select ¡. # Make the desired changes to the settings. R R Deleting a bookmark Calling up the web browser settings # Highlight a bookmark. Multimedia system: # Select an option. , # Select ¥. # Select . . z . Z . # Select . Managing bookmarks # Select . Multimedia system: The following functions are available: , Closing the browser R . z . ß Multimedia system: R , . z Selecting a bookmark R # Select å . # Select an entry. Multimedia system 303

Internet radio Internet radio overview Selecting and connecting to Internet radio stations Calling up the Internet radio Multimedia system: Requirements: , . Þ . R The Internet radio service is activated. . è R The data volume is available. # Select a category. Depending on the country, data volume may # Select a station. need to be purchased. The connection is established automatically. R A fast Internet connection for data transmis‐ or sion free of interference. # Select . The services are country-dependent. # Enter a station name using the entry field. For more information, consult an authorized % A relatively large volume of data can be Mercedes-Benz Center. transmitted when using Internet radio. Multimedia system: Saving/deleting Internet radio stations as , . Þ favorites # Select . 1 Internet radio provider Multimedia system: The Internet radio display appears. The last 2 Selected category , . Þ . station set starts playing. 3 Display (if connected to private user % The connection quality depends on the local account) # Select a station. mobile phone reception. 4 Data transfer rate 5 Current station is stored as a favorite 6 Additional information on the current station 304 Multimedia system

# Press and hold the touchpad or controller Setting the Internet radio options traffic conditions. This could also cause you until an audible signal sounds. Multimedia system: to lose control of the vehicle. The ß symbol appears by the station , . . Þ # Only handle a data storage medium name. . Z when the vehicle is stationary. # Select ß . The following options are available: The list of saved favorite stations appears. Permissible file systems: R : select the stream quality. or R R FAT32 # : log in to your Create an account for the online provider TuneIn user account. R exFAT (TuneIn radio) and then log in on the multi‐ R media system. R : log out of your TuneIn NTFS Your favorites are imported to the multimedia user account. Permissible data storage medium: system. # Select an option. R SD card Deleting favorites R USB storage device # Select ß . Media R iPod®/iPhone® # Select a station. Audio mode R MTP devices # Press and hold the touchpad or controller Information on the audio mode R Bluetooth® audio equipment until an audible signal sounds. % R The multimedia system supports a total The ß symbol by the station name disap‐ & WARNING Risk of distraction when han‐ of up to 50,000 files. pears. dling data storage media R Data storage media up to 2 TB are sup‐ If you handle a data storage medium while ported (32-bit address space). driving, your attention is diverted from the Multimedia system 305

Supported formats: R MP3 R WMA R AAC R WAV R FLAC R ALAC % Observe the following notes: R Due to the large variety of available Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, music files regarding encoders, sampling "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist rates and bit rates, playback cannot Plus are either registered trademarks or trade‐ always be guaranteed. marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. R Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot Manufactured under license from Dolby Labora‐ For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. be guaranteed for all USB devices. tories. Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D sym‐ Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing R bol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and Copy-protected music files or DRM the Symbol together are registered trademarks encrypted files cannot be played back. of DTS, Inc.© DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. R MP3 players must support Media Trans‐ fer Protocol (MTP). Notes on copyright Audio files that you create or reproduce yourself for playback are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions, 306 Multimedia system even for private use, are not permitted without They could be swallowed and lead to chok‐ Multimedia system: the prior consent of the copyright holder. Make ing. , . à . sure that you know about the applicable copy‐ # right regulations and that you comply with these. Keep SD cards out of the reach of chil‐ dren. Inserting Activating media mode # Seek medical attention immediately if The multimedia connection unit is located in the Multimedia system: an SD card has been swallowed. stowage compartment under the armrest. , . à # Insert the SD memory card into the SD card # Select a media source. * NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ slot until it engages. The side with the con‐ Playable music files are played back. tures tacts must face downwards. Playable music files are played back. Inserting/removing an SD card High temperatures can damage the SD mem‐ ory card. Removing & DANGER Risk of fatal injury from swal‐ # Remove the SD memory card after use # Press the SD card. lowing SD cards and take it out of the vehicle. # Remove the SD card. SD cards are small parts. Multimedia system 307

Overview of the audio mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 9 (for video playback) 2 Album cover 6 A 3 Track, artist, album 7 4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 track list 308 Multimedia system

Connecting USB devices Selecting a track Playback mode Multimedia system: # * Select . NOTE Damage caused by high tempera‐ , The current track list is played in random tures order. Selecting a track by skipping to a track High temperatures can damage USB devices. # Select . # To skip backwards or forwards to a track: # All tracks on the active data storage medium Remove the USB device after use and navigate up or down. take it out of the vehicle. are played in random order. Selecting a track using the current track list # Select . The multimedia connection unit is found in the # Select è. The current track list is played in the order it stowage compartment under the armrest and # appears on the data storage medium. has two USB ports. Depending on the vehicle's Select . equipment, additional USB ports can be found in # Select a track. Controlling media playback Multimedia system: the stowage compartment of the front center Selecting playback options console or rear folding compartment. , . Multimedia system: # Connect the USB device to the USB port. , . Z A bar with playback controls is shown. Playable music files are played back only if # To pause playback: press the controller. the corresponding media display is activated. Playing back similar tracks The Ë symbol is displayed. % # Use the USB port identified by ç to use Select . # To continue playback: press the controller Apple CarPlay™ and Android Auto. A track list with similar tracks is created and again. played back. The Ì symbol is displayed. To fast forward/rewind # Move Ë on the timeline: turn the control‐ ler Multimedia system 309

To hide the playback controls The multimedia system supports the following Copy-protected video files or DRM (Digital # Press the % button. formats: Rights Management) encrypted files cannot R MPEG be played back. Video mode R AVI, DivX, MKV R Switching to video mode MP4, M4V Multimedia system: R WMV , . à % Due to the large variety of available video # Select a data storage medium. files regarding encoders, sampling rates and Playable video files are played back. data transfer rates, playback cannot always be guaranteed. Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are sup‐ ported. 310 Multimedia system

Overview of video mode

1 Active data storage medium 5 9 2 Preview window 6 A 3 Track, artist and album or film and scene 7 4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 track list Multimedia system 311

Activating/deactivating full-screen mode Adjusting the brightness manually R Multimedia system: # Select . R (Apple® devices) , . à # Adjust the brightness. R (Apple® devices) # Select a data storage medium. Playable video files are played back. # Select a category. Media search % # To activate full-screen mode: select # The categories are available as soon as the . Starting the media search entire media content has been read in and Multimedia system: # analyzed. To deactivate full-screen mode: press the , . touchpad. ª Depending on the connected media sources and Media Interface Changing video settings files, the following categories are listed: Multimedia system: Information about the Media Interface R Media Interface is a universal interface for the , . Z . R connection of mobile audio equipment. The mul‐ timedia system has two USB ports. The USB R The following picture formats are available: ports are located in the stowage compartment R R under the armrest. R R Supported devices R R The Media Interface allows you to connect the R R following data storage media: R R ® # iPod Select a picture format. R R iPhone® R R MP3 player 312 Multimedia system

R USB devices Switching to Media Interface # Select a media device. Multimedia system: Playable music files are played back. For details and a list of supported devices, visit , . our website at http://www.mercedes- à benz.com/connect. Follow the instructions in # Connect a data storage medium to the USB the "Media Interface" section. port (→ page 308). Multimedia system 313

Overview of Media Interface

1 Active data storage medium 5 9 (video playback only) 2 Cover 6 A 3 Artist, track and album 7 4 Track number and number of tracks in the 8 track list

Bluetooth® audio Information about Bluetooth® audio 314 Multimedia system

Before using your Bluetooth® audio equipment with the multimedia system for the first time, you will need to authorize it (→ page 315).

Bluetooth® Audio overview

1 Active data storage medium 3 Track, artist, album 4 Track number and number of tracks in the 2 Cover art track list Multimedia system 315

5 7 9 (video playback only) 6 8 A

Searching for and authorizing a Blue tooth® # Select . # Select . audio device Detected audio equipment is displayed in the # Start the authorization on the audio device device list. Requirements: (see manufacturer's operating instructions). # ® A code is displayed on the multimedia sys‐ R Blue tooth® is activated on the multimedia Select a Blue tooth audio device. tem and on the mobile phone. system and on the audio equipment Authorization starts. A code is displayed on (→ page 249). the multimedia system and on the mobile # Confirm on both devices if the codes are phone. identical. R The audio equipment supports the Blue # If the codes are identical, confirm on the The audio equipment is connected and play‐ tooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. audio equipment. back starts. R The audio equipment is "visible" for other The audio equipment is connected and play‐ With some audio equipment, playback must be devices. back starts. initially started on the device itself so that the Multimedia system: Selecting Blue tooth® audio equipment that multimedia system can play the audio files. , . à has already been authorized % Device-specific information on authorizing . á # Select ¥. and connecting Bluetooth®-capable mobile ® # ® phones can be obtained at http:// Authorizing new Blue tooth audio equip‐ Select a Blue tooth audio device. www.mercedes-benz.com/connect or from ment Establishing a connection from the Blue an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. # Select ¥. tooth® audio equipment # Select . The Blue tooth® device name of the multimedia system is . 316 Multimedia system

Activating Bluetooth® audio # Select a category. ment for the first time, it is connected after Multimedia system: A track list appears. confirming the instructions for the mobile , . à # Select a track. phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). # Select á . % The function is only available when the The multimedia system activates the connec‐ mobile phone and the music player selected Disconnecting Bluetooth® audio equipment ted Bluetooth® audio equipment. on the mobile phone support this function. Multimedia system: , . Selecting a music player Switching Bluetooth® audio equipment via á Multimedia system: NFC # Select a Bluetooth® audio device. , . à Requirements # Select ¥ . . á R Observe the notes on using NFC # Select . # Select a Bluetooth® audio device. (→ page 284). If multiple music players are present on the R The Bluetooth® audio overview is displayed Radio Bluetooth® audio equipment a list appears. (→ page 316). Switching on the radio # Select a music player. # Lightly press the NFC area on the mobile Playback starts. phone (see the manufacturer's operating Multimedia system: , Searching for a track instructions). Multimedia system: If the mobile phone has already been author‐ # Alternatively: press the $ button. ized on the multimedia system as Bluetooth® , . à The radio display appears. You will hear the audio equipment, it is now connected. . á last station played on the last frequency If the mobile phone is authorized on the mul‐ band selected. # Select ª. timedia system as Bluetooth® audio equip‐ Multimedia system 317

Radio overview

1 Active frequency band 4 Station list 7 2 Station name or set frequency 5 8 3 Artist, title, album and radio text 6 9 318 Multimedia system

Switching HD Radio on/off Setting the waveband Searching for radio stations using station names or direct frequency entry Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . Z . , . Þ Multimedia system: , . . and è è can be selected. # Enter a station name or frequency. # Select a frequency band. # Select a. The search results are displayed. Selecting a radio station # Select a station. Multimedia system: Storing radio stations , # Navigate up or down. Multimedia system: , . ß # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Calling up the radio station list # Select . % HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. Multimedia system: Editing radio station presets U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and , . è the HD, HD Radio and "Arc" logos are propri‐ # Select a station. Multimedia system: etary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp. , . ß Moving stations: # Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the left. Multimedia system 319

# Select . Activating/deactivating radio text will be provided on how to extend this subscrip‐ tion. A message is shown, describing how the # Select a preset. Multimedia system: subscription can be extended. , . Z . Deleting stations: % Sirius, XM and all related marks and logos # Highlight a preset entry and navigate to the are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. and left. # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. its subsidiaries. All other marks, channel # Select . names and logos are the property of their respective owners. All rights reserved. # Select . Satellite radio Information on the satellite radio Satellite radio restrictions Tagging music tracks SIRIUS XM® Satellite Radio offers more than 175 Satellite radio mode may be temporarily unavail‐ digital-quality radio channels providing 100% able or interrupted for a variety of reasons. Multimedia system: raphical commercial-free music, sports, news and enter‐ These include environmental or topog , conditions beyond the control of Mercedes-Benz tainment, for example. SIRIUS XM satellite radio USA, LLC. Thus, operation at certain locations employs a fleet of high-performance satellites to If radio stations provide the relevant information, may not be possible. this function allows you to transfer information broadcast around the clock throughout the USA on the music track currently playing to an and Canada. The satellite radio program is avail‐ Registering satellite radio Apple® device. You can then purchase the audio able for a monthly fee. Information about this ® ® Service Cen‐ Requirements: file from the iTunes Store . can be obtained from a Sirius XM R ter and at http://www.siriusxm.com (USA) or satellite radio equipment # Select . http://www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). Your new R registration with a satellite radio provider The track information is saved. Mercedes-Benz vehicle comes with SIRIUS XM® R if registration is not included when purchas‐ Satellite Radio pre-installed at the factory. This ing the system, your credit card details will service is free for a six-month trial period. About be required to activate your account a month before the trial period ends, information 320 Multimedia system

Multimedia system: # Establish a telephone connection. www.siriusxm.com (USA) or http:// , . Þ . # Follow the service staff's instructions. www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). . Z The activation process may take up to ten Switching on satellite radio minutes. # Select . Multimedia system: % The service information screen appears You can also have the satellite service acti‐ , . Þ showing the radio ID and the current sub‐ vated online. To do so, please visit http:// # Select . scription status. Multimedia system 321

Overview of the satellite radio

1 Active frequency band 5 Channel information 9 2 Logo or album art (if available) 6 A 3 Category 7 B 4 Channel name 8 322 Multimedia system

Selecting a satellite radio category Deleting a channel Unlocking a channel Multimedia system: # Select . # Enter the four-digit character sequence and , . . Þ # Select a preset. select ¡. . è All channels with adult content are unlocked. . Displaying EPG information for the current channel Music and sport alerts function # Select a category. Multimedia system: This function enables you to program an alert for your favorite artists, tracks or sporting events. Selecting a satellite radio channel , . Þ . . Music alerts can be saved whilst a track is being Multimedia system: Z played and sport alerts can be saved during a , . . Þ # Select live game. You can also specify sport alerts via . the menu option. The system then continuously # Navigate up or down. searches through all the channels. If a match is Setting the parental control found with a stored alert, you will be informed. Saving or deleting a satellite radio channel Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . Þ . Setting music and sport alerts Multimedia system: , . Þ . . Z . , . . . ß Þ . Z . # Select . # Switch the function on O. Moving a channel # Determine a four-digit character sequence and select ¡. Setting a music alert # Select . All channels with adult content are locked. # Select . # Select . or # Select a preset. # Select . Multimedia system 323

# Select ¥ . Information on smart favorites and Tune # To fast forward/rewind: select C or D. The following options are available: Start # To pause playback: select Ë. Stations in the station presets can be added as R # smart favorites. Smart favorites stations are To return to live mode: navigate to the end of R automatically saved to temporary storage in the the timeline. R background. If you change to a smart favorite Displaying satellite radio service information R station, you can replay, pause or actively skip Multimedia system: forward or back to broadcasts which you have , . Þ . R missed. If Tune Start is activated and you change . Z # Select an option. to another smart favorite station, the music track currently playing on the station is automat‐ # Select . # O. The alert is set for the current artist or track. ically restarted from the beginning of the track. If a match is found, a prompt appears asking Activating/deactivating Tune Start Sound whether you wish to change to the station. Multimedia system: Tone settings Setting a sport alert , . Z . Information about the sound system # Select . # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. The sound system has a total output of 100 or Playback controls watts and is equipped with seven speakers. It is # Select . Multimedia system: available for all functions in the radio and media # modes. Select . , . or You can pause the playback of the current sta‐ # Select . tion or skip forward or backward in the timeline. # Select a team from a league. This leaves live mode to access the internal tem‐ # O. porary storage. 324 Multimedia system

Calling up the sound menu Activating/deactivating automatic volume 13 speakers. It is available for all functions in the Multimedia system: adjustment radio and media modes. , . Multimedia system: à Calling up the sound menu in the , . . The following functions are available: à Burmester® surround sound system R Multimedia system: R Automatic volume adjustment compensates for , . à differing volumes when changing between audio R sources. The following functions are available: R R # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. R # Select a sound menu. Adjusting the balance/fader R Multimedia system: Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass set‐ R tings , . à . Multimedia system: R , . à . # Adjust the balance and fader. R # Select , or . # To exit the menu: press the % button. # Select a function. # Change the settings. Adjusting the treble, mid and bass settings Burmester® surround sound system on the Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: Information about the Burmester® surround sound system , . à . The Burmester® surround sound system has a # Select , or . total output of 590 watts and is equipped with # Set the desired values. Multimedia system 325

Activating/deactivating volume adjustment Switching surround sound on/off in the in the Burmester® surround sound system Burmester® surround sound system Multimedia system: Multimedia system: , . à . , . à . Automatic volume adjustment compensates for # Activate O or deactivate ª the function. differing volumes when changing between audio ® sources. Adjusting the sound focus in the Burmester # surround sound system Activate O or deactivate ª the function. Multimedia system: Adjusting the balance/fader in the , . à . ® Burmester surround sound system # Adjust the sound focus. Multimedia system: , . à . # Adjust the balance and fader. # To exit the menu: press the % button. 326 Maintenance and care

ASSYST PLUS service interval display Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ need to be performed more often if the vehicle ted subject: is operated under arduous conditions or Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval increased loads, for example: display R Operating the on-board computer (→ page 216). R regular city driving with frequent intermedi‐ The ASSYST PLUS service interval display in the ate stops. Instrument Display provides information on the Carrying out service work at regular inter‐ R if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short remaining time or distance before the next distances. service due date. vals R for frequent operation in mountainous terrain You can hide this service message using the * NOTE Premature wear through failure to or on poor road surfaces. back button on the left-hand side of the steering observe service due dates wheel. R if the engine is often left idling for long peri‐ ods. You can obtain further information concerning Service work which is not carried out at the the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified right time or incompletely can lead to R in particularly dusty conditions and/or if air- specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized increased wear and damage to the vehicle. recirculation mode is frequently used. # Mercedes-Benz Center. Always observe the prescribed service In these or similar operating conditions, have the intervals. interior air filter, engine air filter, engine oil, oil Displaying the service due date # Always have the prescribed service filter etc. changed more frequently. The tires work carried out at a qualified specialist must be checked more frequently if the vehicle On-board computer: workshop. is operated under increased loads. Further infor‐ , . mation can be obtained at a qualified specialist The next service due date is displayed. workshop. Special service requirements # To exit the display: Press the back button on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. The prescribed service interval is based on nor‐ mal operation of the vehicle. Service work will Maintenance and care 327

Battery disconnection periods The active hood is not available in all countries. # With your hand flat, push down active hood 1 in the area around the hinges on both The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Resetting the active hood sides (arrows). can only calculate the service due date when The engine hood must engage in position. the battery is connected. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment # If the active hood can be raised slightly at # Note down the service due date displayed in the rear passenger compartment in the area the Instrument Display before disconnecting Certain component parts in the engine com‐ of the hinges, repeat the step until it engages the battery (→ page 326). partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, correctly in position. the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Engine compartment Let the engine cool down and only Opening/closing the hood touch the component parts described Active hood (pedestrian protection) as follows. & WARNING Risk of accident if the engine Operation of the active hood (pedestrian pro‐ hood is unlatched while driving tection) In certain accident situations, the risk of injury An unlocked engine hood may open up when to pedestrians can be reduced by the actuation the vehicle is in motion and block your view. of the active hood. The rear area of the engine # Never unlatch the engine hood while hood is raised by approximately 85 mm. driving. For the drive to the workshop, reset the trig‐ # Before every trip, ensure that the gered active hood yourself. If the active hood engine hood is latched. has been triggered, pedestrian protection may be limited. A qualified specialist workshop must re-instate the full functionality of the active hood. 328 Maintenance and care

& WARNING Risk of accident and injury # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ & WARNING Risk of injury from touching when opening and closing the engine partment, keep the hood closed and component parts under voltage call the fire service. hood The ignition system and the fuel injection When opening or closing the engine hood, it system work under high voltage. If you touch may suddenly drop into the end position. & WARNING Risk of injury due to moving component parts which are under voltage, parts There is a risk of injury for anyone in the you could receive an electric shock. engine hood's range of movement. Certain components in the engine compart‐ # Never touch component parts of the # Only open or close the engine hood ment may continue to move or suddenly ignition system or the fuel injection sys‐ when there are no persons in the move again even after the ignition has been tem when the ignition is switched on. engine hood's range of movement. switched off, e.g. the cooler fan. Make sure of the following before performing & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ tasks in the engine compartment: ponent parts in the engine compartment ing the hood # Switch the ignition off. Certain component parts in the engine com‐ If you open the hood when the engine has # Never touch the danger zone surround‐ partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, overheated or during a fire in the engine ing moving component parts, e.g. the the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. compartment, you could come into contact rotation area of the fan. # Let the engine cool down and only with hot gases or other escaping operating # Remove jewelry and watches. touch the component parts described fluids. # Keep items of clothing and hair away as follows. # Before opening the hood, allow the from moving parts. engine to cool down. Maintenance and care 329

& WARNING Risk of injury from using the windshield wipers while the engine hood is open When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. # Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before opening the engine hood.

# To open: pull lever 1 to release the hood. # Push lever 1 of the hood catch upwards and lift the hood by approximately 15 in (40 cm). # To close: lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). # If the hood can still be lifted slightly, open the hood again and close it with a little more force until it engages correctly. 330 Maintenance and care

Engine oil R Oil level too high: oil level is above 2. Checking the engine oil level using the oil # If the oil level is too low, add 1.1 US qt (1 l) of dipstick engine oil. # If the oil level is too high, drain off excess & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ engine oil. Consult a qualified specialist ponent parts in the engine compartment workshop. Certain component parts in the engine com‐ Adding engine oil partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ # Let the engine cool down and only ponent parts in the engine compartment touch the component parts described Certain component parts in the engine com‐ as follows. partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be installed in the engine compartment in different # Let the engine cool down and only locations. # Park the vehicle on a flat surface. touch the component parts described as follows. Waiting time before checking the oil level: # Remove oil dipstick 1 and wipe off. R # Slowly slide oil dipstick 1 into the guide Engine at normal operating temperature: five & WARNING Risk of fire and injury from minutes. tube to the stop, and take it out again after engine oil R approximately three seconds. Engine not at normal operating temperature R (e.g. the engine was only started briefly): 30 Oil level is correct: oil level is between 2 If engine oil comes into contact with hot minutes. and 3. component parts in the engine compart‐ R Oil level too low: oil level is at 3 or ment, it may ignite. below. Maintenance and care 331

# # Make sure that no engine oil is spilled * NOTE Damage caused by topping up too Turn cap 1 counter-clockwise and remove next to the filler opening. much engine oil it. # # Add engine oil. Allow the engine to cool off and thor‐ Adding too much engine oil can cause dam‐ oughly clean the engine oil from compo‐ age to the engine or the catalytic converter. # Replace cap 1 and turn it clockwise as far nent parts before starting the vehicle. as it will go. # Have excess engine oil removed at a qualified specialist workshop. # Check the oil level again (→ page 330). * NOTE Engine damage caused by an incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ Checking coolant level tives # Do not use engine oils or oil filters & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ which do not correspond to the specifi‐ ponent parts in the engine compartment cations explicitly prescribed for the Certain component parts in the engine com‐ service intervals. partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, # Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. order to achieve longer change intervals # Let the engine cool down and only than prescribed. touch the component parts described # Do not use additives. as follows. # Follow the instructions in the service interval display regarding the oil & WARNING Danger of burns from hot change. coolant The engine cooling system is pressurized, particularly when the engine is warm. If you 332 Maintenance and care

open the cap, you could be scalded by hot # Park the vehicle on a flat surface. Refilling the windshield washer system coolant spraying out. # Check the coolant temperature display in the & WARNING Risk of burns from hot com‐ # Let the motor cool down before opening instrument cluster. ponent parts in the engine compartment the cap. The coolant temperature must be below 158 °F (70 °C). # When opening the cap, wear gloves and Certain component parts in the engine com‐ protective eyewear. # Slowly turn cap 1 counter-clockwise to partment can be very hot, e.g. the engine, relieve overpressure. the cooler and parts of the exhaust system. # Slowly turn the cap half a turn to allow # pressure to escape. # Continue turning cap 1 counter-clockwise Let the engine cool down and only and remove it. touch the component parts described as follows. The coolant level is correct: R If the engine is cold, up to marker bar 2 & WARNING Danger of burns when open‐ R If the engine is warm, up to 0.6 in (1.5 cm) ing the engine hood over marker bar 2 If you open the engine hood when the engine # If necessary, add coolant that has been has overheated or during a fire in the engine approved by Mercedes-Benz. compartment, you could come into contact R Further information on coolant (→ page 397) with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the engine hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine com‐ partment, keep the engine hood closed and call the fire service. Maintenance and care 333

& WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from Cleaning and care windshield washer concentrate Information on washing the vehicle in a car Windshield washer concentrate is highly wash flammable. It could ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine component parts or & WARNING Risk of accident due to the exhaust system. reduced braking effect after washing the vehicle # Make sure that no windshield washer concentrate spills out next to the filler The braking effect is reduced after washing opening. the vehicle. # After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until the braking effect has been fully restored.

To avoid damage to your vehicle when using a # Remove cap 1 by the tab. car wash, ensure the following beforehand: # Add washer fluid. R Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and the HOLD function are deactivated. R The 360° Camera or the rear view camera is switched off. R The side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. 334 Maintenance and care

R The blower for the ventilation/heating is Components damaged in this way may fail R Observe the information on the correct dis‐ switched off. unexpectedly. tance in the equipment manufacturer's oper‐ ating instructions. R The windshield wiper switch is in position # Do not use high-pressure cleaning g. equipment with round-spray nozzles to R Do not point the nozzle of the power washer R In car washes with a towing mechanism: neu‐ clean your vehicle. directly at sensitive parts such as tires, slits, tral i is engaged. # electrical component parts, batteries, light Damaged tires or suspension compo‐ sources and ventilation slots. R The SmartKey is at a distance of at least nents must be replaced immediately. 10 ft (3 m) away from the vehicle, otherwise the tailgate could open unintentionally. To avoid damage to your vehicle, observe the fol‐ Washing the vehicle by hand lowing when using a power washer: % If, after the car wash, you remove the wax Observe the legal requirements, e.g. in a number R from the windshield and wiper rubber, this Keep the SmartKey at least 10 ft (3 m) away of countries, washing by hand is only permitted will prevent smearing and reduce wiper from the vehicle. Otherwise the tailgate in specially designated washing areas. noise. could open unintentionally. # Use a mild cleaning agent, e.g. car shampoo. R Maintain a distance of at least 11.8 in # Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using (30 cm) to the vehicle. Information on using a power washer a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not R Vehicles with decorative foil: parts of your expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. & WARNING Risk of accident when using vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. # Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and high-pressure cleaning equipment with Maintain a distance of at least 27.6 in dry using a chamois. Take care not to point round-spray nozzles (70 cm) between the foil-covered parts of the the water jet directly towards the air inlet vehicle and the nozzle of the power washer. grille. The water jet from a round-spray nozzle (dirt Move the power washer cleaner nozzle grinder) may cause damage to tires and sus‐ around whilst cleaning. pension components that is not visible. Maintenance and care 335

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and careAvoiding damage to the paintwork Paint R Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the R Do not apply stickers, films etc. treated areas afterwards. R Remove dirt immediately, where possible. R Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. R Coolant, brake fluid, tree resins, oils, fuel and greases: gently rub with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. R Tar stains: use tar remover. R Wax: use silicone remover. Matt finish R The vehicle should preferably be washed by hand using a R Do not polish the vehicle and alloy wheels. soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. R Do not have your vehicle cleaned at an automatic car R Only use care products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. wash too frequently and do not use wash programs which finish with a hot wax vehicle treatment. R Do not use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing products such as a gloss preserver, e.g. wax. R Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. 336 Maintenance and care

Notes on care of vehicle parts # Always switch off the windshield wipers # Always be particularly careful around and the ignition before cleaning the the tailpipe and the tailpipe trim. & WARNING Risk of entrapment if the windshield or wiper blades. # Allow the vehicle parts to cool down windshield wipers are switched on while before you touch them. the windshield is being cleaned & WARNING Risk of burns from tailpipes If the windshield wipers are set in motion and tailpipe trim while you are cleaning the windshield or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the The tailpipe and tailpipe trim can become wiper arm. very hot. If you come into contact with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn yourself.

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage Wheels/rims Use water and acid-free wheel cleaners. R Do not use acidic wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. R To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and brake linings, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and brake linings warm up and dried out. Windows Clean the windows on the inside and outside using a damp Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products or cleaning agents cloth and cleaning products recommended by Mercedes- containing solvents to clean the inside of the windows. Benz. Maintenance and care 337

Information on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage Wiper blades Fold out the wiper blades and clean them using a damp cloth.Do not clean the wiper blades too often. Exterior lighting Clean the lens with a wet sponge and mild detergent, e.g. car Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable shampoo. for plastic lenses. AIRPANEL If the vehicle is very dusty or there are salt deposits in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum AIRPANEL mechanics, the adjustment range of the shutters in distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). the radiator trim may be restricted. R Switch on the ignition, and the shutters open automati‐ cally after approximately 120 seconds. R Clean the bearing points of the shutters with a high-pres‐ sure water jet. Sensors Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers and in the When using a high-pressure water jet, maintain a minimum radiator grille with a soft cloth and car shampoo. distance of 11.8 in (30 cm). Rear view camera R Open the camera cover with the multimedia sys‐ Do not use a high-pressure water jet. and 360° Camera tem(→ page 199) . R Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. Tailpipes Clean with cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz, Use acid-free cleaning agents. particularly in the winter and after washing the vehicle. 338 Maintenance and care

Notes on care of the interior When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts & WARNING Risk of injury or death from may break away. bleached seat belts & WARNING Risk of injury from plastic # Do not use any care or cleaning prod‐ parts breaking off after the use of sol‐ Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely ucts containing solvents to clean the vent-based care products weaken them. cockpit. Care and cleaning products containing sol‐ This can, for example, cause seat belts to vents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to tear or fail in an accident. become porous. # Never bleach or dye seat belts.

Observe the following information:

Information on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage Seat belts Clean with warm water and soap solution. R Do not use chemical cleaning agents. R Do not dry seat belts by heating them to over 176 °F (80 °C) or exposing them to direct sunlight. Display Clean the surface carefully with a microfiber cloth and R Switch off the display and allow to cool. TFT/LCD display cleaner. R Do not use any other cleaning products. Plastic trim R Clean with a damp microfiber cloth. R Do not apply stickers, films etc. R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐ R Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to ded by Mercedes-Benz. come in contact with the plastic trim. Maintenance and care 339

Information on cleaning and careAvoiding vehicle damage Genuine wood/trim R Clean with a microfiber cloth. Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes. elements R Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soap solution. R If the trim is very dirty: use a cleaning agent recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz. Headliner Clean with a brush or dry shampoo. Carpet Use carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Genuine leather R Clean with a damp cloth and then wipe with a dry cloth. Do not allow the leather to become too damp. seat covers R Leather care: use leather care agents that have been rec‐ Do not use a microfiber cloth. ommended by Mercedes-Benz. DINAMICA seat cov‐ Clean with a damp cloth.Do not use a microfiber cloth. ers Artificial leather Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution.Do not use a microfiber cloth. seat covers Cloth seat covers Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soap solution and allow to dry. 340 Breakdown assistance

Emergency # Open safety vest bag 1 and pull out the The requirements defined by the legal standard safety vest. are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct Removing the safety vest % There are also safety vest compartments in size and is fully closed. The safety vests are located in the safety vest the rear door stowage compartments in Replace the safety vest if: compartments in the driver's and front which safety vests can be stowed. R It is damaged or dirt on the reflective strips passenger door stowage compartments. can no longer be removed. R The maximum number of washes is excee‐ ded. R The fluorescence of the safety vest has faded.

Flat tire Notes on flat tires

1 Maximum number of washes & WARNING Risk of accident due to a flat 2 Maximum wash temperature tire 3 Do not bleach A flat tire severely affects the driving charac‐ 4 Do not iron teristics as well as the steering and braking 5 Do not use a laundry dryer of the vehicle. 6 Do not dry-clean Tires without run-flat characteristics: # To remove: pull out safety vest bag 1 by 7 # loop 2. This is a class 2 vest Do not drive on with a flat tire. Breakdown assistance 341

# Change the flat tire immediately with Roadside Assistance via the overhead control # Stop driving in the emergency mode if the emergency spare wheel or spare panel in the case of a breakdown you notice: (→ page 294). wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified R banging noise specialist workshop. R All vehicles: change the wheel R vehicle vibration (→ page 384). Tires with run-flat characteristics: R smoke which smells like rubber # Observe the information and warning MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper‐ R continuous ESP® intervention notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat ties) R cracks in tire side walls tires). # & WARNING Risk of accident when driving After driving in emergency mode have In the event of a flat tire, the following options in limp-home mode the rims checked by a qualified special‐ are available depending on your vehicle's equip‐ ist workshop with regard to their further ment: When driving in emergency mode the han‐ use. R Vehicles with MOExtended tires: it is pos‐ dling characteristics are impaired, e.g. when # The defective tire must be replaced in sible to continue the journey for a short cornering, when accelerating strongly and every case. period of time. Make sure you observe the when braking. notes on MOExtended tires (run-flat tires) # Do not exceed the specified maximum With MOExtended tires (run-flat tires), you can (→ page 341). speed. continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a R Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can repair # Avoid any abrupt steering and driving total loss of pressure in one or more tires. How‐ the tire so that it is possible to continue the maneuvers as well as driving over ever, the tire affected must not show any clearly journey for a short period of time. To do this, obstacles (curbs, pot holes, off-road). visible damage. use the TIREFIT kit (→ page 342). This applies, in particular, to a loaded You can recognize MOExtended tires by the R Vehicles with Mercedes-Benz vehicle. MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tire. mbrace®(USA only): you can make a call for 342 Breakdown assistance

Vehicles with tire pressure monitoring sys‐ If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced R The wheel rim is damaged. tem: MOExtended tires may only be used in con‐ with an MOExtended tire, you can use a stand‐ R junction with an activated tire pressure monitor‐ ard tire as a temporary measure. You have driven at a very low tire pres‐ ing system. sure or on a flat tire. If a pressure loss warning message appears in Using the TIREFIT kit # Do not continue driving. the multifunction display: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the following readily available: R Check the tire for damage. R Tire sealant bottle R If driving on, observe the following notes. & WARNING Risk of injury and poisoning R Enclosed TIREFIT sticker from tire sealant Driving distance possible in limp-home mode R Tire inflation compressor after the pressure loss warning: The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita‐ tion. Do not allow it to come into contact Load condition Driving distance pos‐ You can use TIREFIT tire sealant to seal punctu‐ res of up to 0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in with the skin, eyes or clothing, and do not sible in limp-home swallow it. Do not inhale tire sealant fumes. mode the tire contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -4 °F (-20 °C). Keep the tire sealant away from children. Partially laden 50 miles (80 km) If you come into contact with the tire sealant, & WARNING Risk of accident when using observe the following: Fully laden 19 miles (30 km) tire sealant. # Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin R The driving distance possible in limp-home In the following situations, the tire sealant is immediately using water. mode may vary depending on the driving unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis‐ # If tire sealant gets into your eyes, thor‐ style. tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly: oughly rinse out the eyes using clean R Maximum permissible speed 50 mph R There are cuts or punctures in the tire water. (80 km/h). larger than those previously mentioned. Breakdown assistance 343

# If tire sealant has been swallowed, immediately rinse out the mouth thor‐ oughly and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. # Change out of any clothes contamina‐ ted with tire sealant immediately. # If allergic reactions occur, seek medical attention immediately. # Affix part 1 of the TIREFIT sticker to the * NOTE Overheating due to the tire infla‐ instrument cluster within the driver's field of tion compressor running too long vision. # Do not run the tire inflation compressor # Affix part 2 of the TIREFIT sticker near the for longer than ten minutes without valve on the wheel with the defective tire. interruption. # Pull plug 4 with the cable and hose 5 out of the tire inflation compressor housing. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes in # the sticker on the tire inflation compressor. Push the plug of hose 5 into flange 6 of tire sealant bottle 1 until the plug engages. Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four # years at a qualified specialist workshop. Place tire sealant bottle 1 head downwards into recess 2 of the tire inflation compres‐ # Do not remove any foreign objects which sor. have penetrated the tire. 344 Breakdown assistance

Do not switch off the tire inflation compres‐ # Drive forwards or back up very slowly for sor during this phase. approximately 33 ft (10 m). # Let the tire inflation compressor run for a # Pump the tire up again. maximum of ten minutes. After a maximum of ten minutes the tire The tire should then have attained a tire pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/ 29 psi). 29 psi). & WARNING Risk of accident due to the If tire sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the specified tire pressure not being reached affected area as quickly as possible. It is prefera‐ If the specified tire pressure is not reached # ble to use clean water. Remove the cap from valve 7 on the defec‐ after the specified time, the tire is too badly tive tire. If tire sealant gets on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethy‐ damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the # Screw filling hose onto valve . 8 7 lene. tire in this instance. # Insert plug 4 into a 12 V socket in your Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too vehicle. If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of low can significantly impair braking and han‐ # 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been dling characteristics. Switch the ignition on. reached: # Press on and off switch on the tire infla‐ # Do not continue driving. 3 # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. tion compressor. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The tire inflation compressor is switched on. # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the The tire is inflated. First, tire sealant is pum‐ defective tire. ped into the tire. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Please note that tire sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. Breakdown assistance 345

# If, after ten minutes, a tire pressure of * NOTE Staining caused by leaking tire Stop after driving for approximately ten 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has been reached: sealant minutes and check the tire pressure using the tire inflation compressor. & WARNING Risk of accident from driving After use, excess tire sealant may leak out The tire pressure must now be at least with sealed tires from the filling hose. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant # Therefore, place the filling hose in the impairs the handling characteristics and is plastic bag that contained the TIREFIT & WARNING Risk of accident due to the not suitable for higher speeds. kit. specified tire pressure not being reached # Adapt your driving style accordingly and If the specified tire pressure is not reached drive carefully. + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental after a brief drive, the tire is too badly dam‐ # Do not exceed the specified maximum pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ aged. The tire sealant cannot repair the tire speed with a tire that has been repaired sponsible disposal in this instance. using tire sealant. Tire sealant contains pollutants. Damaged tires and tire pressure that is too # low can significantly impair the braking prop‐ # Have the tire sealant bottle disposed of Observe the maximum permissible speed for professionally, e.g. at an authorized erties and the handling characteristics. a tire sealed with tire sealant 50 mph Mercedes-Benz Center. # Do not continue driving. (80 km/h). # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Affix the upper section of the TIREFIT sticker # Switch off the tire inflation compressor. to the instrument cluster where it will easily # Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the In cases such as the one mentioned above, con‐ be seen by the driver. defective tire. tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Or # Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla‐ call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or tion compressor. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). # Pull away immediately. 346 Breakdown assistance

# Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least # Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the You could lose control of the vehicle in the 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and sealed tire. following situations: Loading Information placard B‑pillar on the # Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire R driver's side or the tire pressure table in the when braking inflation compressor. R fuel filler flap for values. The filling hose stays on the tire sealant bot‐ in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers # To increase the tire pressure: switch on tle. and/or when the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road conditions the tire inflation compressor. # Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work‐ shop and have the tire, tire sealant bottle and # In the event of a short circuit or a simi‐ filling hose replaced there. lar incident, contact a qualified special‐ ist workshop immediately. # Do not continue driving. Battery (vehicle) # Always have work on the battery carried Notes on the 12 V battery out at a qualified specialist workshop. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to R Further information on ABS (→ page 166) work carried out incorrectly on the bat‐ R ® tery Further information on ESP (→ page 167) For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends # To reduce the tire pressure: press pressure Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit. This that you only use batteries which have been tes‐ release button 1 next to manometer 2. can lead to function restrictions in safety-rel‐ ted and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes- # When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew evant systems, for example the lighting sys‐ Benz. These batteries provide increased impact the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® protection to prevent vehicle occupants from tire. (Electronic Stability Program). The operating suffering acid burns should the battery be dam‐ safety of your vehicle may be restricted. aged in the event of an accident. Breakdown assistance 347

All vehicles except vehicles with a lithium- # Do not inhale battery gases. specialist workshop or to a collection ion battery # Keep children away from the battery. point for used batteries. & # WARNING Risk of explosion due to elec‐ Immediately rinse battery acid off thor‐ If you have to connect the 12 volt battery, con‐ trostatic charge oughly with plenty of clean water and tact a qualified specialist workshop. seek medical attention immediately. Electrostatic charge can cause sparks which Comply with safety notes and take protective may ignite the highly flammable gas mixture All vehicles measures when handling batteries. in the battery. Risk of explosion # To discharge any electrostatic charge + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental that may have built up, touch the metal damage caused by improper disposal of vehicle body before handling the bat‐ batteries tery. Fire, open flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created Avoid creating sparks. while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household Electrolyte or battery acid is corro‐ sive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes & WARNING Danger of chemical burns rubbish. # or clothing. Wear suitable protective from the battery acid clothing, in particular gloves, an Battery acid is caustic. apron and a face mask. Immediately # Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or Dispose of batteries in an rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off clothing. environmentally responsible manner. with clean water. Consult a doctor if necessary. # Do not lean over the battery. Take discharged batteries to a qualified 348 Breakdown assistance

Wear safety glasses. Starting assistance and charging the 12 V # Do not charge the battery at very low battery temperatures. Vehicles with a lithium-ion battery All other vehicles # Keep children away. When charging the battery and during start‐ # ing assistance, always use the jump-start When charging the battery and during start‐ connection point in the engine compartment. ing assistance, always use the jump-start connection point in the engine compartment. * Observe this Operator's Manual. NOTE Damage to the battery from over‐ * voltage NOTE Damaging the battery through overvoltage When charging using a battery charger with‐ out a maximum charging voltage, the battery When charging using a battery charger with‐ or the on-board electronics may be damaged. out a maximum charging voltage, the battery If you do not intend to use the vehicle over an or the vehicle electronics may be damaged. # extended period of time: Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ # mum charging voltage of 14.4 V. Only use battery chargers with a maxi‐ R Activate standby mode, or mum charging voltage of 14.8 V. R Connect the battery to a battery charger * approved by Mercedes-Benz, or NOTE Shortening the service life of the & battery by charging the battery at low WARNING Risk of explosion from hydro‐ R Consult a qualified specialist workshop to temperatures gen gas igniting disconnect the battery A battery generates hydrogen gas during the Charging the battery at very low tempera‐ charging process. If there is a short circuit or tures may shorten the service life of the bat‐ sparks start to form, there is a danger of the tery and have a negative effect on starting. hydrogen gas igniting. Breakdown assistance 349

# Make sure that the positive terminal of # Avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks It is recommended that you have a thawed bat‐ the connected battery does not come and smoking. tery checked at a qualified specialist workshop. into contact with vehicle parts. # Make sure that there is sufficient venti‐ All vehicles # Never place metal objects or tools on a lation during the charging process and * battery. during starting assistance. NOTE Damage caused by numerous or extended attempts to start the engine # When connecting and disconnecting the # Do not lean over a battery. battery, you must observe the descri‐ Numerous or extended attempts to start the bed order for the battery clamps. If the indicator/warning lamps in the instrument engine may damage the catalytic converter # When giving starting assistance, always cluster do not light up at low temperatures, it is due to non-combusted fuel. make sure that you only connect bat‐ very likely that the discharged battery has fro‐ # Avoid numerous and extended attempts tery terminals with identical polarity. zen. to start the engine. # During starting assistance, you must & WARNING Risk of explosion from a fro‐ Observe the following points during starting observe the described order for con‐ zen battery necting and disconnecting the jumper assistance and when charging the battery: cables. A discharged battery may freeze at tempera‐ R Only use undamaged jumper cable/charging tures slightly above or below freezing point. # Do not connect or disconnect the bat‐ cables with a sufficient cross-section and tery clamps while the engine is running. During starting assistance or battery charg‐ insulated terminal clamps. ing, battery gas may be released. R Non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps & WARNING Risk of explosion during # Always thaw a frozen battery out first must not come into contact with other metal charging process and starting assistance before charging it or performing start‐ parts while the jumper cable/charging cable ing assistance. is connected to the battery/jump-start con‐ During the charging process and starting nection point. assistance, the battery may release an explo‐ The service life of a battery that has been sive gas mixture. thawed may be dramatically shortened. 350 Breakdown assistance

R The jumper cable/charging cable must not # Automatic transmission: Shift the trans‐ # Connect positive clamp 2 on your vehicle to come into contact with any parts which may mission to position j. positive pole of donor battery using the move when the engine is running. # Make sure that the ignition and all electrical jumper cable/charging cable. Always begin R Always make sure that neither you nor the consumers are switched off. with positive clamp 2 on your own vehicle first. battery is electrostatically charged. # Open the hood. R Keep away from fire and open flames. # During the starting assistance proce‐ R dure: start the engine of the donor vehicle Do not lean over the battery. and run at idle speed. R When charging: only use battery chargers # Connect the negative pole of the donor bat‐ tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz and tery and ground point 3 of your own vehicle read the battery charger's operating instruc‐ by using the jumper cable/charging cable. tions before charging the battery. Begin with the donor battery first. Observe the additional following points during # During starting assistance: start the starting assistance: engine of your own vehicle. R Starting assistance may only be provided # During the charging process: start the using batteries with a nominal voltage of charging process. 12 V. # During starting assistance: let the engines R The vehicles must not touch. run for several minutes. R Gasoline engine: Only accept starting assis‐ # During starting assistance: before discon‐ tance if the engine and exhaust system are necting the jumper cable, switch on an elec‐ cold. trical consumer on your own vehicle, e.g. the # Slide cover 1 of positive clamp 2 on the rear window heater or lighting. # Secure the vehicle by applying the electric jump-starting connection point in the direc‐ parking brake. tion of the arrow. Breakdown assistance 351

When the starting assistance/charging process You can obtain further information on starting * NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to tow‐ is complete: assistance at any qualified specialist workshop. ing away incorrectly # First, remove the jumper cable/charging # Observe the instructions and notes on cable from ground point 3 and negative Tow starting or towing away pole of the donor battery, then from positive towing away. clamp 2 and positive pole of the donor bat‐ Permitted towing methods tery. Begin each time with the contacts on Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your your own vehicle first. vehicle in the case of a breakdown, rather than # After removing the jumper cable/charging towing it away. cable, close cover 1 of positive clamp 2. 352 Breakdown assistance

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Front axle raised Rear axle raised Vehicles with manual transmission Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at 31 mph (50 km/h) 31 mph (50 km/h) 31 mph (50 km/h) Vehicles with automatic transmis‐ Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at No Yes, if the steering wheel is fixed in sion 31 mph (50 km/h) the center position with a steering wheel lock. 4MATIC vehicles Yes, maximum 31 miles (50 km) at No No 31 mph (50 km/h)

Towing with a raised axle: towing should be # Make sure that the battery is connected and R vehicles with automatic transmission: the performed by a towing company. charged. automatic transmission cannot be shifted to position i or j. When the battery is discharged: Towing the vehicle with both axles on the R the engine cannot be started. ground R the electric parking brake cannot be released # Observe the notes on the permitted towing or applied. methods (→ page 351) (→ page 352). Breakdown assistance 353

% Vehicles with automatic transmission: if & WARNING Risk of accident when towing door, otherwise the automatic transmission the automatic transmission cannot be shif‐ a vehicle which is too heavy automatically shifts to position j. ted to position i, have the vehicle trans‐ # Install the towing eye (→ page 356). ported away (→ page 354). A towing vehicle If the vehicle being tow-started or towed # Attach the tow bar. with lifting equipment is required for vehicle away is heavier than the permissible gross transportation. mass of your vehicle, the following situations can occur: * NOTE Damage due to incorrect connec‐ tion * NOTE Damage due to towing away at R The towing eye may become detached. excessively high speeds or over long dis‐ R The vehicle/trailer combination may # Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to tances swerve or even overturn. the towing eyes. The drivetrain could be damaged when tow‐ # If another vehicle is tow-started or # Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ing at excessively high speeds or over long towed away, its weight must not exceed distances. (→ page 63). the permissible gross mass of your own # Do not activate the HOLD function. # A towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) vehicle. must not be exceeded. # Deactivate Active Brake Assist (→ page 174). # A towing distance of 30 miles (50 km) If a vehicle must be tow started or towed away, # Vehicles with automatic transmission: must not be exceeded. its weight must not exceed the permissible gross shift the automatic transmission to position mass of the towing vehicle. i. # Information on the permissible gross mass of # Release the electric parking brake. the vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden‐ tification plate . # Vehicles with automatic transmission: do not open the driver's door or front passenger 354 Breakdown assistance

# & WARNING Risk of accident due to limi‐ * NOTE Damage due to excessive tractive Load the vehicle onto the transporter. ted safety-related functions during the power # Vehicles with automatic transmission: towing process Shift the automatic transmission to position If you pull away sharply, the tractive power j. Safety-related functions are limited or no lon‐ may be too high and the vehicles could be ger available in the following situations: damaged. # Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle and prevent it from rolling away. R the ignition is switched off. # Pull away slowly and smoothly. # Only secure the vehicle by the wheels. R the brake system or power steering sys‐ tem is malfunctioning. Vehicles with ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping Loading the vehicle for transport R the energy supply or the on-board electri‐ System PLUS) cal system is malfunctioning. # Observe the notes on towing away (→ page 352). & WARNING Risk of an accident when When your vehicle is then towed away, signif‐ # Connect the tow bar to the towing eye to transporting vehicles with Adaptive icantly more effort may be required to steer Damping System PLUS and brake than is normally required. load the vehicle. # The reduced damping forces on the vehicle # Use a tow bar. Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift the automatic transmission to position being transported can cause the vehicle/ # Make sure that the steering wheel can i. trailer combination to start to swing. move freely, before towing the vehicle % As a result, when transporting vehicles with away. Vehicles with automatic transmission: the Adaptive Damping System PLUS, the The automatic transmission may be locked vehicle/trailer combination may start to skid. in position j in the event of damage to the Consequently, you could lose control of your electrical system. To shift to i, provide the vehicle. on-board electrical system with power # (→ page 348). When transporting, ensure that: Breakdown assistance 355

R The vehicle has been loaded onto 4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with automatic Towing eye storage location the transporter correctly transmission R The vehicle is secured at all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps R The maximum permissible speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) is not exceeded when transporting

* NOTE Damage to the vehicle from secur‐ ing it incorrectly Towing eye 1 is attached to the edge of the # After loading, the vehicle must be # Make sure that the front and rear axles come cargo compartment under the cargo compart‐ secured at all four wheels. Otherwise, to rest on the same transport vehicle. ment floor. the vehicle could be damaged. * Vehicles with folding bench seat: The towing # A minimum distance of 8 in (20 cm) up NOTE Damage to the drivetrain due to eye is located under a cover. and 4 in (10 cm) down must be kept to incorrect positioning the transport platform. # Do not position the vehicle above the # connection point of the transport vehi‐ Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after cle. loading. 356 Breakdown assistance

Installing the towing eye * NOTE Damage due to incorrect use of Electrical fuses the towing eye Notes on electrical fuses When a towing eye is used to recover a vehi‐ & cle, the vehicle may be damaged in the proc‐ WARNING Risk of accident and injury ess. due to overloaded lines # Only use the towing eye to tow away or If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if tow start the vehicle. you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloa‐ ded. Tow starting the vehicle (emergency engine This could result in a fire. start) # Always replace faulty fuses with speci‐ Vehicles with automatic transmission fied new fuses containing the correct amperage. * NOTE Damage to the automatic trans‐ mission due to tow starting * NOTE Damage caused by incorrect fuses The automatic transmission may be damaged # Press the mark on cover 1 inwards and Incorrect fuses may cause damage to electri‐ remove. in the process of tow starting vehicles with cal components or systems. automatic transmission. # # Only use Mercedes-Benz approved Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the # stop. Vehicles with automatic transmission fuses with the correct fuse rating. must not be tow started. % Make sure that cover 1 engages in the Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the bumper when you remove the towing eye. # Vehicles with automatic transmission must same rating, which you can recognize by the not be tow started. Breakdown assistance 357 color and fuse rating. The fuse ratings are listed The electrical fuses are located in various fuse Opening in the fuse assignment diagram. boxes: & Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in R Fuse box in the engine compartment on the WARNING Risk of injury from using the the cargo compartment (→ page 359). driver's side (→ page 357) windshield wipers while the engine hood is open R Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit * NOTE Damage or malfunctions caused (→ page 358) When the engine hood is open and the wind‐ by moisture R Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell shield wipers are set in motion, you can be trapped by the wiper linkage. Moisture may cause damage to the electrical (→ page 358) # system or cause it to malfunction. R Fuse box in the cargo compartment on the Always switch off the windshield wipers # When the fuse box is open, make sure right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed and ignition before opening the engine hood. that no moisture can enter the fuse in the direction of travel (→ page 359) box. # When closing the fuse box, make sure Fuse box in the engine compartment that the seal of the lid is positioned cor‐ rectly on the fuse box. Prerequisites Observe the notes on electrical fuses If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the (→ page 356). cause traced and rectified at a qualified special‐ Have the following readily available: ist workshop. R A dry cloth Ensure the following before replacing a fuse: R A screwdriver R The vehicle is secured against rolling away. R All electrical consumers are switched off. R The ignition is switched off. 358 Breakdown assistance

# Insert lid into the bracket at the rear of the fuse box. # Fold down lid of the fuse box and tighten screws 4. # Insert cover 1 on both sides and engage safety clips. # Close the hood.

Cockpit fuse box The fuse box is on the side of the dashboard under a cover. # Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen‐ ter for further information. # Turn clip 2 on cover 1 a quarter-turn to # Remove any existing moisture from the fuse the left. box using a dry cloth. Fuse box in the front passenger footwell # Pull cover 1 upwards in the direction of the # Loosen screws 4, remove fuse box lid 3 Requirement: arrow. from the top. R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 356). Closing # Check whether the seal is positioned cor‐ rectly in the lid. Breakdown assistance 359

# Fold down the side cover.

# Fold cover 2 down in the direction of the arrow. # Remove cover 1. # Open cover 1 in the direction of the arrow The fuse assignment diagram is in a recess on and remove it. the side of the fuse box.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment Requirement: R Observe the notes on electrical fuses (→ page 356). 360 Wheels and tires

Noise or unusual handling characteristics & WARNING Risk of aquaplaning due to # For safety reasons, replace the tires While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises insufficient tire tread before the legally prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached. and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pulling Insufficient tire tread will result in reduced to one side. This may indicate that the wheels or tire grip. The tire tread is no longer able to Carry out the following checks on all wheels reg‐ tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is dissipate water. defective, reduce your speed immediately. Stop ularly, at least once a month or as required, e.g. the vehicle as soon as possible to check the This means that in heavy rain or slush the prior to a long journey or driving off-road: wheels and tires for damage. Hidden tire dam‐ risk of hydroplaning is increased, in particu‐ R Check the tire pressure (→ page 361). age could also be causing the unusual handling lar if vehicle speed is not adapted to suit the conditions. R Visual inspection of wheels and tires for characteristics. If you find no signs of damage, damage. If the tire pressure is too high or too low, have the tires and wheels checked at a qualified R specialist workshop. tires may exhibit different levels of wear at Check the valve caps. different locations on the tire contact sur‐ The valves must be protected against mois‐ face. ture and dirt by the valve caps approved Checking wheels and tires regularly # Thus, you should regularly check the especially for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. R & tread depth and the condition of the tire Visual check of the tread depth and the tire WARNING Risk of accident from dam‐ contact surface across the entire width contact surface across the entire width. aged tires of all tires. The minimum tread depth for summer tires is Damaged tires can cause tire pressure loss. Minimum tread depth for: â in (3 mm) and for winter tires ã in As a result, you could lose control of your (4 mm). R Summer tires: â in (3 mm) vehicle. R ã # Check the tires regularly for signs of M+S tires: in (4 mm) damage and replace any damaged tires immediately. Wheels and tires 361

This could cause damage to the vehicle or R If snow chains are mounted, the maximum the tires. permissible speed is 30 mph (50 km/h). # Never mount snow chains on the front R Vehicles with Parking Pilot: Do not use wheels. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC if snow chains are mounted. # Only mount snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. R Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: If snow chains are mounted, only drive at raised vehi‐ cle level. * NOTE Damage to the wheel trim from mounted snow chains % You can deactivate ESP® to pull away Six marks 1 show where the bar indicators If snow chains are mounted to steel wheels, (→ page 170). This allows the wheels to spin, (arrow) are integrated into the tire tread. They the wheel trims can be damaged. achieving an increased driving force. are visible once a tread depth of approximately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. # Remove the wheel trims of steel wheels before mounting snow chains. Tire pressure Notes on tire pressure Notes on snow chains R Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tire combinations. You can obtain & & WARNING Risk of accident due to insuf‐ WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ information about this from an authorized ficient or excessive tire pressure rect mounting of snow chains Mercedes-Benz Center. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the If you have mounted snow chains to the front R For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your following risks: wheels, the snow chains may drag against R the vehicle body or chassis components. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains The tires may burst, especially as the with the same quality standard. load and vehicle speed increase. 362 Wheels and tires

R R The tires may wear excessively and/or Adversely affect handling characteristics and & WARNING Risk of accident from exces‐ unevenly, which may greatly impair tire thus driving safety, e.g. due to hydroplaning. sive tire pressure traction. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to Tires with excessively high pressure can R The driving characteristics, as well as insufficient tire pressure burst because they are damaged more easily steering and braking, may be greatly by highway fill, pot holes etc. impaired. Tires with pressure that is too low can over‐ heat and burst as a result. In addition, they also suffer from irregular # Comply with the recommended tire wear, which can significantly impair the brak‐ pressure and check the tire pressure of In addition, they also suffer from excessive ing properties and the handling characteris‐ all tires including the spare wheel regu‐ and/or irregular wear, which can significantly tics. impair the braking properties and the han‐ larly: # dling characteristics. Avoid excessively high tire pressures in R at least once a month all the tires, including the spare wheel. # Avoid excessively low tire pressures in R when the load changes all the tires, including the spare wheel. Excessively high tire pressure can result in: R before embarking on a longer journey R Increased braking distance R if operating conditions change, e.g. off- Tire pressure which is too low can cause: R road driving R Tire defects as a result of overheating Impaired handling characteristics R R Irregular wear # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. Impaired handling characteristics R Irregular wear R Impaired driving comfort Driving with tire pressure that is too high or too R Increased fuel consumption R Susceptibility to damage low can: R Shorten the service life of the tires. R Cause increased tire damage. Wheels and tires 363

& WARNING Risk of accident caused by Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire & WARNING Risk of accident from unsuita‐ repeated drop in tire pressure pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does ble accessories on the tire valves not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the pressure. If you mount unsuitable accessories onto tire wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring sys‐ valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Insufficient tire pressure can cause the tires tem: You can also check the tire pressure using malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Tire pressure monitoring systems for to burst. the on-board computer. # retrofitting will cause the tire valve to remain Inspect the tire for signs of foreign Only correct tire pressure when the tires are open. This can also result in tire pressure objects. cold. Conditions for cold tires: loss. # Check whether the wheel or valve has a R The vehicle has been parked with the tires # Only screw standard valve caps or valve leak. out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. caps specifically approved by # If you are unable to rectify the damage, R The vehicle has traveled less than 1 mile Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle onto contact a qualified specialist workshop. (1.6 km). the tire valve. You can find information on tire pressure for the A rise in the tire temperature of 18 °F (10 °C) vehicle's factory-mounted tires on the following increases the tire pressure by approx. 10 kPa Tire pressure table labels: (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account when checking the tire pressure of warm tires. The tire pressure table is on the inside of the R Tire and Loading Information placard on the fuel filler flap. The tire pressure recommended for increased B‑pillar of your vehicle (→ page 367). % load/speed in the tire pressure table can affect The data shown in the images is example R Tire pressure table on the inside of the fuel the ride comfort. data. filler flap (→ page 363). Observe the maximum tire pressure (→ page 374). 364 Wheels and tires

R Maximum tire pressure (→ page 374)

Checking tire pressures manually # Read the tire pressure for the current operat‐ ing conditions from the Tire and Loading Information placard or the tire pressure table. Observe the notes on tire pressure. # Remove the valve cap of the tire to be checked. The tire pressure table shows the recommended # Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto tire pressure for all tires approved for this vehi‐ the valve. cle. The recommended tire pressures apply for # Read the tire pressure. cold tires under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. # If the tire pressure is lower than the recom‐ mended value, increase the tire pressure to If one or more tire sizes precede a tire pressure, Some tire pressure tables only show the rim the recommended value. the tire pressure information following is only diameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g. valid for those tire sizes. # If the tire pressure is higher than the recom‐ R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size and mended value, release air. To do so, press The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully can be found on the tire side wall (→ page 375). down the metal pin in the valve, e.g. using laden" are defined in the table for different num‐ Be sure to also observe the following further the tip of a pen for example. Then check the bers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The related subjects: tire pressure again using the tire pressure actual number of seats may differ from this. R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) gauge. R Tire and Loading Information placard # Screw the valve cap onto the valve. (→ page 367) Wheels and tires 365

Further related subjects: tire pressure table, you need to determine the system is not operating properly. The R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) the proper tire pressure for those tires. TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with R Tire pressure table (→ page 363) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has the low tire pressure indicator lamp. When R been equipped with a tire pressure monitor‐ the system detects a malfunction, the indica‐ Tire and Loading Information placard tor lamp will flash for approximately a minute (→ page 367) ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure indicator lamp when one or more of and then remain continuously illuminated. your tires are significantly underinflated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent Tire pressure monitoring system Accordingly, if the low tire pressure indicator vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. Function of the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ lamp lights up, you should stop and check tem your tires as soon as possible, and inflate When the malfunction indicator is illumina‐ them to the proper pressure. Driving on a ted, the system may not be able to detect or & DANGER Risk of accident due to incor‐ significantly underinflated tire causes the tire signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS rect tire pressure to overheat and can lead to tire failure. malfunctions may occur for a variety of rea‐ Underinflation also increases fuel consump‐ sons, including the installation of incompati‐ Every tire, including the spare (if provided), tion and reduces tire tread life, and may ble replacement or alternate tires or wheels should be checked when cold at least once a affect the vehicle's handling and braking abil‐ on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from month and inflated to the pressure recom‐ ity. Please note that the TPMS is not a substi‐ functioning properly. mended by the vehicle manufacturer (see tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the Tire and Loading Information placard on the Always check the TPMS malfunction warning driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire lamp after replacing one or more tires or B-pillar on the driver’s side or the tire pres‐ pressure, even if underinflation has not sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the reached the level to trigger illumination of replacement or alternate tires and wheels of your vehicle). If your vehicle has tires of a the TPMS low tire pressure indicator lamp. different size than the size indicated on the allow the TPMS to continue to function prop‐ Tire and Loading Information placard or the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a erly. TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when 366 Wheels and tires

The system checks the tire pressure and the tire In most cases, the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ On-board computer: temperature of the tires installed on the vehicle tem will automatically update the new reference , . by means of a tire pressure sensor. values after you have changed the tire pressure. You can, however, also update the reference val‐ One of the following displays appears: New tire pressure sensors, e.g. in winter tires, R are automatically taught-in the first time they are ues by restarting the tire pressure monitoring Current tire pressure and tire temperature of driven. system manually (→ page 367). the individual wheels: The tire pressure and the tire temperature System limitations appear in the multifunction display The tire pressure monitoring system does not (→ page 218). issue a warning: If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the R If the tire pressure is set incorrectly. tire temperature is excessive, a warning will be R given: If there is a sudden pressure loss caused, for example by a foreign object penetrating the R Via display messages (→ page 435). tire. R Via the h warning lamp in the instrument R If there is a malfunction caused by another cluster (→ page 466). radio signal source. R It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ pressure to the recommended cold tire pressure ted subject: suitable for the operating situation. Set the tire R : the teach-in R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) pressure for cold tires using a tire pressure process of the system is not yet complete. gauge. Note that the correct tire pressure for the Checking the tire pressure with the tire pres‐ The tire pressures are already being moni‐ current operating situation must first be taught- sure monitoring system tored. in to the tire pressure monitoring system. Requirement: # Compare the tire pressure with the recom‐ R The ignition is switched on. mended tire pressure for the current operat‐ Wheels and tires 367

ing condition (→ page 363). Observe the R The wheels or tires have been changed or Radio-equipment approval of the tire pres‐ notes on tire temperature (→ page 361). newly installed. sure monitoring system % The values displayed in the multifunction dis‐ On-board computer: Radio equipment approval numbers play may deviate from those of the tire pres‐ , . sure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high CountryRadio equipment approval altitudes, the tire pressure value indicated by # Swipe downwards on the Touch Control on number the left-hand side of the steering wheel. pressure gauges are higher than those Canada FCC ID: MRXAG5SP4 shown by the on-board computer. In this The case, do not reduce the tire pressure. message is shown in the multi‐ USA FCC ID: MRXMFR Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ function display. IC: 2546A-AG5SP4 ted subject: # Press a to confirm the restart. Further information on the declaration of con‐ R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) The message is shown in the multifunction display. formity for wireless vehicle components (→ page 23). Restarting the tire pressure monitoring sys‐ Current warning messages are deleted and tem the h yellow warning lamp goes out. Requirement: After you have driven for a few minutes, the Loading the vehicle R The recommended tire pressure is correctly system checks whether the current tire pres‐ Tire and Loading Information placard set for the respective operating condition on sure values are within the specified range. each of the four wheels (→ page 361). The current tire pressure values are then & WARNING Risk of accident from overloa‐ accepted as reference values and monitored. Restart the tire pressure monitoring system in ded tires the following situations: Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ Overloaded tires may overheat and burst as a ted subject: R The tire pressure has changed. consequence. Overloaded tires can also R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) impair the steering and handling characteris‐ tics and lead to brake failure. 368 Wheels and tires

# Observe the load rating of the tires. R Recommended tire pressures 1 for cold # tires. The recommended tire pressures are The load rating must be at least half the valid for the maximum permissible load and permissible axle load of the vehicle. up to the maximum permissible vehicle # Never overload the tires by exceeding speed. the maximum load. Please also note: The Tire and Loading Information placard is on R Information on permissible weights and loads the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle. on the vehicle identification plate . R Information on tire pressure on the tire pres‐ sure table (→ page 363). Further related subjects: R Determining the maximum permissible load (→ page 368) R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) % The data shown in the image is example data. Determining the maximum permissible load The Tire and Loading Information placard shows: R The following steps have been developed as 1 Tire and Loading Information placard Maximum number of seats 2 according to the maximum number of people permitted to required of all manufacturers under Title 49, travel in the vehicle. Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575, pur‐ R suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Maximum permissible load 3 comprises the Safety Act of 1966". gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load and luggage. Wheels and tires 369

# Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined Even if you have calculated the total load care‐ Calculation example for determining the weight of occupants and cargo should never fully, you should still make sure that the maxi‐ maximum load exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." ("The combined mum permissible gross mass and the maximum The following table shows examples of how to weight of occupants and cargo should never permissible axle load of your vehicle are not calculate total and load capacities with varying exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.") on your vehicle's exceeded. Details can be found on the vehicle seating configurations and different numbers Tire and Loading Information placard. identification plate. and sizes of occupants. The following examples # Step 2: Determine the combined weight of # Have your loaded vehicle – including driver, use a maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This the driver and passengers that will be travel‐ occupants and load – weighed on a vehicle is for illustration purposes only. Make sure ing in your vehicle. weighbridge. you are using the actual load limit for your vehi‐ # Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the The measured values may not exceed the cle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading driver and passengers from XXX kg or maximum permissible values stated on the Information placard (→ page 367). vehicle identification plate. XXX lbs. The higher the weight of all the occupants, the # Step 4: The resulting figure equals the per‐ Further related subjects: smaller the maximum load for luggage. missible cargo and luggage load capacity. For R Calculation example for determining the max‐ example: If "XXX" equals 1400 lbs and there imum load (→ page 369) are five occupants in your vehicle with a R Tire and Loading Information placard weight of 150 lbs each, the maximum cargo (→ page 367) and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 - R Tire pressure table (→ page 363) 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). R Vehicle identification plate # Step 5: Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo that the vehicle will be carrying. For safety reasons, this weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and lug‐ gage load capacity calculated in step 4. 370 Wheels and tires

Step 1

Example 1Example 2 Combined maximum weight of occupants and 1500 lbs (680 kg)1500 lbs (680 kg) load (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

Step 2

Example 1Example 2 Number of people in the vehicle (driver and 51 occupants) Distribution of the occupantsFront: 2 Front: 1 Rear: 3 Weight of occupantsOccupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 1: 200 lbs (91 kg) Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Total weight of all occupants750 lbs (340 kg)200 lbs (91 kg) Wheels and tires 371

Step 3

Example 1Example 2 Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 750 lbs (340 kg) = 750 lbs 1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò 200 lbs (91 kg) = 1300 lbs rating from the Tire and Loading Information (340 kg) (589 kg) placard minus the gross weight of all occupants) 372 Wheels and tires

Tire labeling 5 Manufacturer Overview of tire labeling 6 Characteristics of the tire (→ page 375) 7 Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, speed rating and load index (→ page 375) 8 Tire name % The data shown in the image is example data.

Tire Quality Grading 1 Tread wear grade In accordance with the US Department of Trans‐ 2 Traction grade portation's "Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand‐ ards", tire manufacturers are required to grade 3 Temperature grade their tires on the basis of the following three per‐ % The data shown in the image is example formance factors: data. % The classification is not legally stipulated for Canada, but it is generally stated. 1 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard Tread wear grade (→ page 372) The tread wear grade is a comparative rating 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number based on the wear rate of the tire when tested (→ page 373) under controlled conditions on a specified test track of the US Department of Transportation. 3 Maximum tire load (→ page 374) For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one 4 Maximum tire pressure (→ page 374) Wheels and tires 373 and one-half times as well on the government * NOTE Damage to the drivetrain from sure of all tires including the spare test track as a tire graded 100. wheelspin wheel. The relative performance of tires depends upon # # Adjust the tire pressure as necessary. the actual conditions of their use, however, and Avoid wheelspin. may depart significantly from the norm due to The temperature grades are A (the highest), B variations in driving habits, service practices and The traction grades – from highest to lowest – are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the and C. They represent the tire's resistance to the differences in road characteristics and climate generation of heat and its ability to dissipate conditions. tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas‐ ured under controlled conditions on specified heat when tested under controlled conditions on Traction grade government test surfaces made of asphalt and a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus‐ concrete. tained high temperature can cause the material & DANGER Risk of accident due to inade‐ of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and quate traction Temperature grade excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of per‐ The traction grade assigned to this tire is & WARNING Risk of accident from tire formance which all passenger car tires must based on straight-ahead braking traction overheating and tire failure meet under the requirements of the US Depart‐ tests, and does not include either accelera‐ ment of Transportation. tion, cornering, hydroplaning or peak traction The temperature grade for this tire is estab‐ characteristics. lished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla‐ DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) # Always adapt your driving style and tion, or excessive loading, either separately drive at a speed to suit the prevailing or in combination, can cause excessive heat US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man‐ traffic and weather conditions. build-up and possible tire failure. ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on the side wall of each tire produced. # Observe the recommended tire pres‐ sures and regularly check the tire pres‐ 374 Wheels and tires

R Tire size: identifier 3 describes the tire % The data shown in the image is example size. data. R Tire type code: tire type code 4 can be Maximum tire load 1 is the maximum permissi‐ used by the manufacturer as a code to ble weight for which the tire is approved. describe specific characteristics of the tire. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the speci‐ R Manufacturing date: manufacturing date fied load limit. The maximum permissible load 5 provides information about the age of a can be found on the vehicle's Tire and Loading tire. The 1st and 2nd positions represent the Information placard on the B-pillar on the driv‐ calendar week and the 3rd and 4th positions er's side (→ page 367). state the year of manufacture (e.g. "3208" % The data shown in the image is example represents the 32nd week of 2008). data. Specifications for maximum tire pressure The TIN is a unique identification number to Information on the maximum tire load identify tires and comprises the following: R DOT (Department of Transportation): tire symbol marks 1 indicating that the tire complies with the requirements of the US Department of Transportation. R Manufacturer identification code: manu‐ facturer identification code 2 contains details of the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Further % The data shown in the image is example information on retreaded tires (→ page 380). data. Wheels and tires 375

Never exceed maximum tire pressure 1 speci‐ Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, fied for the tire. speed rating and load index & Information on tire characteristics WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ ing the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the specified tire load rating or the permissible speed rating may lead to tire damage and to the tires bursting. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. 1 Preceding letter # Observe the tire load rating and speed 2 Nominal tire width in millimeters rating required for your vehicle. 3 Aspect ratio in % 4 Tire code % The data shown in the image is example 5 Rim diameter data. 6 Load-bearing index This information describes the type of tire cord 7 Speed rating and the number of layers in side wall 1 and 8 Load index under tire tread 2. % The data shown in the image is example data. Information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop. 376 Wheels and tires

Preceding letter 1: Rim diameter 5: % An electronic speed limiter prevents your R Without: passenger vehicle tires according to The diameter of the bead seat (not the diameter vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph European manufacturing standards. of the rim flange). The rim diameter is specified (210 km/h). R "P": passenger vehicle tires according to US in inches (in). Make sure that your tires have the required manufacturing standards. Load-bearing index 6: speed rating. You can obtain information on the R "LT": light truck tires according to US manu‐ Numerical code that specifies the maximum required speed rating from an authorized facturing standards. load-bearing capacity of a tire (e.g. "91" corre‐ Mercedes-Benz Center. R "T": compact emergency spare wheels with sponds to 1356 lbs (615 kg)). Summer tires high tire pressure that are only designed for The load-bearing capacity of the tire must be at IndexSpeed rating temporary use in an emergency. least half the permissible axle load of your vehi‐ cle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Qup to 100 mph (160 km/h) Aspect ratio 3: specified load limit. Ratio between tire height and tire width in per‐ Rup to 106 mph (170 km/h) cent (tire height divided by tire width). See also: R Maximum permissible load on the Tire and Sup to 112 mph (180 km/h) Tire code 4 (tire type): Loading Information placard (→ page 367) R "R" radial tire Tup to 118 mph (190 km/h) R Maximum tire load (→ page 374) R "D": bias ply tire R Load index Hup to 130 mph (210 km/h) R "B": bias belted tires Vup to 149 mph (240 km/h) R "ZR": radial tire with a maximum speed above Speed rating 7: 149 mph (240 km/h) (optional) Specifies the approved maximum speed of the Wup to 168 mph (270 km/h) tire. Yup to 186 mph (300 km/h) Wheels and tires 377

R IndexSpeed rating All-weather tires and winter tires "C", "D", "E": a load range that depends on IndexSpeed rating the maximum load that the tire can carry at a ZR...Y1 up to 186 mph (300 km/h) certain pressure Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) ZR...(..Y)1 over 186 mph (300 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Definition of terms for tires and loading 1 ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) Tire structure and characteristics: describes 2 H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h) the number of layers or the number of rubber- R Specifying the speed rating as the "ZR" index coated belts in the tire contact surface and the in tire code is optional for tires up to V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) 4 tire wall. These are made of steel, nylon, poly‐ 186 mph (300 km/h). Winter tires bear the i snowflake symbol ester and other materials. R If your tire code includes "ZR" and there 4 and fulfill the requirements of the Rubber Manu‐ Bar: metric unit for tire pressure. is no speed rating , find out what the max‐ 7 facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and imum speed is from the tire manufacturer. Association of Canada (RAC) regarding the tire 100 kilopascal (kPa) is the equivalent of one bar. R If load-bearing index and speed rating 6 7 traction on snow. DOT (Department of Transportation): DOT- are in brackets, the maximum speed rating of marked tires fulfill the requirements of the your tire is above 186 mph (300 km/h). To Load index 8: US Department of Transportation. find out the maximum speed, ask the tire R No specification given: standard load (SL) manufacturer. tire Average weight of the vehicle occupants: the R "XL" or "Extra Load": extra load tire or rein‐ number of vehicle occupants for which the vehi‐ forced tire cle is designed, multiplied by 150 lb (68 kg). R "Light Load": light load tire

1 "ZR" stated in the tire code. 2 Or "M+S i" for winter tires 378 Wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards: a regardless of whether it is actually installed on of the fully laden vehicle (weight of the vehicle uniform standard to grade the quality of tires the vehicle or not. including all accessories, occupants, fuel, lug‐ with regard to tread quality, tire traction and Rim: the part of the wheel on which the tire is gage and the trailer drawbar noseweight if appli‐ temperature characteristics. The quality grading installed. cable). The gross vehicle weight rating is speci‐ assessment is made by the manufacturer follow‐ fied on the vehicle identification plate on the ing specifications from the U.S. government. The GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating): the GAWR B‑pillar on the driver's side. is the maximum permissible axle load. The quality grade of a tire is imprinted on the side Maximum weight of the laden vehicle: the wall of the tire. actual load on an axle must never exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight maximum weight is the sum of the curb weight Recommended tire pressure: the recommen‐ rating can be found on the vehicle identification of the vehicle, the weight of the accessories, the ded tire pressure is the tire pressure specified plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's side. maximum load and the weight of optional equip‐ for the tires mounted to the vehicle at the fac‐ ment installed at the factory. tory. Speed rating: the speed rating is part of the tire identification. It specifies the speed range for Kilopascal (kPa): metric unit for tire pressure. The tire and information table contains the rec‐ which a tire is approved. 6.9 kPa corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for ommended tire pressures for cold tires, the max‐ tire pressure is bar. 100 kilopascal (kPa) equals imum permissible load and the maximum per‐ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight): the gross vehicle 1 bar. missible vehicle speed. weight comprises the weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel, accesso‐ Load index: in addition to the load-bearing The tire pressure table contains the recommen‐ ries installed, occupants, luggage and the trailer index, the load index may also be imprinted on ded tire pressures for cold tires under various drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross the side wall of the tire. This specifies the load- operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehicle bearing capacity of the tire more precisely. of the vehicle. weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle Curb weight: the weight of a vehicle with stand‐ Increased vehicle weight due to optional identification plate on the B‑pillar on the driver's ard equipment including the maximum capacity equipment: the combined weight of all standard side. of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air and optional equipment available for the vehicle, GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating): the conditioning system and optional equipment if GVWR is the maximum permitted gross weight Wheels and tires 379 these are installed on the vehicle, but does not without direct sunlight on the tires or the vehicle er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and include passengers or luggage. has been driven for less than 1 mile (1.6 km). the manufacturing date. Maximum tire load: the maximum tire load is Tire contact surface: the part of the tire that Load-bearing index: the load-bearing index is a the maximum permissible weight in kilograms or comes into contact with the road. code that contains the maximum load-bearing lbs for which a tire is approved. Tire bead: the purpose of the tire bead is to capacity of a tire. Maximum permissible tire pressure: maxi‐ ensure that the tire sits securely on the wheel Traction: traction is the grip resulting from fric‐ mum permissible tire pressure for one tire. rim. There are several wire cores in the tire bead tion between the tires and the road surface. Maximum load on one tire: maximum load on to prevent the tire from changing length on the Wear indicator: narrow bars (tread wear bars) one tire. This is calculated by dividing the maxi‐ wheel rim. that are distributed over the tire contact surface. mum axle load of one axle by two. Side wall: the part of the tire between the tread If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear PSI (pounds per square inch): standard unit of and the tire bead. limit of 1/16 in (1.6 mm) has been reached. measurement for tire pressure. Weight of optional equipment: the combined Distribution of vehicle occupants: distribution Aspect ratio: ratio between tire height and tire weight of the optional equipment weighing more of vehicle occupants over designated seat posi‐ width in percent. than the replaced standard parts and more than tions in a vehicle. 5 lbs (2.3 kg). This optional equipment, such as Maximum permissible payload weight: nomi‐ Tire pressure: pressure inside the tire applying high-performance brakes, level control system, a an outward force to every square inch of the tire. nal load and luggage load plus 150 lb (68 kg) roof luggage rack or high-performance batteries, multiplied by the number of seats in the vehicle. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per is not included in the curb weight and the weight square inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar. of the accessories. The tire pressure should only be corrected when the tires are cold. TIN (Tire Identification Number): a unique identification number which can be used by a Cold tire pressure: the tires are cold when the tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example, vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours in a product recall, and thus identify the pur‐ chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur‐ 380 Wheels and tires

Changing a wheel R Model * NOTE Damage to vehicle and tires due to non-approved tire types and sizes Notes on selecting, mounting and replacing When replacing tires, make sure to install the tires correct: For safety reasons, only use wheels, tires Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe R Designation and accessories which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you R Manufacturer may not recognize dangers. These tires have been specially adapted for R Model You can ask for information regarding permitted use with the control systems, e.g. ABS or wheel/tire combinations at an authorized ESP®, and are marked as follows: Mercedes-Benz Center. & WARNING Risk of injury through exceed‐ R MO = Mercedes-Benz Original ing the specified tire load rating or the R MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended & WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ permissible speed rating (run-flat tires only for certain wheels) rect dimensions of wheels and tires Exceeding the specified tire load rating or R MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer‐ If wheels and tires of the wrong size are the permissible speed rating may lead to tire tain AMG tires) installed, the wheel brakes or wheel suspen‐ damage and to the tires bursting. sion components may be damaged. # Therefore, only use tire types and sizes Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle # Always replace wheels and tires with approved for your vehicle model. noise emissions or fuel consumption, may otherwise be adversely affected. In addition, those that fulfill the specifications of # Observe the tire load rating and speed the original part. when driving with a load, tire dimension var‐ rating required for your vehicle. iations could cause the tires to come into When replacing wheels, make sure to fit the contact with the body and axle components. correct: This could result in damage to the tires or the R Designation vehicle. Wheels and tires 381

Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested * NOTE Damage to electronic component Before purchasing and using non-approved and approved by Mercedes-Benz. parts from the use of tire-mounting tools accessories, visit a qualified specialist workshop and inquire about: Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring * R Suitability NOTE Risk to driving safety from retrea‐ system: Electronic component parts are R ded tires located in the wheel. Tire-mounting tools Legal stipulations Retreaded tires are neither tested nor recom‐ should not be used in the area of the valve. R Factory recommendations mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous This could otherwise damage the electronic & damage cannot always be detected on component parts. WARNING Risk of accident with high performance tires retreaded tires. # Have the tires changed at a qualified For this reason driving safety cannot be guar‐ specialist workshop only. The special tire tread in combination with the anteed. optimized tire compound means that the risk # Do not use used tires if you have no * of skidding or hydroplaning on wet roads is NOTE Damage to summer tires at low increased. information about their previous usage. ambient temperatures In addition, the tire grip is greatly reduced at Using summer tires at very low ambient tem‐ a low outside temperature and tire running * NOTE Possible damage to wheels or tires peratures can cause cracks to form, thereby temperature. when driving over obstacles damaging the tires permanently. # Switch on the ESP® and adapt your Large wheels have a lower tire section width. # At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) use driving style accordingly. The lower the tire section width, the greater M+S tires. # is the risk of damage to wheels or tires when Use M+S tire at outside temperatures driving over obstacles. Accessory parts that are not approved for your of less than 10 °C (50 °F). # Avoid obstacles or drive particularly vehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used carefully. correctly can impair the operating safety. 382 Wheels and tires

Observe the following when selecting, installing R For M+S tires, only use tires with the same R Tire and Loading Information placard and replacing tires: tread. (→ page 367) R Only use tires and wheels of the same type R Observe the maximum permissible speed for R Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity, (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended the M+S tires mounted. speed rating and load index (→ page 375) tires) and the same make. If this is below the vehicle's maximum speed, R Tire pressure table (→ page 363) R Only mount wheels of the same size on one this must be indicated in an appropriate label axle (left and right). in the driver's field of vision. Notes on interchanging wheels It is only permissible to mount a different R Break in new tires at moderate speeds for wheel size in the event of a flat tire in order the first 60 miles (100 km). & WARNING Risk of injury through differ‐ to drive to the specialist workshop. R Replace the tires after six years at the latest, ent wheel sizes R Only mount tires of the correct size onto the regardless of wear. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels. R When replacing with tires that do not fea‐ wheels or tires have different dimensions R Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring ture run-flat characteristics: Vehicles with may severely impair the driving characteris‐ system: All mounted wheels must be equip‐ MOExtended tires are not equipped with a tics. ped with functioning sensors for the tire TIREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle The wheel brakes or wheel suspension com‐ pressure monitoring system. with a TIREFIT kit after replacing with tires ponents may also be damaged. R At temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C), use win‐ that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires. # Rotate front and rear wheels only if the ter tires or all-season tires marked M+S for wheels and tires are of the same dimen‐ all wheels. For more information on wheels and tires, con‐ sions. Winter tires bearing the i snowflake sym‐ tact a qualified specialist workshop. bol in addition to the M+S marking provide Be sure to also observe the following further the best possible grip in wintry road condi‐ related subjects: tions. R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361) Wheels and tires 383

The wear patterns on the front and rear wheels Overview of the tire-change tool kit differ: Apart from some country-specific variants, vehi‐ R Front wheels wear more on the shoulder of cles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit. the tire. For more information on which tire-changing R Rear wheels wear more in the center of the tools are required and approved for performing a tire. wheel change on your vehicle, consult a qualified specialist workshop. On vehicles that have the same size front and rear wheels, interchange the wheels according Necessary tire-changing tools may include, for to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's war‐ example: R ranty book in your vehicle documents. If this is Jack 1 Tool bag not available, interchange the tires every R Chock 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km), Tool bag 1 contains: R Wheel wrench depending on the wear. Ensure that the direction R Jack of rotation is maintained. R Centering pin R Gloves It is imperative to observe the instructions and The tire-change tool kit is in tool bag 1 under R Wheel wrench safety notes on "Wheel change" when doing so. the cargo compartment floor. R Centering pin Notes on storing wheels R Folding wheel chock R Ratchet for jack R After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. R Protect the tires from contact with oil, grease or fuel. 384 Wheels and tires

Setting up the folding wheel chock R The vehicle is not on a slope. Removing and mounting hub caps R The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level Requirement: ground. R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change # Apply the electric parking brake manually. (→ page 384). # Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead Plastic hub cap position. # To remove: turn the center cover of the hub # Vehicles with automatic transmission: cap counter-clockwise and remove the hub Shift into position j. cap. # Vehicles with AIR BODY CONTROL: Set the # To mount: make sure that the center cover normal vehicle level (→ page 189). of the hub cap is turned counter-clockwise. # Switch off the engine. # Position the hub cap and turn the center # Make sure that the engine cannot be started. cover clockwise until the hub cap engages physically and audibly. # Place chocks or other suitable items under the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. # Remove the hub caps if necessary Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change (→ page 384). Requirements # Raise the vehicle (→ page 385). R The required tire-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tire- change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. Wheels and tires 385

Aluminum hub cap # Attach wheel wrench 3 to socket 2 and R The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and tighten the hub cap clockwise. non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, Specified tightening torque: 18 lb-ft load-bearing, non-slip underlay. (25 Nm). R The base of the jack must be positioned ver‐ # Raising the vehicle (→ page 385). tically under the jack support point.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel Requirements: R There are no persons in the vehicle. R The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change # To remove: position socket 2 on hub cap (→ page 384). 1. R The hub caps have been removed (→ page 384). % The socket can be found in the tire-change tool kit. Important notes on using the jack: Rules of conduct when the vehicle is raised: # Position wheel wrench 3 on socket 2. R Only use the vehicle-specific jack that has R Never place your hands or feet under the # been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz Using wheel wrench 3, turn hub cap 1 vehicle. counter-clockwise and remove it. to raise the vehicle. R Do not lie under the vehicle. # To mount: position hub cap 1 and turn R The jack is only designed for raising and R until it is completely flush with the wheel. holding the vehicle for a short time while a Do not start the engine and do not release wheel is being changed and not for mainte‐ the electric parking brake. # Position socket 2 on hub cap 1. nance work under the vehicle. R Do not open or close any doors or the tail‐ gate. 386 Wheels and tires

* NOTE Vehicle damage from the jack If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jack support point of the vehicle, the jack could tip over with the vehi‐ cle raised. # The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jack sup‐ port points.

# Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel Position of jack support points # Take the ratchet wrench out of the tire- bolts on the wheel you wish to change by change tool kit and place it on the hexagon about one full turn. Do not unscrew the & WARNING Risk of injury from incorrect nut of the jack so that the letters AUF are screws completely. positioning of the jack visible. If you do not position the jack correctly at the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the jack could tip with the vehicle raised. # Only position the jack at the appropri‐ ate jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the jack must be positioned ver‐ tically under the jacking point of the vehicle. Wheels and tires 387

Removing a wheel Requirement: R The vehicle is raised (→ page 385). When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, since this could impair the level of comfort when braking.

* NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts # # Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on Screw centering pin 1 instead of the wheel a dirty surface. bolt into the threading. # Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully. # Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com‐ # Remove the wheel. pletely. # Mount the new wheel (→ page 387). # Position jack 2 at jack support point 1. # Turn ratchet wrench 3 clockwise until jack Mounting a new wheel 2 sits completely on jack support point 1 and the base of the jack lies evenly on the Requirement: ground. R The wheel is removed (→ page 387). # Continue to turn ratchet wrench 3 until the tire is raised a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground. # Loosen and remove the wheel (→ page 387). 388 Wheels and tires

# # & WARNING Risk of accident from losing a Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the cen‐ Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger- wheel tering pin and push it on. tight. # Unscrew the centering pin. Oiled, greased or damaged wheel bolt/wheel & WARNING Risk of injury from tightening # Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- nut threads or wheel hub/wheel mounting wheel bolts and nuts bolt threads can cause the wheel bolts/ tight. wheel nuts to come loose. If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts # Lower the vehicle (→ page 388). As a result, you could lose a wheel while driv‐ when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. ing. # Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change # Never oil or grease the threads. when the vehicle is on the ground. Requirement: # In the event of damage to the threads, # For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts R The new wheel has been mounted contact a qualified specialist workshop which have been approved for Mercedes- (→ page 387). immediately. Benz and the wheel in question. # # Have the damaged wheel bolts or dam‐ Place the box wrench onto the hexagon nut aged hub threads replaced. * of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visi‐ NOTE Damage to paintwork of the wheel ble. # Do not continue driving. rim when screwing on the first wheel bolt # To lower the vehicle: turn the box wrench of If the wheel has too much play when screw‐ # Observe the information on the choice of the jack counter-clockwise. ing in the first wheel bolt, the wheel rim paint tires (→ page 380). can be damaged. For tires with a specified direction of rotation, an # Press the wheel firmly against the arrow on the side wall of the tire indicates the wheel hub when screwing on the first correct direction of rotation. Observe the direc‐ wheel bolt. tion of rotation when installing. Wheels and tires 389

# Check the tire pressure of the newly moun‐ ted wheel and adjust accordingly. # Vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system: Restart the tire pressure monitoring system (→ page 367). Make sure to observe the following further rela‐ ted subject: R Notes on tire pressure (→ page 361)

# Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (1 to 5). Specified tightening torque: 111 lb-ft (150 Nm).

& WARNING Risk of accident due to incor‐ rect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. # Have the tightening torque checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop after changing a wheel. 390 Technical data

Notes on technical data # You should have all work on electrical * NOTE Invalidation of the operating per‐ Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe and electronic components carried out mit due to failure to comply with the the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you at a qualified specialist workshop. instructions for installation and use may fail to recognize dangers. & The operating permit may be invalidated if The data stated only applies to vehicles with WARNING Risk of accident from incor‐ the instructions for installation and use of standard equipment. You can obtain further rect operation of two-way radios two-way radios are not observed. information from an authorized Mercedes-Benz If you operate two-way radios incorrectly in # Only use approved frequency bands. Center. the vehicle, the electromagnetic radiation # Observe the maximum permissible out‐ could interfere with the on-board electronics, put power in these frequency bands. e.g.: Vehicle electronics # Only use approved antenna positions. R if the two-way radio is not connected to Two-way radios an exterior antenna Notes on installing two-way radios R if the exterior antenna is not correctly mounted or is not of low reflection & WARNING Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios This could jeopardies the operating safety of the vehicle. The electromagnetic radiation from two-way # radios can interfere with the on-board elec‐ Have the low-reflection exterior tronics if RF transmitters are manipulated or antenna installed at a qualified special‐ retrofitted incorrectly. ist workshop. # This could jeopardize the operating safety of When operating two-way radios in the the vehicle. vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior antenna. Technical data 391

On the rear fenders, it is recommended that you Frequency band and maximum transmission position the antenna on the side of the vehicle output closest to the center of the road. Frequency band Maximum transmis‐ Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road sion output Vehicles – "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equip‐ Short wave 100 W ment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply 3 - 54 MHz with the legal requirements for detachable parts. 4 m waveband 30 W If your vehicle has two-way radio equipment installed, use the power supply or antenna con‐ 74 - 88 MHz nections intended for use with the basic wiring. 2 m waveband 50 W Be sure to observe the manufacturer's supple‐ ments during installation. 144 - 174 MHz Two-way radio transmission output Trunked radio sys‐ 10 W The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the tem/Tetra 1 Front roof area base of the antenna must not exceed the values 380 - 460 MHz 2 Rear roof area in the following table: 70 cm waveband 35 W 3 Rear fender 420 - 450 MHz On vehicles with a panoramic sliding sunroof, installing an antenna to the front or rear roof Mobile communica‐ 10 W area is not permitted. tions (2G/3G/4G) 392 Technical data

The following can be used in the vehicle without Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine restrictions: number R Two-way radios with a maximum transmis‐ sion output of up to 100 mW Vehicle identification plate R Two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 410 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (trunked radio system/Tetra) R Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G) There are no restrictions when positioning the Vehicle identification plate (USA only) antenna on the outside of the vehicle for the fol‐ 1 Permissible gross mass lowing frequency bands: 2 Permissible front axle load R Trunked radio system/Tetra 3 Permissible rear axle load R 70 cm waveband 4 Paint code R 2G/3G/4G 5 VIN (vehicle identification number) Technical data 393

Never exceed the permissible gross vehicle Additional plates weight or the maximum permissible axle load for the front or rear axle. VIN in front of the right-hand front seat

Vehicle identification plate (Canada only) 1 Permissible gross mass 2 Permissible front axle load 3 Permissible rear axle load 4 Paint code 5 VIN (vehicle identification number) The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight 1 Plate with information about emissions test‐ is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle ing, including confirmation of emissions occupants, the fuel and the load. The maximum guidelines at the U.S. federal level as well as permissible axle load is the maximum weight for California 1 VIN (vehicle identification number) that can be carried by one axle (front or rear 2 Engine number stamped into the crankcase 2 Floor covering axle). 3 VIN (vehicle identification number) 394 Technical data

R Operating fluids + ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE Environmental MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51) Notes on operating fluids pollution caused by environmentally irre‐ Further information on approved operating flu‐ sponsible disposal ids: Mercedes-AMG vehicles: be sure to observe the notes in the Supplement. Otherwise, you # Dispose of operating fluids in an envi‐ R in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for may fail to recognize dangers. ronmentally responsible manner. operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- benz.com (by entering the designation) & WARNING Risk of injury from operating Operating fluids include the following: R at a qualified specialist workshop fluids harmful to your health R Fuels & Operating fluids may be poisonous and harm‐ R Lubricants WARNING Risk of fire and explosion caused by fuel ful to your health. R Coolant # Observe the text on the original con‐ R Brake fluid Fuels are highly inflammable. tainers when using, storing or disposing # R Windshield washer fluid You must avoid fire, open flames, creat‐ of operating fluids. ing sparks and smoking. R Climate control system refrigerant # Always store operating fluids sealed in # Before refueling, switch off the engine their original containers. Only use products recommended by Mercedes- and, if installed in your vehicle, the sta‐ # Always keep children away from operat‐ Benz. Damage caused by using vehicle products tionary heater. ing fluids. which have not been recommended is not cov‐ ered by the Mercedes-Benz guarantee, warranty & WARNING Risk of injury from fuel or goodwill gestures. Fuels are poisonous and harmful to your You can identify operating fluids approved by health Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on the containers: R MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Technical data 395

# Do not swallow fuel or let it come into Fuel # Do not switch the ignition on. contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Information on fuel grades for vehicles with # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Do not inhale fuel vapors. a gasoline engine # Keep children away from fuel. Observe the notes on operating fluids If the available fuel is not sufficiently low in sul‐ (→ page 394). fur, this can produce unpleasant odors. If you or other people come into contact with * Only refuel with fuel, that has at least the octane fuel, observe the following: NOTE Damage caused by the wrong fuel number specified in the information table in the # Immediately rinse fuel off your skin with Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could fuel filler flap (→ page 155). This may reduce soap and water. result in damage to the fuel system, the engine output and increase fuel consumption. # If fuel comes into contact with your engine and the emission control system. If you want maximum engine output: only eyes, immediately rinse them thor‐ # Only refuel with low-sulfur premium refuel with unleaded premium grade gasoline oughly with clean water. Seek medical grade fuel. with an octane number of at least 91 AKI/ attention immediately. 95 RON. # If you swallow fuel, seek medical atten‐ This fuel may contain up to 10 % ethanol. Never refuel using gasoline with a lower RON. tion immediately. Do not induce vomit‐ Your vehicle is suitable for use with E10 fuel. ing. Do not refuel using: * NOTE Premature wear caused by unlea‐ ded regular gasoline # Change immediately out of clothing that R Diesel has come into contact with fuel. R E15, E85, E100 Unleaded regular gasoline can cause the R Gasoline containing methanol (M15, M30, engine to wear more quickly and impair lon‐ M85, M100) gevity and performance. R Gasoline with additives containing metal If unleaded premium grade gasoline is unavailable and you have to refuel using If you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel: unleaded regular gasoline: 396 Technical data

# Only fill the fuel tank to half full with Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use fuel Engine oil brands that have additives. unleaded regular gasoline and refill as Notes on engine oil soon as possible with unleaded pre‐ The fuel grade available in some countries may Observe the notes on operating fluids mium grade gasoline. not be sufficient. Residue could build up in the (→ page 394). # Do not drive at the maximum speed. fuel injection system as a result. In this case, in # consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Avoid sudden acceleration and engine Center, the fuel may be mixed with the cleaning speeds over 3,000 rpm. additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Always observe the notes and mixing ratios Further information on fuel can be found: specified on the container. R At a gas station Tank capacity and reserve fuel level R At a qualified specialist workshop R USA only: Under http://www.mbusa.com Capacity Information on additives in gasoline Model Total capacity Observe the notes on operating fluids All models 21.1 US gal (80.0 l) * NOTE Engine damage caused by an (→ page 394). Model Of which reserve incorrect oil filter, incorrect oil or addi‐ * NOTE Damage caused by non-approved tives All models3.2 gal (12.0 l) additives # Do not use engine oils or oil filters other Even small amounts of the wrong additive than those which meet the specifica‐ may lead to malfunctions occurring. tions necessary for the prescribed service intervals. # Only add cleaning additives recommen‐ ded by Mercedes-Benz to the fuel. Technical data 397

# Do not alter the engine oil or oil filter in The following values refer to an oil change, # Have the brake fluid renewed at the order to achieve longer change intervals including the oil filter. specified intervals. than prescribed. Replacement amount # Do not use additives. Have the brake fluid regularly changed at a quali‐ ModelReplacement fied specialist workshop. # Have the engine oil changed after the amount prescribed intervals. Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz All models6.9 US qt (6.5 l) according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the Further information on brake fluid: oil change carried out at a qualified specialist Notes on brake fluid R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for workshop. Operating Fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- Further information on engine oils and oil filters: Observe the notes on operating fluids benz.com. R In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for (→ page 394). R At a qualified specialist workshop operating fluids at http://bevo.mercedes- & WARNING Risk of an accident due to benz.com (by entering the designation) vapor pockets forming in the brake sys‐ Coolant R At a qualified specialist workshop tem Notes on coolant Quality and filling capacity of engine oil The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture Observe the notes on operating fluids MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval from the air. This lowers the boiling point of (→ page 394). the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, Gasoline enginesMB-Freigabe or MB- vapor pockets may form in the brake system & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from Approval when the brakes are applied hard. antifreeze All models 229.5, 229.6 This causes the braking effect to be If antifreeze comes into contact with hot impaired. component parts in the engine compart‐ ment, it may ignite. 398 Technical data

# Allow the engine to cool down before * NOTE Overheating at high outside tem‐ Coolant filling capacity adding antifreeze. peratures Capacity # Make sure that no antifreeze spills out If an inappropriate coolant is used, the Model Capacity next to the filler opening. engine cooling system is not sufficiently pro‐ # Thoroughly clean off any antifreeze tected against overheating and corrosion at All models 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) from component parts before starting high outside temperatures. the vehicle. # Always use coolant approved by Notes on windshield washer fluid Mercedes-Benz. * Observe the notes on operating fluids NOTE Damage caused by incorrect cool‐ # Observe the instructions in the (→ page 394). ant Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Oper‐ # Only add coolant that has been pre‐ ating Fluids 310.1. & WARNING ‑ Risk of fire and injury from mixed with the required antifreeze pro‐ windshield washer concentrate tection. Have the coolant regularly changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Windshield washer concentrate is highly Further information on coolant: flammable. It could ignite if it comes into R The proportion of corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze In the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for concentrate in the engine cooling system should contact with hot engine component parts or Operating Fluids 310.1, e.g. online at be: the exhaust system. http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. R # Make sure that no windshield washer R A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection At a qualified specialist workshop. down to approximately -35 °F (-37 °C)). concentrate spills out next to the filler opening. R A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -49 °F (-45 °C)). Technical data 399

* NOTE Damage to the exterior lighting For the correct mixing ratio refer to the informa‐ # Do not mix the approved refrigerant due to unsuitable windshield washer fluid tion on the antifreeze reservoir. compressor oil with a different refriger‐ Add windshield washer fluid to the washer water ant compressor oil. Unsuitable windshield washer fluid may dam‐ all year round. age the plastic surface of the exterior light‐ Work on the climate control system may only be ing. carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. All Refrigerant # Only use windshield washer fluid which applicable regulations, as well as SAE standard is also suitable for use on plastic surfa‐ Notes on refrigerants J639, must be adhered to. ces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB Winter‐ Observe the notes on operating fluids Fit. (→ page 394). * * NOTE Blocked spray nozzles caused by NOTE Damage due to incorrect refriger‐ mixing windshield washer fluids ant # Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB Win‐ If a non-approved refrigerant is used, the cli‐ terFit with other windshield washer flu‐ mate control system may be damaged. ids. # Only use the refrigerant R‑134a

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water as the fill * NOTE Damage to the climate control level sensor may be triggered erroneously. system due to incorrect refrigerant com‐ 1 Warning symbols Recommended windshield washer fluid: pressor oil 2 Refrigerant filling capacity R Above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit # Only use refrigerant compressor oil that 3 Applicable standards R Below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit has been approved by Mercedes-Benz. 4 PAG oil part number 5 Refrigerant type 400 Technical data

Warning symbols 1 advise you about: R Optional equipment Vehicle dimensions R possible dangers All models R having service work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop Vehicle length194.2 in (4933 mm) Refrigerant filling capacity Vehicle width including out‐ 81.3 in Filling capacity for refrigerant and PAG oil side mirrors (2065 mm) Model Refrigerant Vehicle height 58.4 in All models22.2 ± 0.4 oz (1483 mm) (630 ± 10 g) Wheelbase 115.7 in Height when opened Model PAG oil (2939 mm) Model 1 2 Head‐ All models2.8 ± 0.4 oz Turning radius 39.0 ft Opening room (11.90 m) (80 ± 10 g) height

All models 81.8 in 76.8 in Weights and loads Vehicle data (2077 mm) (1951 mm) Please note that for the specified vehicle data: Vehicle dimensions R Items of optional equipment increase the The heights specified may vary as a result of the: curb weight and reduce the maximum pay‐ R Tires load. R Load R Condition of the suspension Technical data 401

Roof load All models Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) 402 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages R O Hide display message Calling up stored display messages On-board computer: Introduction You can select the desired symbol by swiping , . left or right on the left-hand side of Touch Con‐ Notes on display messages trol. Press the ¤ symbol to show further If there are no display messages, Display messages appear in the multifunction information. Press the O symbol to hide the appears in the multifunction display. display. display message. # Scroll through the display messages by swip‐ Display messages with graphic symbols are sim‐ You can hide low-priority display messages by ing upwards or downwards on Touch Control plified in the Operator's Manual and may differ % on the left-hand side of the steering wheel. from the symbols in the multifunction display. pressing the button or the left-hand side of The multifunction display shows high-priority dis‐ Touch Control. The display messages are then # To exit the message memory: press the play messages in red. Certain display messages stored in the message memory. % button. are accompanied by a warning tone. Rectify the cause of a display message as Please respond in accordance with the display quickly as possible. messages and follow the additional notes in this High-priority display messages cannot be hid‐ Operator's Manual. den. The multifunction display shows these dis‐ For some display messages, a symbol is also play messages continuously until the cause for shown: the message has been rectified. R ¤ Further information Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 403

Safety systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. ! Other driving and driving safety systems may also be defective. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning ÷ If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 404 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ABS and ESP® are temporarily unavailable. ! Other driving and driving safety systems may also be defective. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning ÷ If ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ABS and ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 405

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is temporarily unavailable. ÷ Other driving and driving safety systems may also be defective. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 19 mph (30 km/h). # If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. 406 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * ESP® is malfunctioning. ÷ Other driving and driving safety systems may also be defective. The brake system continues to operate normally. The braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situa‐ tion. & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 407

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. T Other driving and driving safety systems may also be defective. & WARNING Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning ! If EBD, ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning, the wheels can lock when braking and ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ ÷ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 408 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The red F (USA only) or ! indicator lamp (Canada only) is lit. F You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the ignition switched off. # Switch the ignition on. (USA only) !

(Canada only) * The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. F The electric parking brake is applied while driving: R A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled . (USA only) R You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake . ! # Check that the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake are fulfilled. # Release the electric parking brake manually. (Canada only) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 409

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. F To apply: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. (USA only) # Apply the electric parking brake manually . ! If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. (Canada only) # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. ! F ! The yellow and the red (USA only) or (Canada only) indicator lamps are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. # Release the electric parking brake manually . or # Release the electric parking brake automatically . If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ! indicator lamp is lit and the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. 410 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. To apply: # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually . To release: # Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually.

If the electric parking brake cannot be applied or the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. The yellow ! indicator lamp is on and the red F indicator lamp (USA only) or the ! indicator lamp (Can‐ ada only) flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. If the battery charge level is too low: # Charge the battery. To apply: # Switch the ignition off. The electric parking brake is applied automatically. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 411

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If the electric parking brake should not be applied, e.g. when washing the vehicle in an automatic car wash or when having the vehicle towed away, leave the ignition switched on. An exception is when having the vehicle towed with the rear axle raised. If the electric parking brake is not applied automatically: # Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. # Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually . If it is still not possible to apply the electric parking brake: # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # Where necessary, also safeguard the parked vehicle against rolling away. To release: # If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually . If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 412 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions $ *There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. & WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level (USA only) If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. J Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. (Canada only) Do not add brake fluid. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not add brake fluid. *The brake linings have reached the wear limit. # # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

*One or more of the mbrace system's main features are malfunctioning. G # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 413

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes are: R Soiling of the sensors R Heavy rain R Extended country driving without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors. # Restart the engine. * Vehicles with the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering ® Assist or PRE‑SAFE PLUS are temporarily unavailable or only partially available. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations . # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. 414 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function, Evasive Steering ® Assist or PRE‑SAFE PLUS is malfunctioning. Vehicles without the Driving Assistance package: Active Brake Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ® * PRE‑SAFE functions are malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ® * PRE-SAFE Impulse Side is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 415

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The radar sensor system is malfunctioning. Possible causes: R soiling of the sensors R heavy rain R extended country driving without moving traffic, e.g. in the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean all sensors . # Restart the engine. 416 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The restraint system is malfunctioning . 6 & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Detection of a restraint system malfunction: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 417

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The corresponding restraint system is malfunctioning . 6 & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or (example) might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for example. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Detection of a restraint system malfunction: R the 6 restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the ignition is switched on R the 6 restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. *The corresponding window air bag is malfunctioning . 6 & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to malfunctions in the window airbag If the window airbag is malfunctioning, it might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident with high deceleration. (example) # Have the window airbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 418 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The front passenger air bag and the knee air bag are deactivated, even though an adult or a person with a stature corresponding to that of an adult is seated on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. & WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a disabled front passenger airbag If the front passenger airbag is disabled, the front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an acci‐ dent and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle's interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff . # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 419

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The front passenger air bag and knee air bags are enabled while the vehicle is moving: R even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat R even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

& WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury by using a child restraint system with the front passenger airbag enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. # Make sure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the status of the automatic front passenger air bag shutoff . # If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 420 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver (→ page 205). À # If necessary, take a break. *ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. À # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Á *Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

É *Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.

Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 421

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The vehicle level is too low and the vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level. Á # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.

*You have pulled away although the vehicle level was too low. Á # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. The vehicle rises to the selected vehicle level. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIR BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning: # Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

* NOTE The tires of the front axle or the front fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐ ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Set a higher vehicle level . Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle is raised. 422 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. # Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. Á # In order to adjust the vehicle level, you must not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). # In order to adjust the vehicle level during trailer operation, you must not drive faster than 19 mph (30 km/h). *Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set Á the selected vehicle level. # Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle continues rising to the selected vehicle level. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 423

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 211). Vehicles with Active Steering Assist: The camera view can be restricted by the windshield. # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. If the display message does not disappear on vehicles with Active Steering Assist: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield. *Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 424 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * Vehicles without Active Steering Assist: the camera view is restricted. Possible causes are: R dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving and drive safety systems will be available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield. *Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limitations have been reached (→ page 208). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. or # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. # If necessary, clean the rear bumper. If the bumper is extremely dirty, the sensors in the bumper may be mal‐ functioning. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 425

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limitations have been reached (→ page 208). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. # If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle while paying attention to road and traffic conditions and restart the engine. *When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control and confirm the display message. *When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist is unavailable. # Press the left-hand side of Touch Control and confirm the display message. 426 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The AIR BODY CONTROL function is restricted. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tires of the front axle or the front fenders could be damaged by large steering movements

# Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐ ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

* NOTE The tires of the front axle or the front fenders could be damaged by large steering movements # Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. # If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and traffic con‐ ditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible.

# Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 427

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The parking assistance from Active Parking Assist was interrupted. You have opened the driver's door or touched (Example) the steering wheel, for example. # Steer and brake manually. *Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning. # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and restart the engine. # If the display message continues to be displayed, consult a qualified specialist workshop. *Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are out‐ side the system limitations (→ page 199). Beware of the entire vehicle surroundings. # As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. *Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. 428 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield. *Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is skidding or a condition for activation is not met. ë # Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function . *Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again and can be activated (→ page 180). Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 429

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 177). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. *Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. è The ambient conditions are outside the system limitations (→ page 183). # Drive on. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limitations, the system will become available again. # If necessary, clean the windshield in the camera's field of vision. *Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. è # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 430 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. # Observe the activation conditions for cruise control . ¯

*Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically (→ page 175). *Cruise control is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Engine Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The coolant level is too low. * NOTE Engine damage due to insufficient coolant # Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant.

# Add coolant . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 431

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The coolant is too hot. ? # Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. & WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Wait until the engine has cooled down. # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. 432 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The battery is not being charged. # * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. *The battery is not being charged. # * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 433

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The engine is off and the battery charge level is too low. # # Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. # Leave the engine running for a few minutes, or drive for a longer distance. The battery charges. *The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is too low. # * NOTE Possible engine damage if you continue driving # Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Switch off the engine. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. *The battery charge level is too low. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not # continue driving under any circumstances. # Start the engine. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. 434 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. 4 * NOTE Engine damage caused by driving with insufficient engine oil # Avoid long journeys with insufficient engine oil. # Check the engine oil level when next refueling. Add engine oil (→ page 330). Notes on engine oil (→ page 396). *The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. 8 # Refuel. *The fan motor is defective. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that ? the coolant temperature display remains below the red marking.

*There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. 8 # Close the fuel filler cap. # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 435

Tires Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire pressure difference between the wheels is too great. h # Check the tire pressure and add air, if necessary. # When the tire pressure is correct, restart the tire pressure monitoring system . *The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. h & WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires. 436 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed. h & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tire Flat tires are dangerous in the following ways: R The tires can overheat and cause a fire. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Do not drive with a flat tire. # Observe the notes on flat tires.

Notes on a flat tire (→ page 340). # Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tires. *No signals can be received from the tire pressure sensor due to strong radio signal source interference. The tire pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. # Drive on. The tire pressure monitoring system restarts automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 437

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or more wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed. h # Have the defective tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. *The wheels installed do not have suitable tire pressure sensors. The tire pressure monitoring system is deactivated. # Install wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. *The tire pressure monitoring system is defective. & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *At least one tire is overheated. The affected tires are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tires are displayed in yellow. # Drive more slowly. 438 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *At least one tire is overheated. & WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tires Overheated tires may burst, particularly at high speeds. # Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

# Reduce speed so that the tires cool down.

SmartKey Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The SmartKey needs to be replaced. Â # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The SmartKey battery is discharged. Â # Replace the battery . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 439

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The SmartKey is currently undetected. Â # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # If the SmartKey is still not recognized, start the engine with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment . (white display message) *The SmartKey cannot be detected and may no longer be in the vehicle. Â The SmartKey is no longer in the vehicle and you switch off the engine: R you can no longer start the engine (red dis‐ R you cannot centrally lock the vehicle play message) # Ensure that the SmartKey is in the vehicle. If the SmartKey detection function has a malfunction due to a strong radio signal source: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Place the SmartKey in the stowage compartment for starting the engine with the SmartKey . Â *Awarning tone also sounds. This message reminds you to take your SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle. 440 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The SmartKey detection function is malfunctioning. Â # Change the location of the SmartKey in the vehicle. # Start the vehicle with the SmartKey in the stowage compartment .

Vehicle Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j and into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position j or i into another transmission position. # Depress the brake pedal. # Start the engine. * The driver's door is not fully closed and the transmission is in position k, i or h. # Shift the transmission to position j when you park the vehicle. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 441

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * While the vehicle is rolling or while you are driving, the transmission has been shifted to position i. # Depress the brake pedal to stop and, when the vehicle is stationary, shift the transmission to position j. # To continue your journey, shift the transmission to position h or k. * The transmission can only be shifted to position j when the vehicle is stationary. *The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission position can no longer be shifted. # When the transmission is in position h, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the trans‐ mission position. # For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. *You are leaving the vehicle when it is in a ready-to-drive state. d # When you leave the vehicle, switch off the ignition and take the SmartKey with you. # If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heater. Otherwise, the 12 V battery might discharge and it will then only be possible to start the vehicle using a donor battery (starting assistance). 442 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to position i automatically. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Switch the transmission to position j. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. *The transmission is malfunctioning. Reverse gear can no longer be engaged. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The transmission has overheated. Pulling away can be temporarily impaired or not possible. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Start the engine. # Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. *The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. # Until then, manually set the transmission to position j before you switch off the engine. # Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. *Operation of the climate control system is temporarily restricted. Airflow and fresh air supply are set to automatic mode. # Have the climate control system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 443

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of position h and into transmission position k. # Depress the brake pedal. # Switch the transmission to position k. *The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning. You may need to use more force to steer. Ð # Drive on carefully. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The climate control system is malfunctioning. & WARNING Risk of injury and accident due to an insufficient supply of fresh air If the climate control system is malfunctioning, carbon dioxide levels may increase in the vehicle interior. Breathing in carbon dioxide may cause dizziness. # Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air.

# Open the window to ensure that there is a sufficient supply of fresh air. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 444 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is considerably impaired. Ð & WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. *The power assistance of the steering is malfunctioning. Ð & WARNING Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. # If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

# If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. # Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 445

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The active hood (pedestrian protection) is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The engine hood is open. ? & WARNING Risk of accident if the engine hood is unlatched while driving An unlocked engine hood may open up when the vehicle is in motion and block your view. # Never unlatch the engine hood while driving. # Before every trip, ensure that the engine hood is latched.

# Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. # Close the hood. *At least one door is open. C # Close all doors. 446 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The tailgate is open. A & WARNING Risk of exhaust gas poisoning Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open when the engine is running, especially if the vehicle is in motion. # Always switch off the engine before opening the tailgate. # Never drive with the tailgate open.

# Close the tailgate. *The corresponding seat backrest of the rear bench seat is not engaged. _ # Fold the corresponding seat backrest back until it engages. (example) *The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. ¥ # Add washer fluid . Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 447

Lights Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The corresponding light source is defective. b # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. % LED light bulbs: the display message for the corresponding lamp only appears when all the light-emitting diodes in the lamp have failed. (example) *The active light function is malfunctioning. b # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *Active light function is defective. b # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 448 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *The exterior lighting is defective. b # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *The light sensor is defective. b # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. *You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. b # Turn the light switch to the à position. *You are driving without low-beam headlamps. b # Turn the light switch to the L or à position. *Adaptive Highbeam Assist is malfunctioning. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 449

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions *Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable. The system limitations have been reached (→ page 126). # Drive on. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The display message appears. *The camera view is restricted. Possible causes: R Dirt on the windshield in the camera's field of vision R Heavy rain, snow or fog Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, driving systems and driving safety systems are available again. If the display message does not disappear: # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Clean the windshield.

Warning and indicator lamps is non-critical. These warning and indicator lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up Overview of warning and indicator lamps or flash after the engine is started or during a Some systems perform a self-test when the igni‐ journey. tion is switched on. Some warning and indicator lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behavior 450 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Instrument Display (standard) Progressive setting (Widescreen Cockpit) ü Seat belt is not fastened (→ page 459) $ USA: brakes (red) (→ page 451) J Canada: brakes (red) (→ page 451) ! ABS malfunctioning (→ page 451) ÷ ESP®(→ page 451) å ESP® OFF (→ page 451) F USA: electric parking brake applied (red) (→ page 451) ! Canada: electric parking brake Instrument Display in the Widescreen Cock‐ If you select the progressive display setting in applied (red) (→ page 451) pit vehicles with a Widescreen Cockpit, the position ! of the indicator lamps in the Instrument Display Electric parking brake (yellow) changes. (→ page 451) Ð Steering assistance malfunctioning Warning and indicator lamps: (→ page 461) L Low beam (→ page 123) # Electrical malfunction (→ page 462) T Parking lights (→ page 123) 6 Restraint system (→ page 451) K High beam (→ page 124) ; Check Engine (→ page 462) #! Turn signal light (→ page 124) 8 Fuel reserve with fuel filler flap loca‐ R Rear fog light (→ page 123) tion indicator (→ page 462) ? Coolant too hot/cold (→ page 462) Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 451

· Distance warning (→ page 460) h Tire pressure monitoring system (→ page 466)

Safety systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow RBS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. é & WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction RBS warning lamp (USA/ If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. CND) # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Adjust your speed and continue to drive carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. # If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 452 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red brake system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. $ Possible causes are: R The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. Brake warning lamp (USA) R There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J & WARNING There is a risk of an accident if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, the wheels may lock when braking. Braking characteristics may be Brakes warning lamp (Can‐ impaired. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. ada) # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

& WARNING Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not add brake fluid. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 453

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. USA only: if an additional display message appears with the # symbol in the multifunction display, the brake linings have reached their wear limit. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 454 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ! ABS is malfunctioning. If there is an additional warning tone, EBD is malfunctioning. ABS warning lamp Other driving and driving safety systems may also be faulty.

& WARNING There is risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning If EBD or ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels could lock when braking The steering capability and braking characteristics are thus severely impaired. The braking distance in an emer‐ gency braking situation can increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. ÷ ESP® is intervening. # Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. ESP® warning lamp flashes Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 455

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ÷ ESP® is malfunctioning. Other driving and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. ESP® warning lamp lights up & WARNING Risk of skidding if ESP® is malfunctioning If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. # Drive on carefully. # Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 456 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. å ESP® is deactivated. ESP® OFF warning lamp & WARNING Risk of skidding when driving with ESP® deactivated If ESP® is deactivated, ESP® cannot carry out vehicle stabilization. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. # Drive on carefully. # Only deactivate ESP® for as long as the situation requires.

If ESP® cannot be activated, ESP® is malfunctioning. # Have ESP® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the notes on deactivating ESP®. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 457

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow indicator lamp is also lit if the electric parking F brake malfunctions. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (USA !only)

Red indicator lamp, electric parking brake applied (Can‐ !ada only)

Yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is mal‐ functioning 458 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. 6 The restraint system is malfunctioning. & Restraint system warning WARNING Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the restraint system lamp If the restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint system components may be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. This may affect the Emergency Tensioning Device or airbag, for exam‐ ple. # Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Drive on carefully. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. # Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 459

Seat belts Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds. 7 In addition, an acoustic warning tone may sound. The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. Seat belt warning lamp # Fasten your seat belt . lights up If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the warning lamp may remain lit. The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. 7 The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. # Fasten your seat belt. Seat belt warning lamp There are objects on the front passenger seat. flashes # Remove the objects from the front passenger seat. 460 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Driving systems Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. · The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. Distance warning lamp # Be prepared to brake immediately. # Increase the distance. Active Brake Assist. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 461

Vehicle Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red power steering system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Ð The power steering assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. & Power steering system WARNING Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired warning lamp If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardized. # Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. # Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

# Observe the messages in the multifunction display. 462 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Engine Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ; A malfunction has occurred in the engine, the exhaust system or the fuel system. The emissions limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be running in emergency operation mode. Engine diagnosis warning In some states, legal requirements stipulate that you must immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop as soon lamp as the yellow engine diagnosis warning lamp lights up. # Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. The red electrical malfunction warning lamp is lit. # There is a malfunction in the electrics. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. Electrical malfunction warn‐ ing lamp The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp lights up while driving. 8 There has been pressure loss in the fuel system. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. # Close the fuel filler cap. Fuel reserve warning lamp # If the fuel filler cap was already properly closed: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 463

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow fuel reserve warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. # Refuel. Fuel reserve warning lamp 464 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red coolant warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. ? Possible causes are: R The temperature sensor is malfunctioning Coolant warning lamp R Coolant level too low R The air supply to the radiator is obstructed R The radiator fan is defective If there is an additional warning tone, the coolant temperature has exceeded the maximum permissible temperature.

& WARNING Danger of burns when opening the hood If you open the hood when the engine has overheated or during a fire in the engine compartment, you could come into contact with hot gases or other escaping operating fluids. # Before opening the hood, allow the engine to cool down. # In the event of a fire in the engine compartment, keep the hood closed and call the fire service.

# Stop the vehicle immediately, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and switch off the engine. Do not con‐ tinue driving under any circumstances. # Observe the messages in the multifunction display. If the coolant temperature display is at the lower end of the temperature scale: # Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 465

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Otherwise: # Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. # Check the coolant level . # Make sure that the air supply to the radiator is not obstructed. # Avoiding high loads on the engine, drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. In doing so, ensure that the coolant temperature display remains below the red area. 466 Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

Tires Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. h The tire pressure monitoring system has detected tire pressure loss in at least one of the tires. & Tire pressure monitoring WARNING Risk of an accident due to insufficient tire pressure system warning lamp lights Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards: up R The tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. R The tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. R The driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. # Observe the recommended tire pressure. # Adjust the tire pressure if necessary.

# Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. # Check the tire pressure and the tires. Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 467

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow tire pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. h The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. Tire pressure monitoring & system warning lamp WARNING There is a risk of an accident if the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning flashes If the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning, it is not able to issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tires. Underinflated tires may, for example, impair the driving, steering and braking characteristics. # Have the tire pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

# Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 468 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Acoustic locking verification signal Active hood (pedestrian protection) ...... 327 Activating/deactivating ...... 57 Method of operation ...... 327 12 V socket Resetting ...... 327 see Socket (12 V) Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 208 Activating/deactivating ...... 210 Active Lane Change Assist 115 V socket Brake application ...... 209 Function ...... 184 see Socket (115 V) Function ...... 208 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 211 360° camera ...... 196 System limitations ...... 208 Function ...... 211 Assigning as a favorite ...... 199 Towing a trailer ...... 209 Sensitivity (function/notes) ...... 213 Care ...... 336 Active Brake Assist ...... 170 Setting the sensitivity ...... 214 Function ...... 196 Function/notes ...... 170 Switching on/off ...... 212 Selecting a view ...... 199 Setting ...... 174 System limits ...... 211 Towing a trailer ...... 211 A Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ...... 177 Active Emergency Stop Assist ...... 185 Active Parking Assist ...... 199 A/C function Active Lane Change Assist ...... 184 Cross Traffic Alert ...... 204 Activating/deactivating (control Calling up a speed ...... 180 Drive Away Assist ...... 203 panel) ...... 137 Function ...... 177 Exiting a parking space ...... 202 Activating/deactivating (multimedia Increasing/decreasing speed ...... 180 Function ...... 199 system) ...... 137 Requirements ...... 180 Parking ...... 201 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 166 Steering wheel buttons ...... 180 System limitations ...... 199 Acceleration Storing a speed ...... 180 Active Speed Limit Assist ...... 208 see Kickdown Switching off/deactivating ...... 180 Setting ...... 208 Switching on/activating ...... 180 Access data System limitations ...... 177 Active Steering Assist ...... 183 Editing ...... 299 Activating/deactivating ...... 184 Setting ...... 298 Active Emergency Stop Assist ...... 185 Active Emergency Stop Assist ...... 185 Index 469

Active Lane Change Assist ...... 184 After-sales service center Air-recirculation mode ...... 139 Function ...... 183 see ASSYST PLUS Airbag ...... 38 System limitations ...... 183 Air bag Front airbag (driver, front passenger) ....38 Adaptive cruise control Activation ...... 32 Installation locations ...... 38 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Protection ...... 38 Knee airbag ...... 38 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Reduced protection ...... 40 Overview ...... 38 Function ...... 126 AIR BODY CONTROL ...... 187 Side airbag ...... 38 Switching on/off ...... 127 Setting ...... 189 Window airbag ...... 38 Additives ...... 396 Suspension ...... 187 Airflow ...... 136 Engine oil ...... 396 Air conditioning system AIRPANEL (Care) ...... 336 Fuel ...... 396 see Climate control Alarm Additives (engine oil) Air distribution ...... 136 see Panic alarm see Additives Air freshener system Alarm system Additives (fuel) see Fragrance system see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see Fuel Air pressure Alternative route Address book see Tire pressure see Route see Contacts Air suspension Ambient lighting ...... 128 Adjusting the balance/fader see AIR BODY CONTROL ® Android Auto ...... 292 Burmester surround sound system ... 325 Air vents ...... 141 Connecting a mobile phone ...... 293 Adjusting the sound focus Adjusting (front) ...... 141 Ending ...... 294 Burmester® surround sound system ... 325 Adjusting (rear passenger compart‐ Notes ...... 293 ADS PLUS damping system ment) ...... 142 Overview ...... 292 see AIR BODY CONTROL Glove box ...... 142 Sound settings ...... 294 470 Index

Transferred vehicle data ...... 294 Ashtray Audio mode Animals Front center console ...... 116 Activating media mode ...... 306 Pets in the vehicle ...... 55 Rear passenger compartment ...... 117 Connecting USB devices ...... 308 Copyright ...... 305 Anti-lock braking system Assistance graphic Menu (on-board computer) ...... 219 Information ...... 304 see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Inserting/removing an SD card ...... 306 Anti-theft alarm system Assistance systems Media search ...... 311 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) see Driving safety system Overview ...... 307 Anti-theft protection ASSYST PLUS ...... 326 Pause and playback function ...... 308 Immobilizer ...... 80 Battery disconnection periods ...... 327 Selecting a track ...... 308 Displaying the service due date ...... 326 Anti-theft protection Selecting playback options ...... 308 Function/notes ...... 326 Track list ...... 308 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Regular service work ...... 326 Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Anticipatory occupant protection Special service requirements ...... 326 see Qualified specialist workshop see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ ATA (anti-theft alarm system) ...... 80 Authorized workshop pant protection) Deactivating the alarm ...... 81 ® see Qualified specialist workshop see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory Function ...... 80 occupant protection plus) Automatic car wash (care) ...... 333 ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 205, 206 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 291 Function ...... 205 Automatic distance control Connecting an iPhone® ...... 292 Setting ...... 206 see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Ending ...... 292 System limitations ...... 205 Automatic driving lights ...... 124 Notes ...... 291 Attention assistant Automatic engine start (ECO start/ Overview ...... 291 see ATTENTION ASSIST stop function) ...... 149 Sound settings ...... 292 Transferred vehicle data ...... 294 Index 471

Automatic engine stop (ECO start/ B Bluetooth® audio stop function) ...... 149 Activating ...... 316 Bag hook ...... 111 Automatic front passenger air bag De-authorizing (de-registering) the shutoff BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 167 device ...... 316 see Front passenger air bag shutoff Battery Information ...... 313 Overview ...... 314 Automatic lateral support adjustment Key ...... 58 Searching for a track ...... 316 Setting ...... 90 Battery (vehicle) Charging ...... 348 Searching for and authorizing the Automatic mirror folding function device ...... 315 Switching on/off ...... 135 Jump-starting ...... 348 Notes ...... 346 Selecting a music player ...... 316 Automatic transmission Switching device via NFC ...... 316 Belt DIRECT SELECT lever ...... 151 Brake Assist System see Seat belts Drive program display ...... 151 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Blind Spot Assist ...... 208 Drive programs ...... 150 Brake fluid DYNAMIC SELECT switch ...... 150 Activating/deactivating ...... 210 Notes ...... 397 Engaging drive position ...... 153 Function ...... 208 Engaging reverse gear ...... 152 System limitations ...... 208 Brake force distribution Kickdown ...... 154 Blower EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ tion) ...... 170 Manual gear shifting ...... 153 see Climate control Selecting park position ...... 153 ® Brakes Shifting to neutral ...... 152 Bluetooth ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 166 Steering wheel gearshift paddles ...... 153 Activating/deactivating ...... 249 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 167 Transmission position display ...... 151 Setting up an Internet connection ...... 298 Driving tips ...... 146 Transmission positions ...... 151 Settings ...... 248 EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ Switching profile (DUN/PAN) ...... 299 tion) ...... 170 472 Index

HOLD function ...... 186 Automatic volume adjustment ...... 325 Incoming call during an existing call .... 286 Limited braking effect (salt-treated Calling up the sound menu ...... 324 Making ...... 285 roads) ...... 146 Information ...... 324 Camera New/replaced brake linings/brake Switching the surround sound on/off see 360° camera discs ...... 146 ...... 325 see Rear view camera Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 146 Buttons Car wash Brakes Steering wheel ...... 216 see Care see Active Brake Assist C Care ...... 338 Braking assistance AIRPANEL ...... 336 see BAS (Brake Assist System) California Car wash ...... 333 Breakdown Important information for private Carpet ...... 338 Changing a wheel ...... 384 customers and lessees ...... 22 Display ...... 338 Overview of the help functions ...... 16 Call list Exterior lighting ...... 336 Roadside Assistance ...... 21 Making a call ...... 289 Genuine wood/trim elements ...... 338 Tow starting ...... 356 Options in the call list ...... 289 Headliner ...... 338 Towing away ...... 352 Overview ...... 289 Matt finish ...... 335 Transporting the vehicle ...... 354 Calling up the sound menu Paint ...... 335 Breakdown Burmester® surround sound system ....324 Plastic trim ...... 338 Power washer ...... 334 see Flat tire Calls ...... 285 ® Rear view camera/360° Camera ...... 336 Burmester surround sound system .....324 Accepting ...... 285 Seat belts ...... 338 Adjusting the balance/fader ...... 325 Activating functions during a call ...... 286 Seat cover ...... 338 Adjusting the sound focus ...... 325 Calls with several participants ...... 286 Sensors ...... 336 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass Declining ...... 285 Tailpipes ...... 336 settings ...... 324 Ending a call ...... 285 Washing by hand ...... 334 Index 473

Wheels/rims ...... 336 Charging Cigarette lighter Windows ...... 336 Battery (vehicle) ...... 348 Front center console ...... 117 Wiper blades ...... 336 Mobile phone (wireless) ...... 120 Cleaning Cargo compartment cover USB port ...... 120 see Care Extending/retracting ...... 108 Child safety lock Climate control ...... 136 Notes ...... 107 Rear door ...... 53 3-zone automatic climate control Carpet (Care) ...... 338 Rear side windows ...... 55 panel ...... 136 Setting ...... 252 Change of address ...... 21 Activating/deactivating ...... 137 Child seat ...... 46 Activating/deactivating the A/C Change of ownership ...... 21 Front passenger seat (notes) ...... 52 function (control panel) ...... 137 Changing a wheel Front passenger seat (rearward- Activating/deactivating the A/C Lowering the vehicle ...... 388 facing/forward-facing) ...... 53 function (multimedia system) ...... 137 Mounting a new wheel ...... 387 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (installing) ...... 50 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ Preparation ...... 384 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) (notes) ...... 49 nization function (control panel) ...... 138 Raising the vehicle ...... 385 Notes ...... 46 Activating/deactivating the synchro‐ Removing a wheel ...... 387 Top Tether ...... 51 nization function (multimedia sys‐ Removing/mounting hub caps ...... 384 Child seat safety feature ...... 48 tem) ...... 139 Changing hub caps ...... 384 Adjusting the climate mode settings ... 138 Children Air distribution settings ...... 138 Channel list Child seat safety feature ...... 48 Air-recirculation mode ...... 139 Calling up ...... 318 Restraint systems ...... 46 Automatic control ...... 137 Character entry Chock Climate style function ...... 138 Function/notes ...... 245 Storage location ...... 383 Defrosting the windows ...... 139 On the touchpad ...... 246 Chock Defrosts the windshield ...... 136 Using the controller ...... 246 see Wheel chock 474 Index

Dual-zone automatic climate control Cockpit ...... 6 Name format ...... 287 panel ...... 136 Overview ...... 6 Options ...... 288 Filling capacity for PAG oil ...... 400 COMAND Storing ...... 288 Front air vents ...... 141 see Multimedia system Controller Glove box air vent ...... 142 Operating ...... 240 Inserting/removing the flacon (fra‐ COMAND Touch grance system) ...... 140 Managing devices ...... 251 Convenience closing feature ...... 73 Ionization ...... 139 Combination switch Convenience opening ...... 72 Rear air vents ...... 142 see Turn signal light Coolant (engine) Rear operating unit ...... 136 Combined luggage cover and net Filling capacity ...... 398 Refrigerant ...... 399 Attaching to the rear seat backrest .....109 Level check ...... 331 Refrigerant filling capacity ...... 400 Installing/removing ...... 108 Notes ...... 397 Residual heat ...... 139 Compass ...... 280 Cooling Sets the airflow ...... 136 Setting the air distribution ...... 136 Computer ...... 216 see Climate control Setting the fragrance system ...... 139 Connection status Copyright Setting the temperature ...... 136 Displays ...... 300 Licenses ...... 29 Switching the rear window heater Overview ...... 300 Trademarks ...... 30 on/off ...... 136 Contacts ...... 286 Cornering light function ...... 125 Ventilating the vehicle (convenience Calling up ...... 287 Cover ...... 70 opening) ...... 72 Deleting ...... 289 Windshield heater ...... 141 Cross Traffic Alert ...... 204 Downloading (from mobile phone) ...... 287 Climate style Importing ...... 288 Crosswind Assist Function ...... 138 Information ...... 286 Function/notes ...... 170 Setting ...... 138 Making a call ...... 288 Index 475

Cruise control ...... 175 Data acquisition Saving as global favorite ...... 272 Activating ...... 175 Vehicle ...... 26, 28 Storing a map position ...... 272 Calling up a speed ...... 175 Data import/export Using intelligent destination sugges‐ Deactivating ...... 175 Function/notes ...... 253 tions ...... 272 Function ...... 175 Importing/exporting ...... 253 Destination entry ...... 259, 261 Lever ...... 175 Date rEnte geo-coordinates ...... 262 Prerequisites ...... 175 Entering a POI or address ...... 259 Selecting ...... 175 Setting the time and date automati‐ cally ...... 247 Entering an intermediate destination .. 263 Setting a speed ...... 175 Selecting a contact ...... 262 Storing a speed ...... 175 Daytime running lights ...... 127 Selecting a POI ...... 261 System limits ...... 175 Activating/deactivating ...... 127 Selecting from the map ...... 262 Cup holder ...... 115 Daytime running lights mode Selecting previous destinations ...... 261 Installing/removing (center console) ... 115 see Daytime running lights Detecting inattentiveness Rear passenger compartment ...... 116 Deactivating the alarm (ATA) ...... 81 see ATTENTION ASSIST Cup holder Declaration of conformity Diagnostics connection ...... 24 see Cup holder Wireless vehicle components ...... 23 Digital Operator's Manual ...... 18 Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ...... 25 Definitions (tires and loading) ...... 377 Digital speedometer ...... 220 Customer Relations Department ...... 25 Designs DIRECT SELECT lever ...... 151 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 225 D Engaging drive position ...... 153 Destination ...... 272 Engaging park position automatically .. 153 Dashboard Editing intermediate destinations ...... 263 Engaging reverse gear ...... 152 see Cockpit Editing the previous destinations ...... 272 Function ...... 151 Dashboard lighting ...... 218 External ...... 273 Selecting park position ...... 153 Saving (current vehicle position) ...... 272 Shifting to neutral ...... 152 476 Index

Display Active Brake Assist Functions Cur‐ Active Parking Assist and Care ...... 338 rently Limited See Operator's Man‐ PARKTRONIC Inoperative See Opera‐ Display (multimedia system) ual ...... 413 tor's Manual ...... 427 Notes ...... 239 Settings ...... 247 Active Brake Assist Functions Limi‐ Active Parking Assist Maneuvering Display (on-board computer) ted See Operator's Manual ...... 414 Assistance Restricted See Opera‐ Displays in the multifunction display ....218 Active Distance Assist Currently tor's Manual ...... 427 Display message ...... 402 Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....429 Active Parking Assist Parking Can‐ Calling up (on-board computer) ...... 402 Active Distance Assist Inoperative ...... 429 celed (Example) ...... 427 Notes ...... 402 Active Distance Assist Now Available èActive Steering Assist Currently Display messages ...... 428 Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....429 ? ...... 434, 445 bActive Headlamps Inoperative ..... 447 èActive Steering Assist Inopera‐ A ...... 446 Active Hood Malfunction See Opera‐ tive ...... 429 C ...... 445 tor's Manual ...... 445 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Camera ¯ ...... 430 Active Lane Keeping Assist Camera View Restricted See Operator's Man‐ Active Blind Spot Assist Currently View Restricted See Operator's Man‐ ual ...... 449 Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....425 ual ...... 424 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Currently Active Blind Spot Assist Inoperative .... 427 Active Lane Keeping Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual .... 449 Active Blind Spot Asst. Not Available Unavailable See Operator's Manual .....423 Adaptive Highbeam Assist Inopera‐ When Towing a Trailer See Opera‐ Active Lane Keeping Assist Inopera‐ tive ...... 448 tor's Manual ...... 425 tive ...... 423 Index 477

Air Conditioning Malfunction See bCheck Left Low Beam (exam‐ Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual ...... 442 ple) ...... 447 Operator's Manual ...... 418 Apply Brake to Shift from 'P' ...... 440 hCheck Tires ...... 435 Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See ÀATTENTION ASSIST Inoperative ... 420 ¥Check Washer Fluid ...... 446 Operator's Manual ...... 419 ÀATTENTION ASSIST: Take a ÁCompressor Is Cooling ...... 422 8Fuel Level Low ...... 434 Break! ...... 420 ?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle 8Gas Cap Loose ...... 434 bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative Turn Engine Off ...... 431 !Inoperative See Operator's ...... 448 Cruise Control Canceled ...... 430 Manual ...... 403 Auxiliary Battery Malfunction ...... 442 Cruise Control Inoperative ...... 430 ÷Inoperative See Operator's Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavaila‐ !Currently Unavailable See Oper‐ Manual ...... 406 ble See Operator's Manual ...... 424 ator's Manual ...... 404 TInoperative See Operator's Blind Spot Assist Inoperative ...... 426 ÷Currently Unavailable See Oper‐ Manual ...... 407 Blind Spot Assist Not Available When ator's Manual ...... 405 GInoperative ...... 412 Towing a Trailer See Operator's Man‐ ÂDon't Forget Your Key ...... 439 ÂKey Not Detected (red display ual ...... 425 ÁDrive More Slowly ...... 422 message) ...... 439 $Check Brake Fluid Level ...... 412 Driver's Door Open & Transmission ÂKey Not Detected (white dis‐ Check Coolant Level See Operator's Not in P Risk of Vehicle Rolling Away .. 440 play message) ...... 439 Manual ...... 430 6Front Left Malfunction Service 6Left Side Curtain Airbag Mal‐ 4Check Engine Oil At Next Refu‐ Required (example) ...... 417 function Serevice R quired (example) .. 417 eling ...... 434 478 Index

Let fresh air into the vehicle interior. PRE-SAFE Impulse Side Inoperative ÐSteering Malfunction Increased Air Conditioning Malf. Visit Work‐ See Operator's Manual ...... 414 Physical Effort See Operator's Man‐ shop ...... 443 PRE-SAFE Inoperative See Opera‐ ual ...... 444 É Lowering ...... 420 tor's Manual ...... 414 ÐSteering Malfunction Stop Malfunction Drive at Max. 50 mph Radar Sensors Dirty See Operator's Immediately See Operator's Manual ... 444 ...... 422, 426 Manual ...... 413, 415 Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Running bMalfunction See Operator’s _Rear Left Backrest Not Wait Transmission Cooling ...... 442 Manual ...... 448 Latched (example) ...... 446 #Stop Vehicle Leave Engine Run‐ N Permanently Active Risk of Rolling ÂReplace Key Battery ...... 438 ning ...... 433 Away ...... 441 Reversing Not Possible Service #Stop Vehicle See Operator's ÂObtain a New Key ...... 438 Required ...... 442 Manual ...... 433 ëOff ...... 428 #See Operator's Manual ...... 432 ÁStop Vehicle Vehicle Too Low ...... 421 Only Shift to 'P' when Vehicle is Sta‐ Service Required Do Not Shift Gears bSwitch Off Lights ...... 448 tionary ...... 441 Visit Dealer ...... 441 bSwitch On Headlamps ...... 448 FParking Brake See Operator's 6SRS Malfunction Service Tire Press. Monitor Currently Manual ...... 409 Required ...... 416 Unavailable ...... 436 ÂPlace the Key in the Marked #Start Engine See Operator's Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative ...... 437 Space See Operator's Manual ...... 440 Manual ...... 433 Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No hPlease Correct Tire Pressure ...... 435 ÐSteering Malfunction Drive Wheel Sensors ...... 437 FPlease Release Parking Brake .....408 Carefully Service Required ...... 443 Tires Overheated ...... 437 Index 479

Tires Overheated Decrease Speed ...... 438 Distance control Driving light To Deselect P or N, Depress Brake see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC see Automatic driving lights and Start Engine ...... 440 Distance recorder ...... 220 Driving safety system ...... 166 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 166 To Engage Transmiss. Position R First DISTRONIC see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Brake Assist ...... 170 Depress the Brake ...... 443 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 167 Door Traffic Sign Assist Camera View EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ Locking (mechanical key) ...... 64 tion) ...... 170 Restricted See Operator's Manual ...... 428 Opening (from inside) ...... 61 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Unlocking (from inside) ...... 61 Traffic Sign Assist Currently Unavail‐ Crosswind Assist ...... 170 Unlocking (mechanical key) ...... 64 able See Operator's Manual ...... 427 Overview ...... 166 Traffic Sign Assist Inoperative ...... 428 Door control panel ...... 14 Radar sensors ...... 166 Transmission Malfunction Stop ...... 442 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) ... 373 Responsibility ...... 166 STEER CONTROL ...... 170 FTurn On the Ignition to Release Drinking and driving ...... 146 Driving safety system the Parking Brake ...... 408 Drive Away Assist ...... 203 see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) dVehicle Operational Switch the Drive position Selecting ...... 153 Driving system Ignition Off Before Exiting ...... 441 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ...... 187 Á Drive program display ...... 151 Vehicle Rising Please Wait ...... 421 Driving system ÁVehicle Rising ...... 420 Drive programs see 360° camera see DYNAMIC SELECT hWarning Tire Malfunction ...... 436 see Active Blind Spot Assist Driver's seat see Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC hWheel Sensor(s) Missing ...... 437 see Seat see Active Lane Keeping Assist see Active Parking Assist 480 Index

see Active Speed Limit Assist Displaying vehicle data ...... 151 Resetting ...... 221 see Active Steering Assist Drive program display ...... 151 ECO start/stop function ...... 149 see AIR BODY CONTROL Drive programs ...... 150 Automatic engine start ...... 149 see ATTENTION ASSIST Function ...... 150 Automatic engine stop ...... 149 see Blind Spot Assist Operating (DYNAMIC SELECT switch) .. 151 Operation ...... 149 see Cruise control Selecting the drive program ...... 151 Switching off/on ...... 149 see Driving safety system see HOLD function E Electric parking brake ...... 163, 164, 165 Applying automatically ...... 163 see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC E10 ...... 395 see Rear view camera Applying or releasing manually ...... 164 see Traffic Sign Assist Easy entry feature Emergency braking ...... 165 Operation/notes ...... 99 Releasing automatically ...... 164 Driving tips Setting ...... 100 Drinking and driving ...... 146 Electrical fuses General driving tips ...... 146 Easy exit feature see Fuses Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 146 Operation/notes ...... 99 Electronic Stability Program Setting ...... 100 ® Drowsiness detection see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) see ATTENTION ASSIST EASY-PACK load-securing kit ...... 111 Electronics ...... 390 Notes ...... 111 DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL Tensioning the luggage holder ...... 112 Emergency Suspension ...... 187 Tensioning the telescopic rod ...... 113 Overview of the help functions ...... 16 Dynamic handling control system Safety vest ...... 340 ® EBD (electronic brake force distribu‐ see ESP (Electronic Stability Program) tion) Emergency braking ...... 165 DYNAMIC SELECT ...... 150 Function/notes ...... 170 Emergency call system Configuring drive program I ...... 151 ECO display Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ...... 295 Displaying engine data ...... 151 Function ...... 150 Emergency engine start ...... 356 Index 481

Emergency key Capacity ...... 397 Favorites Unlocking the tailgate ...... 69 Checking the oil level using the oil Adding ...... 243 Emergency operation mode dipstick ...... 330 Calling up ...... 243 Starting the vehicle ...... 145 MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval ...... 397 Deleting ...... 244 Moving ...... 244 Emergency Tensioning Devices ESC (Electronic Stability Control) see ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Overview ...... 243 Activation ...... 32 Renaming ...... 243 ESP® Energy consumption Flacon Crosswind Assist ...... 170 Key ...... 57 Inserting/removing ...... 140 ® Engine ESP (Electronic Stability Program) ...... 167 Flat tire ...... 340 ECO start/stop function ...... 149 Function/notes ...... 167 Changing a wheel ...... 384 Engine number ...... 392 Switching on/off ...... 170 MOExtended tires ...... 341 Jump-starting ...... 348 Exterior lighting Notes ...... 340 Starting (emergency operation Care ...... 336 TIREFIT kit ...... 342 mode) ...... 145 Starting (smartphone) ...... 145 Exterior lighting Floor mats ...... 122 Starting (start/stop button) ...... 144 see Lights Folding bench seat ...... 94 Switching off (start/stop button) ...... 157 External device Folding back ...... 96 Engine data Locking ...... 252 Folding out ...... 94 Displaying ...... 151 Eyeglasses box ...... 103 Installing and removing the seat cushion ...... 95 Engine number ...... 392 F Notes ...... 94 Engine oil ...... 330 Opening and closing the cargo com‐ Fatigue detection Adding ...... 330 partment floor ...... 97 Additives ...... 396 see ATTENTION ASSIST 482 Index

Fragrance Fuel ...... 396 G see Fragrance system Additives ...... 396 E10 ...... 395 Garage door opener Fragrance system ...... 140 Clearing the memory ...... 161 Inserting/removing the flacon ...... 140 Gasoline ...... 395 Quality (gasoline) ...... 395 Opening/closing the garage door ...... 161 Free software ...... 29 Refueling ...... 155 Programming buttons ...... 158 Frequencies Reserve fuel level ...... 396 Radio equipment approval numbers .... 162 Two-way radio ...... 391 Sulfur content ...... 395 Resolving problems ...... 160 Synchronizing the rolling code ...... 160 Frequency band Tank capacity ...... 396 Dial (on-board computer) ...... 223 Fuel consumption Gas station search On-board computer ...... 220 Starting an automatic gas station Front airbag (driver, front passenger) .....38 search ...... 264 Front passenger air bag shutoff ...... 40 Function seat Switching the automatic gas station PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp .....42 see Door control panel search on/off ...... 267 Points to remember when the front Fuse insert Gasoline ...... 395 passenger seat is occupied ...... 40 see Fuses Status display ...... 42 Gearshift paddles Fuses ...... 356 see Steering wheel gearshift paddles System self-test ...... 42 Assignment diagram ...... 356 Front passenger air bag shutoff Before changing ...... 356 Gearshift recommendation ...... 154 see Occupant safety Cockpit fuse box ...... 358 Genuine parts ...... 19 Front passenger seat Fuse box in the cargo compartment ....359 Genuine wood (Care) ...... 338 Adjusting from the driver's seat ...... 86 Fuse box in the engine compartment .. 357 Fuse box in the front-passenger foot‐ Glide mode ...... 154 Front passenger seat well ...... 358 Glove box see Seat Notes ...... 356 Air vent ...... 142 Index 483

Glove compartment Adjusting display elements (on-board HOLD function ...... 186 Locking/unlocking ...... 103 computer) ...... 225 Activating/deactivating ...... 186 Adjusting the position (on-board Function/notes ...... 186 H computer) ...... 225 Hood Handbrake Function ...... 225 Function (active hood) ...... 327 see Electric parking brake Menu (on-board computer) ...... 225 Opening/closing ...... 327 Using the memory function ...... 100 Handling characteristics (unusual) ...... 360 Resetting (active hood) ...... 327 Head-up Display HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...... 68 Hotspot see Menu (on-board computer) Setting up (Wi-Fi) ...... 250 HANDS-FREE ACCESS Head-up Display menu see Opening the tailgate using your foot see On-board computer I Hazard warning lights ...... 125 Headliner (care) ...... 338 Identification plate Head restraint ...... 87 Heating Engine ...... 392 Front (adjusting manually) ...... 87 see Climate control Refrigerant ...... 399 Front (luxury head restraint) ...... 88 Vehicle ...... 392 High beam Rear (lowering from the front) ...... 89 Activating/deactivating ...... 124 Ignition Rear passenger compartment Switching on (start/stop button) ...... 143 (adjusting) ...... 89 High-beam flasher ...... 124 Rear passenger compartment Ignition key High-beam headlamps see SmartKey (removing/installing) ...... 89 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...... 126 Immobilizer ...... 80 Head-up Display High-pressure cleaning equipment Adjusting brightness (on-board com‐ (care) ...... 334 Indicator lamp puter) ...... 225 see Warning/indicator lamps Hill start assist ...... 185 484 Index

Individual drive program Setting ...... 127 Establishing ...... 300 Configuring ...... 151 Switch-off delay time ...... 129 Information ...... 297 Selecting ...... 151 Interior lighting Mobile phone details ...... 300 Instrument cluster ...... 8, 449 see Interior lighting Restrictions ...... 297 Setting access data ...... 298 Instrument cluster see Lighting Setting up (Bluetooth®) ...... 298 see Instrument Display see Lights Switching Bluetooth® profile (DUN/ Instrument Display ...... 215 Intermediate destination Calculating a route with intermediate PAN) ...... 299 Adjusting the lighting ...... 218 ® destinations ...... 263 Via Bluetooth ...... 298 Function/notes ...... 215 Via Wi-Fi ...... 297 Overview ...... 215 Ed iting ...... 263 Overview (standard) ...... 8 Entering ...... 263 Internet radio Overview (widescreen) ...... 8 Starting an automatic gas station Calling up ...... 303 Warning/indicator lamps ...... 449 search ...... 264 Deleting stations ...... 303 Starting the automatic service sta‐ Logging in ...... 304 Instrument Display tion search ...... 267 Logging out ...... 304 see Instrument cluster Internet Overview ...... 303 Instrument lighting ...... 218 Deleting a bookmark ...... 302 Saving stations ...... 303 Instrument lighting Deleting browser data ...... 302 Selecting and connecting to a station see Dashboard lighting Managing bookmarks ...... 302 ...... 303 Selecting stream ...... 304 Intelligent Light System Internet connection Setting options ...... 304 Cornering light function ...... 125 Canceling permission ...... 300 Terms of use ...... 304 Interchanging wheels ...... 382 Connection status ...... 300 Displaying the connection status ...... 300 Ionization ...... 139 Interior lighting ...... 127 Editing access data ...... 299 Ambient lighting ...... 128 Index 485 iPhone® L Notes ...... 49 see Apple CarPlay™ Labeling (tires) Level control system see Tire labeling see AIR BODY CONTROL J Laden ...... 111 Light switch Jack Bag hook ...... 111 Overview ...... 123 Storage location ...... 383 Roof rack ...... 114 Lighting ...... 127 Jump-start connection ...... 348 Stowage space underneath the cargo Lighting Jump-starting compartment floor ...... 114 see Lights Tie-down eyes ...... 111 see Jump-start connection Lights ...... 123, 127 Laden Adaptive Highbeam Assist ...... 126 K see EASY-PACK load-securing kit Adjusting the instrument lighting ...... 218 Key Lamp Automatic driving lights ...... 124 Battery ...... 58 see Interior lighting Combination switch ...... 124 Energy consumption ...... 57 Lamp (Instrument Display) Cornering light function ...... 125 KEYLESS-GO see Warning/indicator lamps Hazard warning lights ...... 125 Locking the vehicle ...... 61 High beam ...... 124 Lane Keeping Assist High-beam flasher ...... 124 Problem ...... 62 see Active Lane Keeping Assist Unlocking setting ...... 57 Light switch ...... 123 Unlocking the vehicle ...... 61 Language Low beam ...... 123 Notes ...... 252 Parking lights ...... 123 Kickdown ...... 154 Setting ...... 252 Rear fog light ...... 124 Using ...... 154 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Responsibility for lighting systems ...... 123 Knee airbag ...... 38 attachment Setting the surround lighting ...... 127 Installing ...... 50 Standing lights ...... 123 486 Index

Turn signal light ...... 124 Low beam Map ...... 274, 276 Limited Warranty Switching on/off ...... 123 Avoiding an area ...... 278 Vehicle ...... 26 Lubricant additives Avoiding an area (overview) ...... 278 see Additives Changing an area ...... 279 Limiting the opening angle (tailgate) ...... 69 Deleting an area ...... 279 Live Traffic Information Luggage Displaying the compass ...... 280 Displaying subscription information .....274 Securing ...... 101 Displaying the map version ...... 278 Displaying the traffic map ...... 274 Lumbar support Displaying the next intersecting Displaying traffic incidents ...... 275 see Lumbar support (4-way) street ...... 278 Extending a subscription ...... 274 Lumbar support (4-way) ...... 87 Displaying the satellite map ...... 280 Issuing hazard alerts ...... 275 Displaying the traffic map ...... 274 Load index (tires) ...... 375 M Displaying weather information ...... 281 Map data ...... 280 Load-bearing capacity (tires) ...... 375 Maintenance Moving ...... 277 Loading Vehicle ...... 21 Overview ...... 276 Definitions ...... 377 Maintenance Selecting POI symbols ...... 277 Loading guidelines ...... 101 see ASSYST PLUS Selecting text information ...... 278 Selecting the map orientation ...... 277 Loading information table ...... 367 Making a call via the overhead con‐ trol panel Setting the map scale ...... 276 Loads Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ...... 294 Setting the map scale automatically ....280 Securing ...... 101 Updating ...... 279 Malfunction Locking/unlocking ...... 64 Restraint system ...... 32 Map and compass KEYLESS-GO ...... 61 Overview ...... 276 Unlocking and opening doors from Malfunction message see Display message Massage program the inside ...... 61 Selecting the front seats ...... 92 Index 487

Massage programs Media mode Media ...... 223 Overview ...... 90 Activating ...... 306 Navigation ...... 221 Massage settings Media playback Overview ...... 216 Resetting ...... 92 Operating (on-board computer) ...... 223 Radio ...... 223 Service ...... 219 Matt finish (cleaning instructions) ...... 335 Media search Telephone ...... 224 Maximum load rating ...... 374 Starting ...... 311 Trip ...... 220 Maximum permissible load Media source Mercedes-AMG vehicles Calculation example ...... 369 Dial (on-board computer) ...... 223 Notes ...... 143 Determining ...... 368 Memory function Mercedes-Benz Apps Maximum tire pressure ...... 374 Head-up Display — Calling up saved Calling up ...... 300 settings ...... 100 Using voice control ...... 301 Mechanical key Head-up Display — Saving settings ...... 100 Inserting/removing ...... 58 Operating ...... 100 Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) Locking a door ...... 64 Outside mirror — Calling up saved Emergency call system ...... 295 Unlocking a door ...... 64 settings ...... 100 Making a call via the overhead con‐ Media Outside mirror — Saving settings ...... 100 trol panel ...... 294 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 223 Seat — Calling up saved settings ...... 100 MB Info call ...... 296 Searching ...... 311 Seat — Saving settings ...... 100 Roadside Assistance call ...... 296 Media display Steering wheel — Calling up saved Transferred data ...... 297 Notes ...... 239 settings ...... 100 Message (multifunction display) Steering wheel — Saving settings ...... 100 Media Interface see Display message Activating ...... 312 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 225 Message memory ...... 402 Information ...... 311 Assistance graphic ...... 219 Messages Overview ...... 313 Designs ...... 225 see Text messages 488 Index

Mirrors Multimedia system ...... 239, 247 see Destination entry see Outside mirrors Activating/deactivating standby see Map Mobile phone ...... 224 mode ...... 165 see Route Canceling permission for Internet Adjusting the volume ...... 245 see Route guidance connection ...... 300 Calling up lists and menus ...... 242 see Traffic information Wireless charging ...... 122 Central control elements ...... 239 Navigation announcements Configuring display settings ...... 247 Activating/deactivating ...... 269 Mobile phone Main functions ...... 242 see Android Auto Adjusting the volume ...... 270 Overview ...... 239 Repeating ...... 270 see Apple CarPlay™ Rear climate control ...... 138 see Telephone Switching audio fadeout on/off ...... 270 Restoring the factory settings ...... 257 Switching on/off during a phone call .. 269 Mobile phone voice recognition Switching the sound on/off ...... 244 Starting ...... 285 Navigation messages Stopping ...... 285 N On-board computer ...... 221 Model type ...... 392 Navigation Near Field Communication (NFC) ...... 284 Connecting the mobile phone to the MOExtended tires ...... 341 Calling up the Digital Operator's Manual ...... 281 multimedia system ...... 284 Multifunction display (on-board com‐ ® Menu (on-board computer) ...... 221 Switching Bluetooth audio equip‐ puter) ...... 218 Showing/hiding the menu ...... 258 ment ...... 316 Multifunction steering wheel Switching on ...... 258 Switching mobile phones ...... 284 Overview of buttons ...... 216 Updating the map data ...... 279 Neutral Multifunction steering wheel Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ Selecting ...... 152 see Steering wheel tem) ...... 231 NFC Navigation see Near Field Communication (NFC) see Destination Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ...... 146 Index 489

O Multifunction display ...... 218 Notes ...... 394 Navigation system menu ...... 221 Refrigerant (air conditioning system) ... 399 Occupant safety ...... 40 Operating ...... 216 Windshield washer fluid ...... 398 Pets in the vehicle ...... 55 Radio menu ...... 223 Operating safety Occupant safety Service menu ...... 219 Declaration of conformity (wireless see Airbag Telephone menu ...... 224 vehicle components) ...... 23 see Child seat Trip menu ...... 220 Information ...... 22 see PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occu‐ On-board computer Operating system ...... 216 pant protection) see Computer see PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side see Operating system Operator's Manual ® Vehicle equipment ...... 20 see PRE-SAFE PLUS (anticipatory On-board diagnostics interface occupant protection plus) see Diagnostics connection Operator's Manual (digital) ...... 18 see Restraint system Outside mirrors ...... 132, 133, 134 see Seat belts On-board electronics Notes ...... 390 Anti-glare mode (automatic) ...... 133 Odometer Two-way radios ...... 390 Automatic mirror folding function ...... 135 see Total distance see Electronics Folding in/out ...... 132 Parking posit ion ...... 134 Oil Open-source software ...... 29 see Engine oil Setting ...... 132 Opening the tailgate using your foot ...... 68 Using the memory function ...... 100 On-board computer ...... 225 Assistance graphic menu ...... 219 Operating fluids Overhead control panel ...... 12 Displaying the service due date ...... 326 Additives (fuel) ...... 396 Media menu ...... 223 Brake fluid ...... 397 P Menu designs ...... 225 Coolant (engine) ...... 397 Paint (cleaning instructions) ...... 335 Menus ...... 216 Engine oil ...... 396 Fuel (gasoline) ...... 395 Paint code ...... 392 490 Index

Panic alarm ...... 57 Parking brake Personalization Activating/deactivating ...... 57 see Electric parking brake see User profile Panoramic sliding sunroof Parking lights ...... 123 Pets in the vehicle ...... 55 see Sliding sunroof Parking position Phone book Park position Outside mirrors ...... 134 see Contacts Selecting ...... 153 Storing the position of the passenger Picture formats Selecting automatically ...... 153 outside mirror using reverse gear ...... 134 see Video mode Parking ...... 165 Payload Picture settings Parking Calculation example ...... 369 see Video mode Determining the maximum ...... 368 see Electric parking brake PIN protection Parking aid Pedestrian protection Activating/deactivating ...... 253 see Active hood (pedestrian protection) see Parking Assist PARKTRONIC Plastic trim (Care) ...... 338 Parking Assist Perfume see Fragrance system Playback options Maneuvering assistance ...... 205 Selecting ...... 308 Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ...... 190 Pe rfume atomizer Setting ...... 139 POI symbols Activating ...... 192 Custom ...... 277 Adjusting warning tones ...... 193 Perfume vial Deactivating ...... 192 see Fragrance system Power supply Switching on (start/stop button) ...... 143 Function ...... 190 Period out of use ® Side impact protection ...... 191 Activating/deactivating standby PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occupant System limitations ...... 190 mode ...... 165 protection) ...... 45 Function ...... 45 Parking assistance systems Permitted towing methods ...... 351 see Active Parking Assist PRE-SAFE® Sound ...... 45 Index 491

Reversing the measures ...... 45 R Radio stations ® Dial (on-board computer) ...... 223 PRE-SAFE Impulse Side ...... 46 Radar sensors ...... 166 Activation ...... 32 Rain closing function Radiator shutters Function ...... 46 Sliding sunroof ...... 77 see AIRPANEL (Care) PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occu‐ Range Radio Displaying ...... 220 pant protection plus) ...... 45 Activating ...... 316 Function ...... 45 Activating/deactivating radio text ...... 319 Reading lamp Reversing the measures ...... 45 Calling up the channel list ...... 318 see Interior lighting Preventative occupant protection sys‐ Deleting stations ...... 318 Rear climate control tem Direct frequency entry ...... 318 Setting ...... 138 ® see PRE-SAFE (anticipatory occu‐ Displaying information ...... 319 Rear door (child safety lock) ...... 53 pant protection) Displaying radio text ...... 319 Rear fog light ...... 124 Previous destinations Editing station presets ...... 318 Selecting ...... 261 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 223 Rear seat Moving stations ...... 318 see Seat Programs Overview ...... 317 see DYNAMIC SELECT Rear view camera ...... 194 Searching for stations ...... 318 Assigning as a favorite ...... 199 Protecting the environment Setting a station ...... 318 Care ...... 336 Notes ...... 19 Setting the waveband ...... 318 Function ...... 194 Storing radio stations ...... 318 Opening the camera cover (360° Q Switching HD Radio on/off ...... 318 Camera) ...... 199 Tagging music tracks ...... 319 QR code Rear window Rescue card ...... 26 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ tem) ...... 234 Replacing the wiper blade ...... 132 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 492 Index

Rear window heater ...... 136 Malfunction ...... 32 External ...... 273 Rear window wiper Protection ...... 31 Selecting a type ...... 265 Activating/deactivating ...... 129 Reduced protection ...... 31 Selecting an alternative route ...... 267 System self-test ...... 32 Selecting notifications ...... 266 Rear-view mirror Warning lamp ...... 32 Selecting options ...... 266 see Outside mirrors Reverse gear Starting the automatic service sta‐ Refrigerant (air conditioning system) Selecting ...... 152 tion search ...... 267 Notes ...... 399 Switching the automatic gas station Rims (Care) ...... 336 Refueling search on/off ...... 267 Refueling the vehicle ...... 155 Roadside Assistance ...... 21 With intermediate destinations ...... 263 Reporting malfunctions relevant to Roadside Assistance call Route guidance ...... 267 safety ...... 25 Mercedes-Benz mbrace® (USA) ...... 296 Canceling ...... 271 Changing direction ...... 268 Rescue card ...... 26 Roll away protection see HOLD function Continuing ...... 271 Reserve Destination reached ...... 269 Fuel ...... 396 Roller sunblind From an off-road location ...... 271 Side windows ...... 70 Reset function (multimedia system) .....257 Lane recommendations ...... 269 Roller sunblind Notes ...... 267 Residual heat ...... 139 see Cover Off-road ...... 271 Restoring (factory settings) Roof load ...... 400 To an off-road destination ...... 271 see Reset function (multimedia system) Roof rack ...... 114 Run-flat characteristics Restraint system ...... 31 MOExtended tires ...... 341 Children ...... 46 Route ...... 264, 267 Function in an accident ...... 32 Calculating ...... 264 Functionality ...... 32 Displaying destination information ...... 266 Index 493

S Selecting a category ...... 322 Setting automatic lateral support Selecting a channel ...... 322 adjustment ...... 90 Safety Setting music and sport alerts ...... 322 Setting options ...... 14 see Child seat Setting the parental contr ol ...... 322 Using the memory function ...... 100 Safety net Storing a channel ...... 322 Seat Attaching ...... 110 Switching on ...... 320 see Folding bench seat Safety systems SD card see Head restraint see Driving safety system Inserting/removing ...... 306 Seat adjustment Safety vest ...... 340 Seat ...... 83, 104 Configuring ...... 90 Satellite map ...... 280 4-way lumbar support ...... 87 Seat tbel ...... 37 Adjusting (electrically) ...... 86 Satellite radio Activating/deactivating seat belt Adjusting (manually and electrically) ..... 83 adjustment ...... 37 Activating/deactivating Tune Start ...... 323 Adjusting (Seat Comfort) ...... 85 Deleting a channel ...... 322 Reduced protection ...... 34 Adjusting the seat backrest angle Releasing ...... 37 Displaying EPG information ...... 322 (rear passenger compartment) ...... 107 Displaying service information ...... 323 Seat belt adjustment (function) ...... 36 Backrest (rear) folding forward ...... 104 Warning lamp ...... 37 Information ...... 319 Correct driver's seat position ...... 82 Information on smart favorites and Folding back the backrest (rear Seat belt adjustment Tune Start ...... 323 passenger compartment) ...... 106 Activating/deactivating ...... 37 Logging in ...... 319 Locking the backrest (rear passenger Function ...... 36 Moving a channel ...... 322 compartment) ...... 106 Seat belt warning Music and sport alerts function ...... 322 Massage program overview ...... 90 see Seat belt Overview ...... 321 Resetting the settings ...... 92 Seat belts ...... 33 Pause and playback function ...... 323 Selecting a massage program ...... 92 Restrictions ...... 319 Adjusting the height ...... 36 Care ...... 338 494 Index

Fastening ...... 36 Setting a speed Problem ...... 73 Protection ...... 33 see Cruise control Roller sunblind ...... 70 Seat cover (Care) ...... 338 Setting summer time ...... 248 Size designation (tires) ...... 375 Seat heater Setting the date format ...... 248 Skid chains Switching on/off ...... 92 Setting the distance unit ...... 252 see Snow chains Seat ventilation Setting the map scale Sliding sunroof ...... 75 Switching on/off ...... 93 see Map Automatic functions ...... 77 Closing ...... 75 Selecting a gear Shifting gears ...... 153 see Shifting gears Closing with the SmartKey ...... 73 Gearshift recommendation ...... 154 Opening ...... 75 Selecting a POI Manual ...... 153 Opening with the SmartKey ...... 72 see Destination entry Short text messages Problem ...... 78 Selector lever see Text messages Rain closing function ...... 77 see DIRECT SELECT lever Side airbag ...... 38 SmartKey ...... 56 Sensors (Care) ...... 336 Side impact protection ...... 191 Features ...... 56 Key ring attachment ...... 58 Service Side windows ...... 71 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 219 Mechanical key ...... 58 Child safety lock in the rear Overview ...... 56 Service passenger compartment ...... 55 see ASSYST PLUS Panic alarm ...... 57 Closing ...... 71 Problem ...... 59 Service center Closing with the SmartKey ...... 73 Unlocking setting ...... 57 see Qualified specialist workshop Convenience closing feature ...... 72 Convenience opening ...... 72 Smartphone Service interval display Cooling or heating the vehicle inte‐ see ASSYST PLUS Opening ...... 71 Opening with the SmartKey ...... 72 rior ...... 144 Index 495

Starting the vehicle ...... 145 Sound settings ...... 323 Start/stop function Smartphone Adjusting the balance/fader ...... 324 see ECO start/stop function see Android Auto Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass Starting the engine see Apple CarPlay™ settings ...... 324 see Vehicle see Telephone Automatic volume adjustment ...... 324 Calls up the sound menu ...... 324 Starting-off aid Snow chains ...... 361 Information ...... 323 see Hill start assist Socket (12 V) ...... 117 Speech dialog system Station Cargo compartment ...... 120 see Voice Control System Deleting ...... 318 Front center console ...... 117 Direct frequency entry ...... 318 Front passenger footwell ...... 118 Speed inde x (tires) ...... 375 Moving ...... 318 Rear passenger compartment ...... 118 Speed limit for winter tires Searching ...... 318 Socket (115 V) ...... 119 Setting ...... 177 Setting ...... 318 Rear passenger compartment ...... 119 Speedometer Storing ...... 318 Software update Digital ...... 220 Station presets Important system updates ...... 256 Standby mode Editing ...... 318 Information ...... 255 Activating/deactivating ...... 165 STEER CONTROL Performing ...... 256 Function ...... 165 Function/notes ...... 170 Sound Standing lights ...... 123 Steering wheel ...... 216 PRE-SAFE® Sound ...... 45 Start/Stop button Adjusting (electrically) ...... 98 Wheels and tires ...... 360 Starting the vehicle ...... 144 Adjusting (manually) ...... 98 Sound Switching off the vehicle ...... 157 Buttons ...... 216 ® Switching on the power supply or Steering wheel heater ...... 99 see Burmester surround sound system Using the memory function ...... 100 see Sound settings ignition ...... 143 496 Index

Steering wheel gearshift paddles ...... 153 Surround View Setting the distance unit ...... 252 Steering wheel heater see 360° camera Software update ...... 256 Activating/deactivating ...... 99 Suspension System settings Stowage areas Damping characteristics ...... 187 see Multimedia system see Laden DYNAMIC BODY CONTROL ...... 187 see Stowage compartment Setting the suspension level ...... 189 T Stowage compartment ...... 103 Suspension Tailgate ...... 64 Armrest ...... 103 see AIR BODY CONTROL Closing ...... 66 Center console ...... 103 Suspension level Emergency release from the inside ...... 70 Door ...... 103 Setting ...... 189 HANDS-FREE ACCESS ...... 68 Eyeglasses box ...... 103 Switch-off delay time Limiting the opening angle ...... 69 Opening ...... 64 Glove box ...... 103 Interior ...... 129 Rear armrest ...... 103 Opening dimensions ...... 400 Switching the surround sound on/off Unlocking (emergency key) ...... 69 Stowage compartments Burmester® surround sound system ... 325 see Laden Tailgate see Stowage compartment Synchronization function see Locking/unlocking Activating/deactivating (control Tailpipes (Care) ...... 336 Stowage space underneath the cargo panel) ...... 138 compartment floor ...... 114 Activating/deactivating (multimedia Tank capacity Sulfur content ...... 395 system) ...... 139 Fuel ...... 396 Reserve (fuel) ...... 396 Sun visor System settings Operating ...... 135 Language ...... 252 Technical data Information ...... 390 Surround lighting Notes on language selection ...... 252 Reset function (multimedia system) ....257 Tire pressure monitoring system ...... 367 Setting ...... 127 Vehicle identification plate ...... 392 Index 497

Telephone ...... 281 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ Replying ...... 291 Activating functions during a call ...... 286 tem) ...... 233 Sending ...... 290 Call and ringtone volume ...... 285 Wireless charging (mobile phone) ...... 122 Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ Calls with several participants ...... 286 Telephone tem) ...... 236 Connecting a mobile phone (Near see Mobile phone Through-loading feature Field Communication (NFC)) ...... 284 see Seat Connecting a mobile phone (Pass‐ Telephone number key) ...... 283 Dialing (on-board computer) ...... 224 Tie-down eyes ...... 111 Connecting a mobile phone (Secure Telephony operating modes Time Simple Pairing) ...... 283 Bluetooth® Telephony ...... 282 Manual time setting ...... 248 Disconnecting a mobile phone ...... 284 Temperature ...... 136 Setting summer time ...... 248 Importing contacts ...... 288 Setting the time and date automati‐ Incoming call during an existing call .... 286 Temperature grade ...... 372 cally ...... 247 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 224 Text messages ...... 289 Setting the time zone ...... 248 Mobile phone voice recognition ...... 285 Calling a message sender ...... 291 Setting the time/date format ...... 248 Notes ...... 282 Changing folders ...... 291 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 373 Operating modes ...... 282 Composing ...... 290 Tire and Loading Information placard ... 367 Reception and transmission volume .... 285 Configuring the displayed text mes‐ Switching mobile phones ...... 284 sages ...... 290 Tire characteristics ...... 375 Switching mobile phones (Near Field Deleting ...... 291 Tire information table ...... 367 Communication (NFC)) ...... 284 Drafts ...... 291 Tire labeling ...... 372 Telephone menu overview ...... 281 Notes ...... 289 Telephone operation ...... 285 Options ...... 291 Characteristics ...... 375 Using Near Field Communication Outbox ...... 291 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) (NFC) ...... 284 Read-aloud function ...... 290 ...... 373 Reading ...... 290 Load index ...... 375 498 Index

Load-bearing capacity ...... 375 Checking the tire temperature ...... 366 Checking the tire pressure (man‐ Maximum tire load ...... 374 Function ...... 365 ually) ...... 364 Maximum tire pressure ...... 374 Tire pressure monitoring system Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ Overview ...... 372 Restarting ...... 367 sure monitoring syst em) ...... 366 Speed rating ...... 375 Technical data ...... 367 Checking the tire temperature (tire Temperature grade ...... 372 pressure monitoring system) ...... 366 Tire Quality Grading ...... 372 Tire pressure table ...... 363 Definitions ...... 377 Tire size designation ...... 375 Tire Quality Grading ...... 372 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Traction grade ...... 372 Tire temperature ...... 373 Tread wear grade ...... 372 Checking (tire pressure monitoring Flat tire ...... 340 Tire load (maximum) ...... 374 system) ...... 366 Load index ...... 375 Load-bearing capacity ...... 375 Tire pressure ...... 364 Tire pressure monitoring system (function) ...... 365 Maximum tire load ...... 374 Checking (manually) ...... 364 Maximum tire pressure ...... 374 Checking (tire pressure monitoring Tire tread ...... 360 MOExtended tires ...... 341 system) ...... 366 Tire-change tool kit Mounting ...... 387 Maximum ...... 374 Overview ...... 383 Noise ...... 360 Notes ...... 361 TIREFIT kit Notes on mounting ...... 380 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ Using ...... 342 Overview of tire labeling ...... 372 ing system ...... 367 Tires Removing ...... 387 Tire pressure monitoring system Replacing ...... 380 Changing ...... 384 (function) ...... 365 Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ Changing hub caps ...... 384 Tire pressure table ...... 363 ing system ...... 367 Characteristics ...... 375 TIREFIT kit ...... 342 Selection ...... 380 Checking ...... 360 Tire pr essure monitor Snow chains ...... 361 Checking the tire pressures ...... 366 Speed rating ...... 375 Index 499

Storing ...... 383 Reading the handwr iting recognition Traffic map Temperature grade ...... 372 aloud ...... 242 see Map Tire and Loading Information placard .. 367 Selecting a station and track ...... 242 Traffic Sign Assist ...... 206 Tire pressure (notes) ...... 361 Setting the sensitivity ...... 242 Function/notes ...... 206 Tire pressure monitoring system Tow starting ...... 356 Setting ...... 208 (function) ...... 365 System limits ...... 206 Tire pressure table ...... 363 Towing a trailer Tire Quality Grading ...... 372 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 209 Transferred vehicle data Tire size designation ...... 375 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 211 Android Auto ...... 294 TIREFIT kit ...... 342 Towing away ...... 352 Apple CarPlay™ ...... 294 Traction grade ...... 372 Towing eye Transmission position display ...... 151 Tread wear grade ...... 372 Installing ...... 356 Transporting Unusual handling characteristics ...... 360 Storage location ...... 355 Vehicle ...... 354 Top Tether ...... 51 Towing methods ...... 351 Tread wear grade ...... 372 Total distance ...... 220 Track Trim element (Care) ...... 338 Displaying ...... 220 Selecting (audio mode) ...... 308 Trip Touch Control Traction grade ...... 372 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 220 On-board computer ...... 216 Trip computer Operating ...... 240 Traffic information ...... 273 Setting the sensitivity ...... 240 Displaying the traffic map ...... 274 Displaying ...... 220 Displaying traffic incidents ...... 275 Resetting ...... 221 Touchpad Issuing hazard alerts ...... 275 Trip distance Activating/deactivating ...... 241 Live Traffic Information ...... 274 Operating ...... 241 Displaying ...... 220 Overview ...... 273 Resetting ...... 221 500 Index

Trip distance User profile ...... 254 QR code rescue card ...... 26 see Distance recorder Creating ...... 254 Qualified specialist workshop ...... 25 see Trip meter Importing/exporting ...... 255 Raising ...... 385 Trip meter ...... 220 Options ...... 255 Starting (emergency operation Selecting ...... 254 mode) ...... 145 Trunk lid Starting (smartphone) ...... 145 see Tailgate Using the telephone see Calls Starting (start/stop button) ...... 144 Turn signal indicator Switching off (start/stop button) ...... 157 see Turn signal light V Unlocking (from inside) ...... 61 Unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ...... 61 Turn signal light ...... 124 Vehicle ...... 144, 145 Activating/deactivating ...... 124 Ventilating (convenience opening) ...... 72 Activating/deactivating standby Voice commands (Voice Control Sys‐ Two-way radios mode ...... 165 tem) ...... 237 Frequencies ...... 391 Correct use ...... 25 Notes on installation ...... 390 Data acquisition ...... 26, 28 Vehicle data Transmission output (maximum) ...... 391 Diagnostics connection ...... 24 Displaying (DYNAMIC SELECT) ...... 151 Equipment ...... 20 Roof load ...... 400 U Limited Warranty ...... 26 Turning radius ...... 400 Locking (automatically) ...... 63 Vehicle height ...... 400 Units of measurement Vehicle length ...... 400 Setting ...... 252 Locking (from inside) ...... 61 Locking (KEYLESS-GO) ...... 61 Vehicle width ...... 400 Unlocking setting ...... 57 Locking (mechanical key) ...... 63 Wheelbase ...... 400 USB devices Lowering ...... 388 Vehicle data storage Connecting ...... 308 Maintenance ...... 21 Electronic control units ...... 26 USB port ...... 120 Parking ...... 165 Vehicle dimensions ...... 400 Problem notification ...... 25 Index 501

Vehicle identification number Vents Language setting ...... 229 see VIN see Air vents Media player voice commands ...... 235 Vehicle identification plate Video mode ...... 311 Message voice commands ...... 236 Paint code ...... 392 Activating ...... 309 Multifunction steering wheel (operat‐ VIN ...... 392 Activating/deactivating full-screen ing) ...... 227 mode ...... 311 Navigation voice commands ...... 231 Vehicle identification plate Operable functions ...... 228 see Model type Overview ...... 310 Settings ...... 311 Operating safety ...... 227 Vehicle interior Radio voice commands ...... 234 Cooling or heating (smartphone) ...... 144 VIN ...... 392 Switch voice commands ...... 229 Identification plate ...... 392 Vehicle key Telephone voice controls ...... 233 Seat ...... 392 Text message voice commands ...... 236 see SmartKey Windshield ...... 392 Vehicle maintenance Types of voice commands ...... 228 Visibility Vehicle voice commands ...... 237 see ASSYST PLUS Defrosting the windows ...... 139 Voice prompting ...... 228 Vehicle operation Windshield heater ...... 141 Voice control system Outside the USA or Canada ...... 21 Voice command types (Voice Control see Voice Control System Vehicle position System) ...... 228 Transmitting ...... 248 Voice Control System ...... 227 W Vehicle tool kit Application-specif ic voice commands Warning lamp Towing eye ...... 355 ...... 228 see Warning/indicator lamps Ventilating Audible help functions ...... 229 Warning system Convenience opening ...... 72 Entering numbers ...... 229 see ATA (anti-theft alarm system) Ventilation Global voice commands ...... 228 see Climate control Improving speech quality ...... 229 502 Index

Warning/indicator lamp 6Restraint system warning lamp ...458 Calling up options ...... 302 !ABS warning lamp ...... 454 7Seat belt warning lamp flashes ...459 Calling up the settings ...... 302 $Brake warning lamp (USA) ...... 452 Deleting a bookmark ...... 302 7Seat belt warning lamp lights Deleting browser data ...... 302 J Brakes warning lamp (Canada) .... 452 up ...... 459 Ending ...... 302 ?Coolant warning lamp ...... 464 hTire pressure monitoring sys‐ Managing bookmarks ...... 302 Overview ...... 301 ·Distance warning lamp ...... 460 tem warning lamp flashes ...... 467 Showing/hiding the menu ...... 301 #Electrical malfunction warning hTire pressure monitoring sys‐ Website lamp ...... 462 tem warning lamp lights up ...... 466 Calling up ...... 301 ;Engine diagnosis warning lamp ...462 !Yellow electric parking brake Showing/hiding the web browser åESP® OFF warning lamp ...... 456 indicator lamp is malfunctioning ...... 457 menu ...... 301 ÷ESP® warning lamp flashes ...... 454 Warning/indicator lamps ...... 449 Wheel chock ...... 383 ÷ESP® warning lamp lights up ...... 455 Instrument display (overview) ...... 8 Wheels Care ...... 336 8Fuel reserve warning lamp .. 462, 463 Overview ...... 449 PASSENGER AIR BAG ...... 42 Changing ...... 384 ÐPower steering system warning Warranty ...... 26 Changing hub caps ...... 384 lamp ...... 461 Checking ...... 360 Washer fluid Checking the tire pressure (man‐ éRBS warning lamp (USA/CND) .... 451 see Windshield washer fluid ! ually) ...... 364 Red indicator lamp, electric Washing by hand (care) ...... 334 Checking the tire pressure (tire pres‐ parking brake applied (Canada only) ...457 Weather information ...... 281 sure monitoring system) ...... 366 FRed indicator lamp, electric Checking the tire temperature (tire Web browser parking brake applied (USA only) ...... 457 pressure monitoring system) ...... 366 Calling up a web page ...... 301 Definitions ...... 377 Index 503

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire pressure monitoring system Windshield heater ...... 141 ...... 373 (function) ...... 365 Windshield heating Flat tire ...... 340 Tire pressure table ...... 363 see Windshield heater Interchanging ...... 382 Tire Quality Grading ...... 372 Load index ...... 375 Tire size designation ...... 375 Windshield washer fluid ...... 398 Load-bearing capacity ...... 375 TIREFIT kit ...... 342 Notes ...... 398 Maximum tire load ...... 374 Traction grade ...... 372 Windshield washer system Maximum tire pressure ...... 374 Tread wear grade ...... 372 Refilling ...... 332 MOExtended tires ...... 341 Unusual handling characteristics ...... 360 Windshield wipers Mounting ...... 387 Wi-Fi Replacing the wiper blades ...... 130 Noise ...... 360 Overview ...... 249 Switching on/off ...... 129 Notes on mounting ...... 380 Setting ...... 249 Winter operation Overview of tire labeling ...... 372 Setting up a hotspot ...... 250 Snow chains ...... 361 Removing ...... 387 Setting up an Internet connection ...... 297 Replacing ...... 380 Winter tires Restarting the tire pressure monitor‐ Window airbag ...... 38 Setting the permanent speed limit ...... 177 ing system ...... 367 Window lifter Wiper blades Selection ...... 380 see Side windows Care ...... 336 Snow chains ...... 361 Windows Changing ...... 130 Speed rating ...... 375 see Side windows Wireless charging Storing ...... 383 Windows (Care) ...... 336 Function/notes ...... 120 Temperature grade ...... 372 Mobile phone ...... 122 Tire and Loading Information placard .. 367 Windshield Tire characteristics ...... 375 Defrosting ...... 136 Wireless vehicle components Tire pressure (notes) ...... 361 Infrared reflective ...... 135 Declaration of conformity ...... 23 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 130 504 Index

Workout program Overview ...... 90 Workshop see Qualified specialist workshop